HISTORICAL DOCUMENTATION FOR 42-FOOT BRT BUSES BUILT …

H I S T O R I C A L D O C U M E N T A T I O N F O R 4 2 - F O O T B R T B U S E S B U I L T F O R 4 2 F O O T B R T B U S E S B U I L T

B Y N A B I F O R T H E M A S S A C H U S E T T S P O R T

A U T H O R I T Y ( M A S S P O R T )

Submitted: March 28, 2013

HistoricalDocumentationfor42‐FootBRTBusesBuiltbyNABIfortheMassachusettsPortAuthority(MASSPORT)

Index

1. 42BRT-04 298000 Sales Order Revision C

2. Respective RFP/Specification

3. Vehicle Technical Worksheet

4. NABI Warranty

42BRT‐04298000SalesOrderRevisionC

Massport Top Bus Number - 298000

North American Bus Industries Initial Release:12-13-2010 Current Release:9-15-11

Sales Order Revision Level:C

Accounting: Common\Sales Orders ReleasedAftermarket Parts: Common\Sales Orders Released

Customer: Contractual Contact, Technical Contact, Resident Inspector (1 ea)Customer Service: Common\Sales Orders Released

Manufacturing: Common\Sales Orders ReleasedNABI, Kft: Common\Sales Orders Released

Project Management: Project Manager, Contract Administrator, file (1 ea)Quality Assurance: Common\Sales Orders Released Warranty: Common\Sales Orders Released

Electronic Distribution: Common\Sales Orders Released

Project Manager: Debbie Moritz

Sales Order Revision - Cfor

Massachusetts Port AuthorityEast Boston, MA

Top Bus: 298000 - Bus Model: 42BRT-04Issued: September 15, 2011

Sales Order Form #FCOP-03-01-01 page 1 of 68 Form Revision Level: D




Line Rev Main Heading Item Spec Special Requirements

SOCN Issue Date SOCN # Current Sales Order DATE Current Sales Order LEVEL

15-Sep-11 42BRT-04 15-Sep-11 CLine Rev Main Heading Item Sub-line

A 04 Gen. Property Type Bus AB 04 Manuals & Doc. manuals BC WarrantyD TrainingE 04 Ship Loose Parts Ship loose partsF Spare PartsG Special Tools1 04 General Req. Seats 12 Performance3 01 Engine Type 3

4 04 Cooling System Radiator 4

5 04 Transmission retarder switch 56 Hydraulic System7 Fuel System8 04 Axles hubodometer 8.49 Exhaust System10 01 Suspension Wheels 10.511 Steering12 Brake System

13 04 Pneumatics pneumatics 1314 02 Body & Chassis undercoating 1415 Fire & Gas Warning16 01 Floor Material floor boards 1617 Steps & Stepwells18 Wheelwells19 Rain Gutters20 License Plates21 Rubrails22 Fenders23 Splash Aprons

24 04 Exterior Comp. Compt lights 24.325 01 Bumpers Bumpers 25 Clarified front lift towing only, noted the bumper color black

Clarified the number of light required in driver's barrier enclosure. 9-7-11 Added requirement for multiplexing to control service area lighting. 11-16-11 added the requirement for light & switch in Webasto compartment

changed the PSI for the pressure relief valve to 175 per Cummins requirements , noted the approval by customer for P-clamps & clarified the air fittings. 10-6-11 Deleted the requirement for guards on the air tank drain valves.change undercoating to Tectyl 3334 Gray

Customer accepted cost change 2010-208 change the fl oor boards to composite.

change the hubodometer from Engler to Stemco

Clarified the finish for the wheels

Added the seat layout 4-20-12 updated seat layout rev number

Added note copy of Cummins IQA required

change the description of radiator to tube & fin, changed the radiator fins per inch from 9 to 10. 8-25-11 deleted the requirement for air intake clean er. 3-16-12 Added the requirement for EMP cooling system in lieu of Touchstone. Customer accepted cc 2012-022

change the rand name of the transmission oil cooler to Champ. 10-20-11 changed the retarder switch to the overhead compartment (this was marked in error) 3-15-12 Removed the requirement for auto neutral feature.

Added the requirement for preventative maintenance m anual. Clarified the manual requirments. 11-2-11 Updated delivery address for manuals.

Added the requirement for driver's barrier key & mandrel key

PM Initials Total Release?

DM yes

DESCRIPTION OF CHANGE

indicated Gen II, updated unit prices based on acceppted cost changes, 9-29-11 updated unit prices based on accepted cost changes. 11-2-11 updated address information

Configuration

SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICE





Line Rev Main Heading Item Spec Special RequirementsConfiguration


SOCN Issue Date SOCN # Current Sales Order DATE Current Sales Order LEVEL

15-Sep-11 42BRT-04 15-Sep-11 CLine Rev Main Heading Item Sub-line

26 04 Exterior Finish Paint 2627 04 Exterior Lighting customer sr 27.5

28 04 Interior Panel Decal 2829 01 Floor Covering floor covering 2930 04 Interior Lighting Interior lights 3031 Fare Collection32 Int. Acc Panel, Door

33 02 Pssger Seating seats 33.234 Passenger Assists

35 04 Passenger Doors Doors 3536 Wheelchair Acc.

37 04 Controls side console Side console 3738 Wipers & Washers39 02 Driver's Seat Driver's Seat 39.240 01 Mirrors interior mirrors 40.141 04 Windows Driver's Window 41.1

42 01 HVAC type & capacity 4243 04 Roof Hatches, Vent vent 43.144 Destination Sign45 Info & Advertising

46 03 Stop Request stop request 46

47 04 Radio System antenna 4748 01 Public Address Speakers 48.1

49 01 Electrical System batteries 49.6 49.350 Articulated Items51 04 Alternative Fuels shut off valve 51

Added the requirement for maintenance free as requir ed by tech spec. Customer accepted cost change 2010-226, added the requirement for Group 31 batteries. 3-16-11 added the requirement for Ultracap Starting. Changed the alternator to Niehoff C703 model for use with ISL engine. 4-20-11 Deleted the requirement for the capacitor 4/0 cable not to exceed 6 foot & added the standard loom and clamping for clarification. 9-23-11 Change the battery to Exide to help manage 6 0 day date tracking. 3-19-12 Added the requirment for EMP 450 alternator in lieu of the Niehoff 703, the EMP alternator larger alternator required with the EMP cooling system, also change the equalizer to Surepower this is also for the EMP cooling system.

Deleted the requirement for Whitney HW60 shut off valve and add the Agility std Swagelok valve 11-10-11 delete the Swagelok valve & added the Hanson quick connect defuel valve per Agility request.

Clarified the driver's vent requirement

change the background color of the stop request sign to our std red 8-25 deleted the requirement for pull cords, stop request signs and palm switch for w/c flip seats. Added the requirement for mounting provisions for future information display signs. 8-29-11 Leave chime on pilot bus and delete for serial production

Noted the model for the customer installed radio. C hange the radio antennas from 2 to 1, deleted the requirement for GPS antenna provisions & added conduit. Added radio antenna model HAF4016. Deleted the requ irement for conduit for cell modem antenna. 8-29-11 Clarified the requirement for conduit. 11-17-11 added the requirment for bracket to mount motorola radio mic 3-21-12 removed the requirement for the UTA AntennaAdded the requirement for speaker switch 3-21-12 removed the requirment for the hands free mi c

Indicated color low washer fluid & rear door disable d tell tale. Added Webasto switch & indication light. Added requirement for click w/turn signal. Added alarm to sensitive edge. Relocated the Webasto preheat switch & retarder switch to the destination sign compartment. Added 3-way speaker switch 8-29-11 added note regarding chime switch, leave on pilot delete for serial production. 3-6-12 Deleted the requirement for the override swit ch for the Vapor Class system. 3-8-12 added a programming note. 3-21-12 removed the requirement for the driver's side sunshade. 4-3-12 Relocated the kneel & ramp controls switches to front dash, replace the key assembly with spring loaded toggle switch, changed the yellow extension on the hazard switch to red, added a yellow extension to the light switch and add a hole in the side control panel for Clever PA Plate Ref. CC 2012-074 4-19-12 Added the requirement to relocate the retarder switch from the overhead compartment to the side console at the rear. Customer accepted cost chang 2012-101.

Added the driver's seat fabric, Clarified the driver's seat optionsClarified the number of mirrors & location 4-27-12 Added the requirement for friction style ext mirror ref CC 2012-106 4-27-12 deleted the requirement for the 2 interior mirrors at the entrance door ref cc 2012-114. 9-14-12 CS ext mirror changed to friction style field service made change at accepDeleted the requirement for lock on driver's window & replace with lockless interior & exterior pull handles.

corrected the HVAC pull down requirements. Clarifie d the underseat heat requirements. Added the heating system performance requirement. Noted the Thermo King unit is rear mount Thermo King T1 unit & clarified the controls. 6-9-11 Change the refrigerant from 134A to 407C.

Added the seat layout, seat colors and fabric. Adde d the luggage rack requirements. 5-12-11 clarified passenger seat configuration. 5-2 7-11 Added requirement for fixed flip seat. Decal. 3-14-15 Added the requirement to delete the arm rest s on all passenger flip seats cc2012-063 accepted by customer 4-20-12 updated seat layout revision 6-11-12 deleted the requirement for the decal for the fixed flip seat.

added the requirement for Vapor Class System which w as mistakenely removed, removed the requirement for hinge compartment for emergency door devices. 3-6-12 Deleted the requirement for the Vapor Class system

DESCRIPTION OF CHANGE

Added the paint color, added the bus number for pilot bus. Added the seco nd paint color. 11-16-11 added the requirement for kneeling & windshield washer fluid decal. 3-19-12 updated the bus numbers. 5-9-12 added the requirement for additional bus numbers3-21-12 Added the requirement for an exterior retarder light

Noted special requirements. Added the modesty panel s to match the seat layout. Added the melamine color. 5-27-11 Added requirement for fixed flip seat. Decal . 9-27-11 changed the bulkhead panel color to grey pampas, navy legacy entered in error. 6-11-12 deleted the requirement for the decal for the fixed flip seat.Clarified special requirements. Added the RCA floo r covering color.Changed the requirement for lights out with door on the curbside of the bus


PM Initials Total Release?

DM yes







52 02 Surveillance APC install 52.1

53 01 Misc. Req. Misc 53

54 03 Testing & Certs. Testing 54

Added the camera locations. 5-19-11 removed the req uirement for 1TB DVR 6-9-11 deleted the requirements for the Safety Vision camera system. Added the requirement for camera cable provisions. 3-21-12 added the requirement for partial installat ion of the UTA APC system in lieu of the full install 4-27-12 Changed the camera cable provisions ref CC 2012-102

Customer accepted cost change 2010-214, deleted the requirement for driver storage box at front curbside. Added the requirments for the luggage racks 3-16-12 Deleted the requirement for the S1 Guard. 4-16-12 Revise luggage racks per cost change 2012-090, customer has approved cost changeRevised the test requirement to include heater pull-up test. Added required installation audits. Added air system performance test. Added requirement for weight slip. Added the requirement forMeritor drive axle installation audit. Deleted the requirement for camera system installati on audit. 3-6-12 deleted the requirement for S1 Guard






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICE04 Send title documents to:A General Property Massachusetts Port Authority

Property Address 1 Harborside DriveInformation East Boston, MA East Boston, MA 02128

Attn: Helen Mao Contract Number 617-568-3664

Date of N.T.P. or P.O.FTA Grant number(s)

01 XType of Bus

X

Quantity of Buses (BASE) Quantity of Buses (OPTION)

Option NTP must be exercised by

Pilot -Bid Price Delivery

BASE BUSES Taxes 04 AMENDMENT #1

Change Order #1Change Order #2Change Order #4

04 TOTAL INVOICE PRICE Contract # to be shown on invoice, include base bus price, ADA pricing & delivery on invoice

Bid Price Delivery

Taxes OPTION BUSES Change Order #1

Change Order #2Change Order #3Change Order #4

TOTAL INVOICE PRICE

A Payment Terms(cont.) Property

Information(cont.)

Performance Bond Terms

Liquidated Damage Amount (BASE) per calendar day per busLiquidated Damages START on (BASE)

Liquidated Damage Amount (OPTION)Liquidated Damages START on (OPTION)

NA

$250

30 days after acceptance & receipt of invoice

-$

15,692$

463,768$

448,076$

35'40'42'60'CompoBus

18

RFP # 2010 02 1830-Nov-10

Low Floor - Gen IIStandard Floor

Massachusetts Port AuthorityLogan Office Center Suite 200SOne Harborside Drive






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICEInvoice to

04 Delivery Quantity Deliver pilot bus to:Delivery Conditions Paul Revere Transportation

Delivery Address 100 Eastern Ave.Chelsea, MA 02150Attn: Mr. Richard Daley Jr. 617-889-5899

Contractual Contact [email protected]

FaxAddress

Technical Contact [email protected]

FaxAddress

East Boston, MA 02128

Helen Mao617-568-3664617-568-5999One Harborside Drive, Suite 200S East Boston, MA 02128

100 Eastern Ave.Chelsea, MA 02150

Helen Mao617-568-3664617-568-5999One Harborside Drive, Suite 200S

188 am to 5 pm Monday thru Friday






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICEWarranty Contact [email protected] General Phone

(cont.) Property FaxInformation Address

(cont.)

Training ContactPhone

FaxAddress

02 2.1.12.5 Spec28 SR - 2 draft at pilot delivery and 28 final

B Manuals and Documentation 3 SR - 2 draft at pilot delivery, 3 interim w/ 1st p roduction delivery and 3 final3 SR - 2 draft at pilot delivery, 3 interim w/ 1st p roduction delivery and 3 final

2.1.12.5 3 SR - 2 draft at pilot delivery, 3 interim w/ 1st p roduction delivery and 3 final3 SR - 2 draft at pilot delivery, 3 interim w/ 1st p roduction delivery and 3 final3

04 3 Deliver Manuals to: Massachusetts Port Authority3 Qty, Engine Troubleshooting & Repair Logan Airport Central Stockroom3 East Boston, MA 021283 Attn: Doug Wheaton - Unit 23903 Qty, Transmission Trouble Shooting Manual3333

01 3 SR - 2 draft at pilot delivery, 3 interim w/ 1st p roduction delivery and 3 final

Qty, Transmission Maintenance ManualQty, Transmission Parts Manual

Qty, W.C. Lift/Ramp manualsQty, HVAC Maintenance manualsQty, HVAC Parts manuals

Qty, Maintenance manualsQty, Parts manualsQty, Electrical schematics (separate)Qty, Air schematic (part of NABI MM)Qty, Engine Maintenance manualsQty, Engine Parts manuals

617-889-5899


Print ManualsQty, Driver's manuals

Paul Revere - James Viola617-889-5899


Paul Revere - Ed Tighe

Preventative Maintenance ManualDestination Sign Maintenance & Parts






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICE2.1.12.5 SpecB Manuals and 3 SR - 2 draft at pilot delivery and 3 final

(cont.) Documentation 3 SR - 2 draft at pilot delivery , 3 interim w/ 1st pr oduction delivery and 3 final(cont.) 3 SR - 2 draft at pilot delivery , 3 interim w/ 1st pr oduction delivery and 3 final

3 SR - 2 draft at pilot delivery , 3 interim w/ 1st pr oduction delivery and 3 final33

nanana3

nana3

01 3 SR - 2 draft at pilot delivery , 3 interim w/ 1st pr oduction delivery and 3 final

Item Miles Years Note: all warranties are parts & labor unless noted.

C Warranty Basic Bus 50,000 1 yr Air compressor: 2 years unlimited mileageBasic Structure 150,000 3yrs Air drier: 1 year/ unlimited mileage

Structural Integrity 600,000 12yrs Alternator: 2 years/ unlimited mileageEngine unlimited 2yrs APC System: 2 years/ unlimited mileage

Transmission unlimited 2yrs Interior/ Exterior LED's: 2 years/ unlimited mileage (parts only)HVAC unlimited 2yrs Power steering system: 1 year / unlimited mileage

Axles, drive & non-drive 100,000 2yrs Starter: 2 years/ unlimited mileageBrakes 50,000 1 yr Door systems: 2 years/ 100,000 miles

WC Lift/Ramp unlimited 1 yr Multiplex system: 3 years/ 150,000 milesDestination Signs unlimited 3yrs Flooring (Greenwood Forest Products XL Bus Panel) 12 years/ unlimited mileage

Emission Controls-Cummins 100,000 5yrsBody Panels 150,000 3yrs

Radiator & CAC unlimited 1 yr

4.1.1.5 During the warranty period, repairs or modifications that arecompleted due to lack of material or inability to provide proper repair for 30 calendar day, the applicable warranty period shall be extendedby the number of days equal to the days out of service.

Labor Rate $45 hrLabor Administration 26%Parts Administration 15%

Towing XRoad/Service Calls

Fleet Defect (%) 25% 4.1.6 reference approved RFA for 25% in lieu of 10%4.2.3.7-Contractor to reimburse the Authority for warranty labor & parts 60 days of receipt of warranty claim

handling cost4.2.3.5 Plus the cost of towing

Notes

Qty, Engine Parts manualsQty, Transmission Maintenance manualsQty, Transmission Parts manualsQty, W.C. Lift/Ramp manualsQty, HVAC Maintenance manualsQty, HVAC Parts manuals

Preventative Maintenance Manual

Electronic Manuals on CD-ROMQty, Driver's manualsQty, Maintenance manuals

Destination Sign Maintenance & Parts

Qty, Parts manualsQty, Electrical schematics (separate)Qty, Air schematic (part of NABI MM)Qty, Engine Maintenance manuals






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICE2.1.12.9 Please reference 2.1.12.9 Training & Technical Support for specific Training Requirement & ScheduleD Instructions and/or training on how to use special tools & equipment shall be provided

Operator Training 2.1.12.9.1 2 sets of DVD's one month after the delivery of the first production vehicle. The tapes shall cover: a) Service preparation, b) Normal Operating procedures, c) Emergency operating procedures, d)Moving a vehicle with a problem (fault)Please reference 2.1.12.9.1 for the specific Operator Training Requirements & Schedule Requirements

2.1.12.9.2

2.1.12.9.3

Quantity04 1

E 04 Ship Loose 1Parts

DescriptionDriver's barrier keys, sets per bus

Training & Technical Support

Maintenance Training Please reference 2.1.12.9.2 Maintenance Training for the specific Training Requirement & Schedule Requirements

Renewal Parts Manual Seminar Please reference 2.1.12.9.3 Renewal Parts Manual Seminar for specific Training Requirement & Schedule Requirements

Key, (access) door mandrel "T" key






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICEX

01 General TypeRequirements

Length

X

Width 2.1.9.1.1 X excluding mirrors

Height2.1.9.1.1 133 Maximum

Clearance 2.1.9.2 5.5 minimum10

5.5 minimum8.598

na

Step 2.2.1.6.1 15.5 Front door clear opening 36 inches - 2.1.1.4Height 2.2.1.6.1 16 Rear door clear opening 44 inches - 2.1.1.4

Addendum #2 Curb Weight Maximum allowable & shall be adjusted for the weight of equipment Maximum before penalty supplied under changes ordered

01 Seating 32Capacity 2

04 110-Massport_42BRT-G01e

2.2.5.2.2 83Noise 76Levels as specified under APTA whitebook

dBA interior @ driverConditions:

guidelines

Seated passengersQty, wheelchair positions, forward facingQty, wheelchair positions, rearward facing

Seat Dwg #

dBA interior @ passenger seats

Angle, departureAngle, breakoverAngle, breakover, rear (60' only)

Entrance door- not to exceedCenter/exit door - not to exceed

31,900

Inches, highest point

Inches, axle zoneInches, bodyInches, wheel areaInches, lowest pointAngle, approach

35' over body skin40' over body skin42' 5" over body skin60' over body skin

102" over body skin

Inches, roof skin

Low floorStandard floorCompoBus






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICEExterior 2.3.1.5.3 83 dBA exterior01 General Noise SAE Standard J366

Requirements Levels(cont.) (cont.)

2.3.1.1.2 6502 Performance Top Speed

2.3.1.1.3 40 2.3.1.1.4 Acceleration 02.1 Gradeability 7 Speed 10 mph Time Secs 5.0

20 mph 10.8 30 mph 20.0

SCAAN number 40 mph 31.0 50 mph 62.0

01 2.3.1.3.1 Copy of Cummins IQA required03 Engine Type Engine to be equipped with self-locking dip sticks & permanent

identification tags.

X

280900

Xmagnetic type

Plug, drain, specialType

OtherType

Rating, horsepowerRating, torque (lb/ft.)Port, oil samplingType

ISCISLISMISC-GISL-G

MaximumMinimumMaximum mph during drive-away

mph on 2.5% grademph on 16% grade

Conditions:






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICEX03 Engine Type

(cont.) (cont.) (cont.)

03.1 FuelX 2.3.1.1.6 Operating Range 350

2.3.1.2.2 all applicable safety placards for high voltage or compressed gasses shall be applied to the appropriate areasthat can affect service personnel

2.3.1.3.1 X

X American manufacture 03.2 Air Filter

to be clamped together or secured with a single wing nut, not X clamped with multiple nuts.

2.3.1.3.1 X

2.3.1.2.2 X by-pass engine oil filter to be spin-on type03.3 Oil Filter

Auto-fill, engine, metallic reservoir

Spinner II (by-pass)Pall

Filter indicators (LEDs)

Auto-fill, engineAuto-fill, engine, plastic reservoir

Plastic housingIndicator, restrictionIndicator, restriction, graduated

Standard, both, engine manufacturer'sStandard, primary, engine manufacturer'sSpinner C/S (primary)

Emissions, LEVEmissions, ULEV

Engine compartmentAtticMetal housing

Diesel #2CNGLNGDual fuel

Emissions, EPAEmissions, CARB

Lubricant, standardLubricant, specialType

Diesel #1






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICE2.3.1.2.2 X03.4 Fuel Filter

X

2.3.1.2.2 X Addendum #203.5 Lines and Color coded tags to be applied on all fluid lines, in the engine compt

Hoses X at the fittings, to identify all the different fluids carried in lines.(engine cmpt) Tags to be made of heavy duty plastic, that will withstand steam

cleaningLines to be routed or shielded so that failure of a line shall not allowfuel or oil to spray or drain onto any component operable above the

Note : Premium flexible lines with std crimped ends can be used with rating as Std SAE or JIC follows: GH100/ GH195/ FC355/ FC510/ 2807 PTFE

auto-ignition temperature of the fluid.2.3.1.2.3 X

03.6 BeltsX

2.3.1.2.3 SR SR-Belt guards to be removable for service by removal of Lynch pinsthreaded fasteners shall not be used. Lynch pins shall be securedby steel cable lanyards

2.3.1.3.103.7 Starter X

X

42MTModel #

Overcrank, integral protectionOvercrank, I/O controlsPneumaticIngersoll-RandStartMasterVolume, air tank, in gallons

Tensioner, A/C, automaticGuard, belt, hinged

ElectricDelcoNippondenso

Stainless steel w/Teflon liner

Type

Standard, engine manufacturer's

Tensioner, A/C, standard

Valve, shut-off, engine mfgs standardValve, shut-off, 1/4 turn

End, crimpedEnd, reusableParker-Note:Aeroquip

Standard, engine manufacturer'sFuelProRacor






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICE2.3.1.3.1 Automatic shutdown to occur within 30 seconds when parameters03.8 Engine are exceeded

Shutdown X An engine override switch required for additional 30 secs of System X engine operation

X

X

2.3.1.3.304 04 Cooling Radiator

System

04 X Customer accepted cc 2012-02204

Xmagnetic type

2.3.1.3.3 X SR-safety release valve & the water filler shall be no more than 6004.1 Surge Tank inches above the ground & both shall be accessible through the

1 same door.X

X

2.3.1.3.3 X04.2 Fan

Fill, sideCoolant, standardCoolant, specialType

StandardHigh ambient

Type

Stainless steel

# of coolant probesSight tubeFill, rear

G & OQualityEMP Cooling SystemFins per inch (maximum)NON louvered finsPlug, drain, special

DPF temperatureEngine compartment fire

L.A.T. requirement (in degrees Fahrenheit)Touchstone - Tube & Fin

Engine manufacturer's standard

Coolant temperatureOil pressureEngine exhaust back pressure






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICE2.3.1.3.2 Thermostatically protected & the heater shall be equipped with 04.3 Engine Block X safety devices to prevent: over fueling, overheating due to loss of

Heater coolant or water pump failure, & operation during low battery 03 voltage conditions.

X The heater will be electronically started by a remote mounted switch & equipped with a green on/off LED mounted by or above thedriver.

Rating in BTU/hr. A green LED light, approx 1" diameter, shall be mounted on the outside of the auxiliary heater compartment door to indicate whenthe auxiliary heater is operating. This light shall blink error codesif the auxiliary heating system malfunctions.

2.3.1.3.3. X Note: Radiator piping & fittings shall be stainless steel or brass04.4 Lines and Hoses tubing & if practical, rubber hoses shall be eliminated. Necessary

hoses shall be premium, silicone rubber type with 4 ply polyesterfabric reinforcement that are impervious to all vehicles fluids.

X

2.3.1.3.3 X

X

X

X

2.3.1.3.1 X Transmission to be equipped with self-locking dip sticks & 05 Transmission Type permanent identification tags.

X

HP590HP600

AllisonB300B400RB500

Z-F

Valves, shut-off, at driver's heaterValves, 1/4 turn, at driver's heaterValves, shut-off, at main heaterValves, 1/4 turn, at main heaterValves, shut-off, at underfloor/underseat heater.Valves, 1/4 turn, at underfloor/underseat heater

Aeroquip

Stainless steel w/Teflon linerTypeValves, shut-off, at marine pumpValves, 1/4 turn, at marine pump

Controls, manualControls, radio

End, crimpedEnd, reusableParker

ProHeatWebasto NGW 300

12v24v






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICE5 A decal describing the operation shall be affixed to the operators05 Transmission Type 2.3.1.3.4 X console in the area of the transmission control.

(cont.) (cont.) (cont.)0404 X

X

1/3 off throttle; 2/3 light brake; 3/3 full brake

XMagnetic type

Transynd

2.3.1.3.4 X05.1 Filter

03 2.3.1.3.4 X Transmission shall be equipped with a rebuildable & Cleanable05.2 Cooler oil cooler

05.3 SensorsLow transmission fluidLow voltageHigh transmission temperature

Type

Standard, transmission manufacturer'sPall

Filter indicators (LEDs)

Champ

Port, oil samplingTypePlug, drain, specialType

Lubricant, standardLubricant, special

2 step1/2 brake; 1/2 brake1/2 throttle; 1/2 brake3 step1/3 brake; 1/3 brake; 1/3 brake1/3 throttle; 1/3 brake; 1/3 brake

Retarder, switch, side console, guardedRetarder, switch, overheadRetarder, switch, rear run control boxSetting, light/lowSetting, medium

# of forward gearsRetarderRetarder, switch, side console






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICEX05.4 Lines and

Hoses

X

2.3.1.2.4 Critical point in the hydraulic system shall be fitted with service 06 Hydraulic System Main Hy. Pump ports so that portable diagnostic equipment may be connected or

X sensors for an off-board diagnose system permanently attachedmagnetic type to monitor system operation

X

2.3.1.2.4 X SR-sensor required for low hydraulic system operation pressure.

06.1 Power Steering XPump

06.2 Body Mounted XHydraulic Lines 2.1.11 X

and Hoses

X

X

Hose, end, crimpedHose, end, reusableHose, ParkerHose, AeroquipType

Eaton

Line, steelLine, stainless steelIsolators

Plug, drain, specialType

Lubricant, standardLubricant, specialType

Sender, low hydraulic fluid level

Auto-fill, transmissionAuto-fill, transmission, plastic reservoirAuto-fill, transmission, metallic reservoir

End, reusableParkerAeroquip

Stainless steel w/Teflon linerType

End, crimped






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICE07 Fuel Type

System X(see line 51 for

Alternative Fuels)

2.3.1.4.7 A pressure transducer shall be incorporate d into the high07.1 Fuel Tank(s) pressure fuel manifold which shall provide the operators low fuel

warning light which shall activate a 500psi17,661 seven 14.2" x 120" Tank System

2.3.1.4.8 fill receptacle shall accept a Sherex CC-5000 nozzle and shall07.2 Fuel Filler incorporate a dust cap permanently affixed to the receptacle. The

fuel fill access door shall incorporated an interlock system that willdeactivate the engine starting system if the fuel door is open.

07.3 Fuel Lines(underbody) X

X07.3.1 Fuel Lines

(engine cmpt) X

Type

End, crimpedEnd, reusableParkerAeroquip

Stainless steel w/Teflon liner

NylonSteelStainless steelCombination Nylon/steelCombination Nylon/stainless steel

Emco-WheatonTwist capFlip capParker (Gas only)Moog (Gas only)

Stainless steelAluminumMinimum # of gallons (or SCF)Gauge, fuel level (or pressure)Light, low fuel level (or pressure)

Pressure fill

Diesel #1Diesel #2CNGLNGDual fuel

Steel






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICE2.3.2.1 X08 Axles Type

2.3.6.1.1 X

2.3.5.1.3 X08.1 Front

08.2 Center

2.3.5.1.3 X08.3 Rear

5.38X

2.3.2.2 X 6 digits, 3/16 high by 1/8 wide numerals, Lexan cover with steel08.4 Mileage base, tamperproof and lifetime lubrication

Recorder(hubodometer)

04 X

04

Curbside hub mountedVeeder-RootStemcoS/A FleetwatchE.J. Ward

Axle ratio X.XX:1Lubricant, standardLubricant, specialType

MechanicalElectronic

Seal, axle manufacturer's standard

Grease lubricatedOil lubricatedSeal, axle manufacturer's standard

Oil lubricatedSeal, axle manufacturer's standard

Speedometer signal sensor

Grease lubricatedOil lubricated

MeritorDanaWheels, hub pilotWheels, stud pilot

Grease lubricated






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICE2.3.1.5 X09 Exhaust System Emissions CARB

LEVULEV

2.3.1.5.2 X09.1 Location &

Termination X

X09.2 Clamping and

Sealing

2.3.3.110 Suspension Air Springs

X

2.3.3.2.310.1 Shock

AbsorbersX

2.3.3.1 X10.2 Leveling Valves

2.3.3.2.2 X Amber LED light to be installed near the entrance door & front curbside bumper flash10.3 Kneeling instantaneously upon activation of kneeling system & remain

operational until system is decatived. Audible alarm shall activateinstantaneously upon activation of kneeling system & remain

X on during the lowering portion of the kneeling cycle

Standard-Front

High-curbBeeper, with powerBeeper, with function

GabrielKoni - Adjustable

KnorrKing of the RoadMidland

TaurusFirestoneGoodyear

Sachs-BogeMonroe

Clamp, standardClamp, bandClamp, V-bandFlange, bolted

Insulation, wrap, exhaust pipe(s)

EPA

Roadside roof

ElbowRain cap






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICE2.3.3.2.4 X10.4 Suspension Lubrication

(cont.)

2.3.6.1.1 X SR-wheel nuts shall be torqued to the manufacturer's specification with disc-locks10.5 Wheels on all lug nuts

SR SR-ten hole Dura-Bright with shoulder studsSR Rear wheels must have sufficient spacing between dual tires

to permit use of skid chains.01 X

X

11

2.3.6.1.2 X Contractor shall apply approved lubricant to each rim prior to 10.6 Tires mounting the tire assembly. The tires shall be mounted so that the

position of the valve stem will locate the tire brand number inward,except the outside rear which shall be outward. The valve stems

X shall be those recommended by the tire manufacture or approved equal.

X6

305/70R22.5X

X11 Spare, balanced

Quantity per busSize

Front, balanceFront, spin balanceRear, balanceSpare, mounted

Bias plyGoodyearMichelinFirestone - BridgestoneCustomer supplyNABI supply

Customer supplyNABI supplyQuantitySpare, mounted Spare, balanced

Radial

Stud pilotSteelAluminumWith extensions for rearsFinish, machineFinish, polish (both sides)

Automatic lubricatorRobertshawLubri-quipGroenweld

Hub pilot

Fittings, standard-(Zerk Fitting)






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICE2.3.4.3 Steering wheel to be no less than 19.5 & black in color11 Steering Wheel

X standard

X

2.3.4.311.1 Gearbox X

(no identifier required)11.2 Metallic Lines

(underbody) 2.1.11 X

X11.2.1 Hoses

(underbody) X

2.3.4.3 X Douglas with four positions11.3 Steering X

Column

2.3.5.1.112 Brake System Type X

2.3.5.1.2 X12.1 Linings

2.3.5.1.112.2 Slack Adjusters

2.3.5.1 X12.3 Brake Chambers

2.3.5.1 X12.4 Antilock Brakes

WabcoWith traction control

ManualHaldexMeritor

Standard

Switch, turn signal

S-camDisc brakes

Manufacturer's standard

Hose, end, crimped

Automatic

Hose, end, reusableHose, ParkerHose, Aeroquip

TiltTelescopic

BendixZ-F

SteelStainless steelIsolators

PaddedNon-padded2 spoke3 spokeHorn button in steering wheel hub






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICE2.3.5.1.413 Pneumatics Air Compressor

X

XX

convoluted copper or Stainless steel or Teflon hose w/braided stainless steel jacket between the engine & the air dryer

2.3.5.1.4 Air lines, except necessary flexible lines, shall conform to the 13.1 Lines (chassis) installation & material requirement of SAE Standard J844-Type 1 for

copper tubing with standard, brass, flared or ball sleeve fittings,or SAE Standard J844-type 3b for nylon tubing if not subject to temperatures over 200 F. Accessory & other non-critical lines mayuse Type 3A tubing. Nylon tubing to be color coded. Copper lines

02 to be supported by looms or P-Clamps to prevent line from touching one another or any component of the vehicle.

2.3.5.1.4 X13.2 02 Service Ports Parker HC2 ahead of the tire inflation valve

02 Parker HC2X

Std tire inflation valve w/ 3/8 FIP fitting ahead of the tire inflation valve

2.3.5.1.4 X Reservoirs shall be sloped toward the drain valve. The air system13.3 02 Air Tanks and shall be protected by a pressure relief valve set at 175 psi

Drains X04

2.3.5.1.4 X Turbo-2000 or approved equal. 13.4 Air Drier

The dryer shall be desiccant type with electrically heateddrain. Heater device shall be thermostatically controlled.

Turbo 2000

Location

Chicago RawhideBendixHaldexGraham WhiteModel

Type

Aluminum tanks

Drain, 1/4 turnDrain, flush-guardedQuantity, automatic drains

Brake lines, Aeroquip

FrontType

RearType

Rear

GovernorDischarge line size in inches I.D.

Material

Nylon

Brake lines, Parker

BendixHolsetWabco






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICE2.2.1.10.3 Anti-skid provisions; shall enable passengers and14 Body Materials X service personnel to walk safely from the escape hatch to the

and Chassis front & rear of the vehicle & rooftop equipment withouttraversing an area in which anti-skid material has not beeninstalled.

2.2.1.2.11 X Addendum#2

2.2.1.7.1 X front & rear wheelwells - STAINLESSAddendum#2 approval to provide aluminum & fiberglass access doors 2.2.1.9.2

2.2.1.2.7 Jacking pads to be painted safety yellow

Corrosion X14.1 02 Protection 2.2.1.2.6 X Approved by customer June 8, 2011

315 Fire & Gas Heat detectors for

Warning DASH indicator ONLY

11 if in separate compartment

2.3.7.6 X Control panel shall electrically supervise the auto fire suppression15.1 Fire system following the wiring circuits for power supply, Fire/Heat

Suppression Detected & System actuation. Indication of Normal, Fault & fire conditions shall be displayed on the control monitor.

16minimum 25 lb. capacity agent cylinder with gauge that can be easily viewed & forged brass valve assembly

3 fitted with dust caps

1 fitted with dust cap1 to monitor engine turbo charger & surrounding area3 350 degrees F

1 350 degrees F-if in separate compartments

Optical sensor in engine compartmentQuantity, sensors in engine compartmentQuantity, sensors in battery compartmentQuantity, sensors in MEP compartmentQuantity, sensors in Aux heater compartment

Engine shutdown (listed in seconds of delay)Driver CAN override engine shutdown

Quantity, nozzles in engine compartmentQuantity, nozzles in battery compartmentQuantity, nozzles in preheater compartment

Optical sensor in engine compartment

AmerexJomarrSanta Barbara Research

Quantity, sensors in Aux heater compartment

Ansul

Dinotrol in roof tubesTectyl 3334 Gray undercoating

Quantity, thermostats in engine compartmentQuantity, thermostats in battery compartmentQuantity, thermostats in MEP compartment

Skin, roof, mild steelStructure, mild steelStructure, stainless steel

Door, skirt, stainless steelDoor, skirt, aluminumDoor, skirt, fiberglass

Skin, sidewall, stainless steelSkin, sidewall, AluminumSkin, sidewall, stainless steel Skin, roof crown, stainless steelSkin, roof crown, mild steelSkin, roof, stainless steel






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICE2.3.7.7.1 X Control button to be provided to silence the GDS audible alarm15.2 Fire & Gas Gas CNG opt

Warning Detection system to have a supervision monitoring panel locate in the (cont.) operators side console visual indicator to include a)system OK

b) gas alarm and c) Service required.

GDS initiated engine shut down is located on the GDS control panel to permit theoperator more time to slow & stop the vehicle

X

16 01 Floor 2.2.1.5.401 Material X Cost change 2010-208 Accepted by customer

2.2.1.5.1 X

15.517 Steps and Steps 16 Shall not exceed

Stepwells

2.2.1.6.2 X

X17.1 Stepwells

2.2.1.7.1 X Addendum #2 front & rear to be stainless steel18 Wheelwells trim installed over floor covering to be stainless

2.2.1.3.3 X Full length19 Rain Gutters

12 gauge nominal (3mm)

AluminumPlasticBlackWhiteClear anodized

Nosing, yellowNosing, whiteStep, interior, yellow (LF only)

Finish, cover, floor rubberFinish, natural

14 gauge nominal (2mm)

Treatment, CCATreatment, ACQFasteners, standardFasteners, stainless steel

Height, entrance door, nominalHeight, center/exit door, nominal

Engine shutdown (listed in %LEL)Engine shutdown (listed in seconds of delay)Driver CAN override engine shutdown

Grade, marine, A-BGreenwood Forest XL bus panel 3/4 inchCoosa Composite panel floor boards

Santa Barbara Research

Quantity, sensors in engine compartmentQuantity, sensors in fuel fill compartmentQuantity, sensors in fuel tank compartment

Amerex






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICE2.2.1.3.4 X20 License Plates X

21 Rubrails

X22 Fenders X

2.2.1.7.523 Splash Aprons X

X2.2.1.7.5 X

2.2.1.9.2 X Access door shall be retained in the open positions by 24 Exterior Latches & X retaining props or spring to be safety latched

Compartments Locks XX Addendum#2 approval to provide aluminum & fiberglass X access doors 2.2.1.9.2XXX

Lock, 5/16" square key, pony engine door

Lock, 5/16" square key, MEP doorLock, 5/16" square key, radiator doorLock, 5/16" square key, C/S aft of rear axleLock, 5/16" square key, R/S aft of rear axleLock, 5/16" square key, battery door, mainLock, 5/16" square key, battery door, switch

Standard rear (full width)Static Strap

Lock, 5/16" square key, engine doorLock, 5/16" square key, hydraulic doorLock, 5/16" square key, attic doorLock, 5/16" square key, wheelchair cmpt door

Stainless fastenersStandard fasteners

Standard frontFull width frontCover steering arm

Lower, standardLower, without breaksUpper, blackUpper, white

Standard

FrontRearFrame, frontFrame, rearFrame, rear, hinged






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICE2.2.1.9.224 Exterior Latches &

(cont.) Compartments Locks(cont.) (cont.)

24.1 Trays 2.2.1.9.2 X

2.2.1.4.2 X 2.3.7.1 electrical power provided for the radio compartment to be12 and 24 volts, DC

24.2 Special DoorsExterior

(small access)

2.2.1.9.2 X

Front pax door lock (on B-post)2.2.2.3.8 SR LED light w/ minimum 300 lumens

24.3 Compartment LEDLighting LED

LED01 LED 2.3.9.2 Driver's barrier -3 lights, 1 per each tray within the enclosure 04 LED Webasto compt service light & switch03 2.2.2.3.8 Service area lighting shall shut off when the multiplexing system enters into "sleep mode"

All interior compartments

Switch, battery, separate doorFuel, Filter access panel w/ 1/4 turn lock

Quantity, engine compartmentQuantity, battery compartmentQuantity, wheelchair control compartmentQuantity, MEP

Level, engine oil checkFill, engine oilLevel, transmission fluid checkFill, transmission fluidFill, windshield washer fluidSwitch, battery, in main battery door

Slide out radio trayRadio box insideRadio box outside

Coolant access, sideCoolant access, rear (on engine door)Fill, fuel

Slide out wheelchair controlsSlide out battery-Stainless

Latch, slam, radiator doorLatch, slam, C/S aft of rear axleLatch, slam, R/S aft of rear axleLatch, slam, battery door, mainLatch, slam, battery door, switchLatch, slam, pony engine door

Latch, slam, engine doorLatch, slam, hydraulic doorLatch, slam, wheelchair cmpt doorLatch, slam, MEP door






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICE02 Bumpers to be black01 2.3.6.2 X SR -permanent, vehicle mounted, provisions to recover the

Bumpers X vehicle by lift towing at the front using the Authority's stinger X equipped recovery vehicle with tow attachments.

25 X Authority tow attachments are designed to pin to lif ttow eyes at the front of the vehicle. Addendum #2Provisions for tow bar also required

SR - Provision for air from towing vehicle to the service brake2.2.1.2.7 SR application valve. Connections readily accessible location in

SR the front & rear, & identified by a blue color coded glad handX connections.

SR-Provision front & rear connect air from towing vehicle to SR wet tank & to parking brake relay valve & identified by red

color coded glad hands.

DuPont Imron Elite single stage- Addendum #2 Exterior Paint 2.2.1.1.3 XFinish

26

01 Dupont, Blue, Imron Elite BS420EW and Imron Elite White P9360EW

Graphics

26.1

02 XFleet Numbers

26.2

04 SR

04 4201 thru 4218SR -5.5 inch black decal bus numbers required on the forward curbside & streetside of the clam shells. 4 inch black decal bus number required on the front & rear of the busSequence

Roof, paintedRoof, oriented left to rightRoof, oriented front to rear, perp to bus CL.Roof, oriented front to rear, parallel to bus CL.Roof, size in inchesBus Numbers decal black

Painted stripesVinyl decalsAvery3-M

PaintedRoof, vinyl

Hubs and lug nuts, blackHubs and lug nuts, white

Type

Paint dwg

Vinyl stripes

Tow connector, electric, special frontType

PPGDuPontBase/clearBlack around windows (exterior)

Bike rack, whiteBike rack, bilingual instructionsBike rack, indicator lightFront tow eyes mounted in compartment (LF only)REAR tow eyesTow connector, electric, standard front

Standard front Anti-ride rear bumperSkid plate, curbsideSkid plate, roadsideBike rack, black






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICE2.2.1.1.4 VALE decalDecals CNG decal

(exterior)26.3 X 2.4.0.1.9 in accordance with state & federal laws, interior & exterior

decals to be provided notifying passengers vehicle is equipped witha security system.

04 X04 X

Kneeling DecalWindshield washer fluid decal

VinylAvery3-MDecals, legally required.






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICE2.2.2.3.1Exterior Lighting Rear X

27 X

XX

2.2.2.3.4 3

2.2.2.3.7 LED

XUnder engine door, mounted to eng door

Decel lights, attic door, upper centerDecel lights, attic door, lower centerProgramming for future decel lights

Under engine door, ovalUnder engine door, 4" roundUnder engine door, mounted to body

Aux brake lights, attic door, lower center

Quantity, deceleration lightsFunction

Decel lights, engine door

Vertical (listed from the top down)Brake-red, amber-turn, reverse-white

Horizontal (listed from outside in)

Quantity, auxiliary brake lightsAux brake lights, engine door

Incandescent4" Round7" RoundTrucklightPetersonDialight

Drawing

LED






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICE2.2.2.3.2Rear Clearance X

and I.D.27.1

X

2.2.2.3.2Side Clearance X

and Markers27.2

XX

Side Turn Signals 2.2.2.3.5

X1 1 curbside & 1 streetside

1 1 curbside & 1 streetside

2.2.2.3.2Front Clearance X

and Markers27.3

Armored (rectangular only)TrucklightPetersonDialight

Quantity, rear axle

Drawing

LED flush mountIncandescentRoundRectangular

Dialight

Drawing

Standard typeKneel Light on curbside bumperQuantity, front axle Quantity, center axle

IncandescentRoundRectangularArmored (rectangular only)TrucklightPeterson

Armored (rectangular only)TrucklightPetersonDialight

Drawing

LED

Drawing

LED flush mountedIncandescentRoundRectangular






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICEXHeadlights

27.4

2.3.1.3.2 X green LED light approx 1" diameter, shall be mounted on the outside 27.5 Customer of the auxiliary heated compartment door to indicate when the

Exterior auxiliary heater is operating. This light shall blink error codes ifthe auxiliary heating system malfunctions.

04 X Retarder light retarder light to be located curbside front near the headlight and should indicate when theretarder is engaged

2.2.3.1.1 X Anti-squeak tape shall be used between interior trim panels Interior Panels Sidewalls and any structure.

Colors, and Decals All molding & trim strips must be stainless steel or aluminum28 Interior trim panels must meet Docket 90

0402

2.2.3.1.1Driver's X IceflowerBarrier

28.12.2.1.4.2 X

Trays, qty, middle storageLower storage (aisle access)Lower storage trigger latchLower storage 1/4 turn latchLower storage keyed lockTrays, qty, lower storage

Upper storage keyed lockTrays, qty, upper storageMiddle storage (aisle access)Middle storage trigger latchMiddle storage 1/4 turn latchMiddle storage keyed lock

MelamineStainless steelWoodgrain (Vertical or Horizontal)

Description

Upper storage (over driver's seat)Upper storage trigger latch


Description

DRL% light with DRLUse low beamUse hi beam

SR

StandardPlastic lens






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICEX Driver's X Barrier

28.1 (cont.)(cont.)

X 2 information boxes 3" x 9" high located on the rear of the electronics cabinet

Modesty Panels

28.2

2.2.4.3 X

01 Navy Legacy 4651-60 Wilsonart


Description


Description

Forward, exit door (only w/longitudinal seats)Upper glazing


Description

Aft, center doorUpper glazing


Description

Forward, center door (only w/longitudinal seats)Upper glazing

Standard ad rack (21"x 22")Special ad rackinformation boxes/take one

Aft, entrance door (Standard Floor only)Upper glazing

Coat hookCoat strapRegistration holder






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICEModesty Panels

01 (cont.)28.2

(cont.)01

w/ Grain running Horizontal2.2.1.4.3 X

Panels atInterior Step-up 2.2.3.1.1 X

28.2.1 (Low Floor Only)

01 Navy Legacy 4651-60 Wilsonart

not required if luggage racks are installed

2.2.3.1.1 XBulkhead

28.3 04 Grey Pampas 4160-60 Wilsonart

2.2.3.4.3 XRear Seat Riser

28.3.1

2.2.3.1.2 XHeadliner

X Melamine28.4 01 Grey Pampas 4168-60 Wilsonart

Standard, vestibuleStandard, passenger compartmentSpecial, passenger compartment

Description

Woodgrain (Vertical or Horizontal)Description

Finish, cover, floor rubberFinish, cover, stainless steelFinish, cover, aluminum, 180 grit


Description

MelamineCarpet


Description

RoadsideUpper glazing


Description

CurbsideUpper glazing

Aft, exit doorUpper glazing






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICE01 SR-Use of Phillips head, sheet metal & self tapping screws & blind rivets & rivnut-typeInterior fasteners shall not be used without prior approval o f the Authority for each specific

Fasteners 2.2.1.4.5 X application.28.5

01 SR-All interior fasteners to be tamperproof & standardized so that only one tool isrequired to service all fasteners within the vehicle.

2.2.1.4.6 X

X

2.2.1.4.5 X

2.2.5.1 83 insulation material used between the inner & outer panels shall beInsulation 76 fire-resistant & sealed

Conditions: APTA Whitebook guidelines noise level performance is tested at 35 mph only28.6

2.3.1.5.3 83Conditions: SAE J366 noise level performance is tested at 35 mph only

X

dBA exterior

White book pulldownHouston pulldown

Grill, return air, cross recessedGrill, return air, spanner typeGrill, return air, TorxEngine Hatch - Bolted

dBA interior @ passenger seatsdBA interior @ driver- (addendum #2)

Access, front door engine, spanner typeAccess, front door engine, trigger latch (LF only)Access, center/exit door engine, cross recessedAccess, center/exit door engine, knurledAccess, center/exit door engine, TorxAccess, center/rear door eng. Same as Lts.

Access, floor, shocks-springs, standardAccess, floor, shocks-springs, special

Description

Access, front door engine, cross recessedAccess, front door engine, knurledAccess, front door engine, Torx

Panel, light, TorxLight, lens (same as panels)

Destination sign door, standardAccess, floor, fuel tank, standardAccess, floor, fuel tank, 1/4 turn

Panel, light, cross recessedPanel, light, spanner type






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICE01 MullionsMiscellaneous Area, driver's, forward of standee line

Colors and Box(es), driver's storage, overhead28.7 Materials Door, and grab handle brackets, entrance

Grab handles, entrance RAL1021 Yellow Powder CoatDoor, and grab handle brackets, center/exitGrab handles, center/exit RAL 1021 Yellow Powder CoatCover, wheelhousePanel, aft of entrance door (LF only)

2.2.1.1.4 X Helvetica medium Decals Addendum #2

(interior) Window emergency exit instruction printed on .080 inch28.8 X anodized aluminum plate

2.2.3.2.1 SR

priority seating for elderly & persons with disabilities

2.4.0.1.9 in accordance with state & federal laws, interior & exteriordecals to be provided notifying passengers vehicle is equipped witha security system.

Special Requirement

NABI Standard Grey

VinylAvery3-MDecals, legally required.

NABI Standard GreyNABI Standard Grey

Powder coat, yellow NABI Standard Grey

Powder coat, yellow Floor Rubber

Grey Pampas 4168-60NABI Standard Grey






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICE2.2.3.4 X SR 2.2.1.9.1 Flooring material shall be flush with the floor & shall be edge-bound01 Floor Covering Vestibule with stainless steel for all access openings in the floor.

(see line 50.229 for turntable

finish)XX

01 RCA 766 Slate Grey

XDriver's Area

29.1X


XAilseway

29.2

XX

X01 RCA 766 Slate Grey

XUnder Seats

29.3X

01 RCA 766 Slate GreyDescription

RCAFlexcoTaraflexAltroSmoothRibbed

SmoothRibbedStandee line, yellowStandee line, whiteStep, interior, all yellow (aisle width - LF only)

Description

RibbedDescription

RCAFlexcoTaraflexAltro

Description

RCAFlexcoTaraflexAltroSmooth

TaraflexAltroSmoothRibbedNosing, yellowNosing, white

RCAFlexco






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICEXWheelchair

Parking Areas29.4

X


WheelchairRamp/Lift

29.5

XSR to be covered with a replaceable or renewable, non-skid material

2.2.2.3.9 A doorway & rear step lighting system to illuminate when theInterior Type X master switch is in RUN & NIGHT RUN positions, except the front

04 Lighting doorway which shall be extinguished when the front door is closed

30 04 Note: On Curbside of bus, light banks forward of exit door out with doorX Program the S/S passenger lights to remain lighted w hen the entrance door is closed

Program the 1st & 2nd CS lights to be extinguished when the entrance door is closed.

X

All out in reverseBlue tube(s)Switch, Off/OnSwitch, Off/On/NormalOperate with driver's master switch offOperate with driver's master switch in park

Description

TransmaticLED overhead-Pretoria1st & 2nd curbside out with door

1st roadside out with door

Taraflex, top of ramp/liftAltro, top of ramp/liftSmoothRibbed

Description

3-M under ramp (both surfaces)

RibbedPerpendicular with aisleParallel with aisle

Description

RCA, top of ramp/liftFlexco, top of ramp/lift

RCAFlexcoTaraflexAltroSmooth






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICE2.2.2.3.6 X passenger doorwaySteps andStepwells X passenger doorway

30.1 2.2.2.3.9 X

2.2.2.3.10 XCustomer

Special30.2

2.2.2.3.8 LEDLED

Fare FareboxCollection

31

FareboxProvisions

31.1

TransferCutter

31.2

Interior Access X Retaining props to be safety latchedPanels & doors All fasteners that retain access panels to be captive in the cover

Retention of all interior access panels, except door actuator32 compartment shall be tamper-proof

SR-one tool is required to service all fasteners

Standard layout

12vDC supply24vDC supply

QuantityNumber of notchers

Printer, ticketBase plate, quick releaseBase plate, pedestalNABI supplyNABI install

Service light, exit door header.

Electronic registeringGFICUBICModel

Driver's light, toggle switchDriver's light, rheostatFarebox lightRunway lightsService light, entrance door header.

FrontCenterExit

Interior step (LF only)






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICEPassenger 32 SR- Perimeter seating requiredSeating Layout 2

(see line 36.2 for 033 04 wheelchair restraints) 110-Massport_42BRT-G01 2.2.3.1.6 Luggage Racks- (1) 41.25 " luggage rack on the forward curbside wheel house,

SR (1) 50" luggage rack streetside directly across from the entrance door

Dimensions 3/4"

33.1

2.2.3.2 X 2.2.3.2.1 hinged seat assembly shall be equipped with locksStructure, Design requiring a nominal 5/16 inch square end tool to open, and prop

and Materials rod to hold the seat assembly in an open position.33.2

04

02

2.2.3.2.4 XX

X

X transverse seats

04 X longitudinal seatsDelete the arm rests on all the passenger flip seat s CC2012-063 accepted by customer

Handhold, stainless steelArmrest, plasticArmrest, stainless steel

Frame, stainless steelShell, plasticShell, stainless steelPanel, back, plasticPanel, back, stainless steelHandhold, plastic

Closeout, cantileverCloseout, longidutinal, horizontal, stainless steelCloseout, longitudinal, horizontal, plasticCloseout, longitudinal, vertical, stainless steelCloseout, longitudinal, vertical, plasticFrame, carbon steel

American Seating4ONECantilever (where practicable)PedestalHinged over pony engineCloseout, cantilever, plastic

Qty, wheelchair positions, rearward facingSeat Dwg #

Hip-to-knee, minimumCushion height, maximumFoot room, minimum

Seated passengersQty, wheelchair positions, forward facing






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICEStructure, Design

and Materials X33.2 02 (cont.)

(cont.)02

01 Metropolitan01 1912 Platinum01 1912 Platinum02 1912 Platinum01 1912 Platinum01 LaFrance 362-064D-07-2678

2.2.6.3.1 74" 2.2.6.3.6 Seats; longitudinal seats shall have vertical assistsPass. Assists General located between every other designated seating position except

the 2 most rearward seats on each side shall have vertical assist at 34 2.2.6.3.2 X the rearward edge

Entrance Door X

34.1 X

2.2.6.3.3 2.2.6.3.3 aisle side of the driver's barrier to be fitted with a vertical Vestibule X functionally continuous with overhead assist.

2.2.6.3.4 front wheel housing shall have a vertical assist at the 34.2 rearmost aisle side corners that are continuous with overhead

X horizontal assist.2.2.6.3.4 horizontal assist approx 36" above the floor and on top of thewheelhousingto be installed along the aisle side of the curbside wheel housing.A similar assist shall be provided on the street side wheel housingif it does not preclude opening the electronics locker.

Powder coat, blackStainless steel

Standard arrangement (diagonal)Powder coat, yellow Powder coat, blackStainless steel

Standard at fareboxInclude longitudinal across front dashPowder coat, yellow

Back

Handhold

Armrests

Fabric/Vinyl

Height from floor (maximum)

Barrier, tubular stainless steelAnti-graffiti coating, insertsAnti-graffiti coating, all

Model

Shell

Seat, padding, standardSeat, padding, low smokeBarrier, front, plasticBarrier, front, stainless steelBarrier, rear, plasticBarrier, rear, stainless steel

Seat, insert, plasticSeat, insert, vinylSeat, insert, fabricSeat, insert, padded (listed in inches)Seat, full padded (listed in inches)






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICE2.2.6.3.2 X Diagonal push barsVertical push bars

Exit Door X34.3 Center and

X

2.2.6.3.5 2.2.6.3.5 Assist shall be no less than 70 inches above the floorOverhead except over the curbside front wheel house where the height shall

be no less than 60 inches. A similar assist shall be provided over 34.4 the street side wheel housing if it does not preclude opening the

electronics locker.

2.2.1.8 36" LED lighting required at entrance & exit door04 Passenger Type

Doors 44"35

35.1 Program Note: Doors to fail closed

2.2.1.8.3Glazing

35.2Actuators

35.3 2.2.2.1.4 X air exhausted from the door system shall be routed under thefloor level to the outside

Exit air/airExit air/springExit push/spring

Fold out, exit (not less than 76" H & 32" W)

Center lowerExit lower

Center air/airCenter air/springCenter push/spring

Stainless steel handholds

Vapor Parallelogram Plug Slide glide, center (dimension shown)Vapor Slide glideFold out, center (dimension shown)

Standard handholds

Powder coat, yellow Powder coat, blackStainless steelRailing forward of door(s)

Powder coat, yellowPowder coat, blackStainless steel

Quantity of handholds

Railing aft of door(s)






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICE04Miscellaneous

35.4

2.2.2.1.3 X shall be synchronized with the activation of the rear doors.

X 2.2.2.1.5 door emergency unlocking devices to be encased in acompartment . The decal to have red text stating "To Open Door Manually Break TurnHandle"

2.2.2.1.2 X Note: Interlocks should not engage until door is fully closedInterlock

X35.5

X

Interlock, with center door manual valveInterlock, with exit door manual valve

Interlock, center doorInterlock, exit doorInterlock, front axleInterlock, center axleInterlock, rear axleInterlock, with entrance door manual valve

Master switch, center doorMaster switch, exit doorMaster switch, center & exit doorMaster switch(es), standard location

Interlock, entrance door

Sensitive edge lightSensitive edge buzzerGreen warning light over rear doors

Master switch, entrance and center/exit doorMaster switch, entrance door

Touch tape, exit doorPush button, center door, qty (on stanchion)Push button, exit door, qty (on stanchion)Sensitive edge, entrance doorSensitive edge, center doorSensitive edge, exit door

Touch bar, center doorTouch bar, exit doorTouch tape, center door






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICE2.2.6.5.1 XWheelchair Type and

Accessibility Location X36 4 way hazard warning lights shall be automatically activated when

the ramp master switch is in the enabled or on positionX

X

Power Self contained hydraulic

36.1

2.2.6.5.3Wheelchair X Addendum #2 approved

Securements36.2

XControls

36.3

2.2.6.1.2 XDriver's Area Visors

0437

Front pull shadeFront visorSide pull shadeSide visor

ToggleRotaryRockerSensitive edge by-pass

Functions

4ONE V-Pro IIAmSeCo ARMLoose beltsStorage for belts on flip seatsStorage for belts near driverBilingual instruction placard

Lift-UHeated tread/mat

Lift-U power packPower steeringElectric onlyLow temp fluid

Exit doorFold outSlide outT & TRicon

RampLiftEntrance doorCenter door






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICE04 2.2.2.3.11 X All switches & controls to be heavy-duty, premium to ggle,rotary or foot operated04 Controls X Note: Start enable toggle switch not to labeled.04 Side Console X Programming Note: Program an audible alarm to sound when the park brake is not set at

37.1 04 2.2.2.1.1 X engine shut down

SR

04 XX

03 X Leave switch on pilot buses and delete chime switch for serial production ref CC 2011-143

Controls X STOP ENGINE- please review spec section 2.2.2.3.11 for all electrical Side Console systems off requirement. DAY RUN- all electrical system & engine on,

37.1.1 (cont.) except headlights, parking lights, & marker lights. Night Run- allX electrical system & engine on. NIGHT PARK- ALL electrical

system off, except those listed in OFF an power to destination X sign, interior lights & marker lights

04 X Add long 1 7/8" yellow extensionXX SR-fast idle device shall have a setting of 900 RPM + 100/-50RPMX SR-automatic engine idle shutdown shall be incorporated into the X vehicle design. The feature shall be adjustable and controlled X through the multiplexing system and only be disabled when the

04 engine is started in the rear run configuration.0404 2.2.2.1.1 Door controls; speed switch shall enable t he rear 04 door. Two speed sensors, 1 at each frt wheel, or 2 other

mutually independent measures of velocity that the vehicle 04 speed is below 3 mph to enable speed switch that en ables04 X the rear doors. The system shall be fundamentally f ail-safe

in that loss of power or loss of signal from 1 wheel sensor shall disable the rear doors. An indicator light on the diagnostic

01 2.2.6.4.5 X light panel shall illuminate when the rear door are disabled01 by the speed switch.

Note: Locate retarder switch on side console as far back as possible.01 X

2.2.2.1.1 X to exhaust all air from the door motors to below the floor04 X Add hole in side dash for Clever PA Plate

Jack-knife override (w/cover)Radio panic, push button area below side dashRadio panic, toggle Amplifier, P-ASpeaker Switch (inside-outside-both)Front door dump valve

KneelCover, kneelHi-curb feature (same switch as kneel)Over ride switch Vapor Class systemRetarder (dash mounted)Cover, retarder

Passenger exit signal (not used, spare position)Engine overrideCover, engine overrideDiagnostic light testRamp enable-GuardedRamp deploy/stow

HVAC - Rotary switchHVAC, driver's thermostat or electronic controlFast IdleInterior Lights - OFF/ONInterior Lights - OFF/ON/NORMALPower mirror (single controllers)

Fire buttonChimeInterlock Override SwitchDriver's light, toggleDriver's light, rheostatDriver's fan

Emergency brake release-GreenVapor 5-position doorPush button doorFour position rotary moisture resistant switchHazardHazard, long 1 7/8" RED handle

Start enable toggle switch engine start buttonBrake release






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICEX04 In front area

(not within37.1.2 driver's reach

or special)X to be permanently labeled- in the destination sign compartment

X2.2.2.3.11 X

01 2.3.1.3.2 X Webasto Remote pre-heat switch to be permanently labeled- in the destination sign compartment

2.2.2.3.13 XGauges X

& Controls37.3 (Front dash) X

X

2.2.2.2.1 X2.2.2.2.2 X

X

X

04 X04 X

XX Driver's blower

2.3.8.6 X stepwell defroster system shall have its own control switch located04 X in the driver's dash area.04 X

Ramp enable-GuardedRamp deploy/stow

Panel lightsKneel Cover, kneelIndicator light test switch(es)

Step-Well Defrosters

Air Filter Restriction GaugeWipersWasherDriver's heaterWC Ramp/LiftTransmission

12v meter24v meterFuel levelAir start gaugeCoolant temperatureOil pressure

Dual air gaugeCenter axle air gauge

Master switch, entrance and center/exit doorMaster switch, entrance doorMaster switch, center doorMaster switch, exit doorMaster switch, center & exit doorMaster switch(es), standard location

PA system foot switch

J1587 port, engine-transmission-ABSRetarder switch

Destination sign

Panic switch, floor mounted

Speedometer with odometer






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICE01 G ClickDiagnostic BIndicators R*

37.4 (center LED Ypanel) R

GRYR*RY

R*

RY

01 Y01 G Webasto On/OFF

Y

R

01 R*Y

YXR with alarmR

RRG

012.2.2.1.1 Y speed above 3mph, rear doors disabled

DPF warning

Interlock System DeactivatedRear doors disabledSpeed switch

Service brakeBikerackSeat beltLow FuelLow HydraulicBrake retarder "On"

A/C failFront A/C failRear A/C failKneelJ1939 Communication FailurePark brake

Windshield Washer Fluid Low

Check TransmissionLow transmission fluidHot transmissionBattery low voltageSensitive edge

Hinge AngleFire (MEP only)Fire (all - w/o fire suppression system)Service/parking brake (common)GAS PSIFuel Door

Stop RequestWheelchair stop requestNot StowedLow AirExit doorABS Fault

Left/Right turnHigh beamStop engineCheck engineNo generator






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICEDiagnosticIndicators

37.4.1 (additional in Xdriver's area)

2.3.1.3.2 X green on/off LED mounted by or above the driver

Wipers and Wipers 2.2.2.2.1 XWashers

38 X

X Addendum #2

2.2.2.2.2Washers X Addendum #2

338.1 X

2.2.3.3.1Driver's Seat Type X

3902 Ergo Metro

Dimensions9"

39.1

BostromIsringhausenModel

Cushion widthCushion thicknessTravel, fore-aft, nominal

# of gallons in reservoirExterior fill (under front compartment access)Exterior fill (side of front cowling)Interior fill

USSCRecaro

2ea controls (with integral washer)1ea control with separate washer2ea controls with separate washer.Intermittent

PneumaticElectric

PneumaticElectricElectric over air1ea control (with integral washer)

Fire (methane) panel, TBDLocation

Auxiliary heater light

Fire (methane) panel, A-post, upperFire (methane) panel, A-post, lowerFire (methane) panel, dest. sign door






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICE02 2.2.3.3.11 XStructure &Materials

39.202 X

X

X

X

01 78205 fabric - blue01 78205 fabric - blue

2.2.6.2.1 X Built in Turn Signal requiredMirrors Exterior X

04 X Friction Style Arm Required for the SS ext mirror re f CC 2012-10640 X

SR-mirrors to be electrially heated whenever the defroster fan is ONthe multiplex system shall cycle the heater on/off

04 X Friction Style Arm Required for the CS ext mirrorX SR-Weatherproof Deutsch electrical connector to be provided on theX exterior of the vehicle, which enables the quick replacement of a X damaged mirror.

Roadside spot - manualCurbside main - heatedCurbside spot - heatedRoadside main - heatedRoadside spot - heated

Curbside spot - powerRoadside main - powerRoadside spot - powerCurbside main - manualCurbside spot - manualRoadside main - manual

Restraint, buzzerRestraint, light

Insert Mat'l

Boxing Mat'l

Curbside main - power

Seat, padding, standardSeat, padding, low-smokeBack, hard coverHead restRestraint, 2-pointRestraint, 3-point

Side bolster, pneumaticRelease, slide, mechanicalRelease, slide, pneumaticShock, mechanicalShock, electricalSeat, bottom, extension

Base, carbon steel paintedBase, powder coatBase, coverLumbar, mechanicalLumbar, pneumaticSide bolster, mechanical






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICE2.2.6.2.1Mirrors Exterior(cont.) (cont.)

40 X(cont.) Hadley CS-22-D913HRFHRCX-TS Friction Style Arm Required for the CS ext mirror

04 Hadley RS-16-D913HRFHRCX-TS Friction Style Arm Required for the SS ext mirror ref cc2012-106

401 Interior driver's rear view mirror B&R 1706-2 16" x 8.2504 Ref CC 2012-114

40.1 04 Ref CC 2012-11401 Rear door- stepwell 12" 416.02.9230.901 - step 12"

Mirrors shall be provided for the driver to observe most passengers throughout the vehicle without leaving his seat andwithout shoulder movement

2.2.4.1.1 X color tint not stated in spec41 Windows Windshield

2.2.4.1.2Driver's Window

41.1 SR SR-forward section provided with an external handle.

04 XSR-delete lock from driver's side window & replace with a lockless pull handle on the interior & exterior of the driver's window

Side WindowsX SR-Latch shall have the capability to allow ventilation windows

41.2 to be retained in a closed position by the deployment of a singlesquare key fastener.SR-window shall be hinged with positively retained props

X

2.2.4.2.2 X permanent metal labelWedge glazingPlacard, instruction, standard, EnglishPlacard, instruction, standard, bilingualPlacard, instruction, special, EnglishPlacard, instruction, special, bilingual

Transom, tip-inTransom, slidingTransom, fixedTransomFrame, black anodizedFrame, clear anodized

Rear 1/2 fixedBlack out upper portionWedge glazing2 vertical sections each sliding

Lower, sliding (below transom)Lower, fixed (below transom)

SPECIAL REQUIREMENT

Dim & Loc

Dim & Loc

Dim & Loc

Mfg.

Green tint bandBlue tint band

R/S mfg

Quantity requiredDim & Loc

Dim & Loc

Single controlDual controlsStandard control(s)Joystick style control(s)

C/S mfg






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICE2.2.4.2.2 42 DURASide Windows Grey

(cont.)41.2

X tempered safety glass

X

X

SR SR-glazing rearward of the yellow standee line to be equipped with6 mil laminated Vandal Shield

Side Sign

41.3

X

2.2.6.4.1Front Sign X heated whenever the defroster fan is on, the multiplex control

system to cycle heater on/off41.4

X Addendum #2 heated glass approved, however heat from HVAC system still required

Glazing, glass, temperedGlazing, glass, laminatedGlazing, acrylicGlazing, acrylic, hardcoatedGlazing, heated grid

Heated, electric gridGlazing, acrylic, 1/4"Glazing, acrylic, 1/2"Glazing, glass, 4mmGlazing, glass, 6mmGlazing, hardcoated, acrylic only

Guards, interior, some pax windows Guards, interior, center/exit door glazing

List

Lower section, slidingLower section, fixedMask around sign opening

Egress, FMVSS 217Egress, all except driver'sEgress, all except driver's and side signRear windowGuards, interiorGuards, interior, all pax windows

Color

Glazing, acrylic, 1/4"Glazing, acrylic, 1/2"Glazing, glass, 1/4"Glazing, glass, 6mmGlazing, hardcoated, acrylic only

Light, transmittance, %






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICE01 2.3.8.1 X gauges displaying the suction & discharge pressures of the 01 HVAC Type and refrigerant system to be permanently installed in the HVAC

(see line 50.2 Capacity compartment 42 for pony engine) X

SR-HVAC system shall be capable of reducing the pass enger compartment temperaturefrom 110 degrees F to 70 degrees F in less than 30 minutes after the start-upof the A/C system

02 XSR-HVAC heating system to be capable of raising the passenger compartmenttemperature from an outside ambient temp of -20 degrees F & the vehicle cold soaked at the temperature to 70 degrees F in less than 70 minutes

02 X

0202 X

2.2.1.4.4 X2.3.1.3.3 X Brushless motors

2.3.8.6 X A damper to be provided to allow the driver to divert a maximumAuxiliary Heat of 80 percent of warm air generated by the front defroster to the

stepwell42.1

X The stepwell defroster system shall have its own control switch located in the driver's dash area.

Step, exit door, forced airStep, exit door, lower, electric matStep, exit door, upper, electric mat

Step, front door, forced air (from driver's heater)Step, front door, lower, electric matStep, front door, upper, electric matStep, center, forced airStep, center door, lower, electric matStep, center door, upper, electric mat

Clamp, hose, constant torqueClamp, "P", full box sectionFilter, reusableFilter, disposableGrill, return air, perforatedGrill, return air, louvered

R22R134aR407cCore, condenser, coatedCore, evaporator, coatedCore, heater, coated

Cycle modeReheat modeInclude switch to change from cycle to reheatMechanical controlsElectronic controlsDriver's thermostat/control panel

SutrakRoof mount, quantityREAR Mount T1 unitA/C delete (heat only)Standard heaterSidewall heaters (UWE)

Pulldown, SRPulldown, Houston

Thermo-KingCarrier






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICEAuxiliary Heat

(cont.)42.1

(cont.)

2.3.8.2Driver Controls

X42.2 Off-Heat-AC-Vent

2.3.8.1 XCompressor

42.3

Evaporator Motors2.3.1.3.3 X

42.4

Condenser Motors2.3.1.3.3 X

42.5

Permanent magnetBrushlessRotronRelianceGeneral ElectricOhio

BrushlessRotronRelianceGeneral ElectricOhio

Wound field

Pulley, diameter, standardPulley, diameter, special

Size

Wound fieldPermanent magnet

Thermo-King, X-430Thermo-King, X-426Carrier, O5GCarrier, O5KSutrak, XXXXSutrak, XXXX

Location(s)

Driver's thermostat/control panelToggleRotary

Function

Wheelhouse, aft of center door, heaterWheelhouse, aft of exit door, heaterUnderseat heaters, quantity






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICE2.3.8.1 To the extent practical, self sealing couplings to be used to breakRefrigerant Lines & seal the refrigerant lines during removal of major components,

and Hoses such as refrigerant compressor condenser.42.6

2.3.8.1Service Valves

and Drier X42.7 X

X

2.3.1.3.3 X SR - all low points in the water-based cooling system to be Coolant Lines X equipped with drain cocks. Air vent valves shall be fitted at high

and Hoses points in the cooling system unless it can be demonstrated that the42.8 X Lever operated 1/4 turn valves to allow filter system is self-purging

replacement without coolant loss

Marine Pump 2.3.1.3.3 X

42.9

XDriver's Heater

42.10 2.3.1.3.3 X

2.3.8.4 X

X Booster, overhead, brushless

Manual controlsElectric controls

Booster, overhead, standard

M/P

Cold weather discharge routingWound fieldPermanent magnetBrushless

Braided lines (where applicable)Constant torque clampsSolid sleeve P-clamps

NABI standardBrushless typeMarch

Valves at condenserValves at evaporatorValves at compressorValves at drierValves at receiver OutletDrier capacity (in Cu.In., if specified )

Flare fittingsORS fittingsFlare, with O-ringStandard lines as recommended by HVAC mfg.Special lines

List






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICE2 Not stated - performance spec-these heaters will be required to keep the stepwells at Underseat exit doors free from ice

X42.11

2.2.2.1.6 Note: 1175 series hatch to be usedRoof Hatches Roof Hatches X

and Ventilators 143

04 2.2.2.1.7 1 Vent that allows air from the HVAC system to be dire cted to the driver & that can be directed Vents and/or shut off, by hand, by the driver

43.1

2.2.6.4 X 2.2.6.4.7 hardware/software package necessary for wirelessDestination General message transfer shall be provided to generate message lists for

Signs 2.2.6.4.10 X the destination sign system44 (see 47.5 for X

Next Stop) vehicles to be delivered with a pre-programmed list of destinationsign messages supplied by the Authority

2.2.6.4.5 X 2.2.6.4.13 FCC Compliance - comply with FCC Regulation Docket20780 covering EMI & RFI emission

Interface with AVL/GPS

Twin Vision-Smart SignsLuminatorMeister

Switch, radio panic, activates signsInterface with farebox

Roof, above driver's compartmentCable operatedLever operated in driver's area

ElectronicCurtainLED illumination-Amber

Instructions, bilingual

Quantity, ventsFront access compartmentCable operatedLever operated

TranspecQuantity, roof hatchesTether cablesElectrically powered fanStatic ventilation

Quantity, underseatHeater at C/S rear wheelhouseBrushless motorsFunction from main heaterFunction from separate thermostat






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICE2.2.6.4.2 16Front Sign 160

62.75 " wide by 7.9 " high44.1 2.2.6.4.1 X

2.2.6.4.3 14Side sign 108

144.2 forward most curbside window

42 inches wind by 4.2 inches high

X

XRun Number Signs

(Exterior mount) SR 16 rows by 48 columns44.3 1

not stated in spec17 inches wide by 6.1 inches high

Auxiliary Dash Sign(Run #, interior)

44.4# of digits

Loc #2

Display area

Loc #3

Display area

ElectronicCurtain

ElectronicCurtain# of digitsQuantity, run number signsLoc #1

Display area

Display area

Loc #2

Display area

Loc #3

Display area

Pivot for cleaning

Pivot for cleaning

# of rows# of columnsQuantity, side signsLoc #1

# of rows# of columns

Display area






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICEAuxiliary Interior

Sign44.5

Information Interiorand Advertising 2 2 information boxes on the rear of the electronics cabinet/driver's barrier

45 1 1 information box at the rear exit door 3" x 9"high

0Exterior

45.1

0

45.2

03 X Leave chime on pilot and delete chime for serial productionStop Request

4603

Yellow

03

Pull cord drops at mullionsCord color

Wheelchair passenger touch tapeWheelchair passenger pull cordWheelchair passenger palm switch

Roadside front

Dual tone chime

Quantity, chimesTouch tape activationPull cord activation

Loc #2

Loc #3

Loc #4

Loc #5

Quantity, flag holdersCurbside front

Quantity, take-one holdersQuantity, take-one holders

Quantity of exterior framesPlasticAluminumLoc #1

Standard (same readings as front/side signs)Dash, outward facingDash, inward facingCeiling mount

Standard ad rack on driver's barrier (21" x 22")Special ad rack

Next StopDash, outward facingDash, inward facingCeiling mount






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICE03 Stop Request mounting provisions for passenger information displa y signs to be retrofitted by the

(cont.) Massport CAD/AVL supplier (the retrofitted signs wil l replace the stop request signs)46

(cont.)

03

02

SR-location convenient to the operator to be provide d for theRadio Radio SR Authority's installation of a radio control head, speaker, &

System handset. Provisions including wire way & conduit, necessary to 47 route the Authority's radio harness/connector asm from the ITS

enclosure to the Authority's radio control head. Conduit shall be routed in a manner to permit easy replacement of Authority radioharness & connector without removing adjacent wiring harness

02 or equipment. Model for customer installed radio is Motorola XTL2500 10-35 watt 764-870mhz04 Bracket required to mount motorola radio mic

2.3.7.1 electrical power provided for the radio compartment to beRadio Box 12 and 24 volt, DC

X47.1

2.3.9.3 ITS power supply2.3.9.2 3 Circuit source volt Circuit

master disc. switch 12 50-amp, DC 24 50-amp, DCIgnition 12 2-amp, DC switched circuit 24 2-amp, DC switched circuitProgrammable 12 3 individual circuits that areprogrammable functions provided by the vehicle control systemfor future Authority useGround gnd 50 amp

Type

Quantity, slide out trays

Exterior accessInterior access, separate boxInterior access, barrierKeyed lock(s)

NABI supplyNABI supply, partialCustomer supply, NABI installCustomer supply, NABI install partial

Type

Sign, background, blueSign, background, whiteDecal, standard, EnglishDecal, standard, bilingualDecal, special, EnglishDecal, special, bilingual

Quantity, push button on exit door stanchion(s)Quantity, stop request sign(s)Sign, standard mounting locationSign, mounted on ceiling above standee lineSign, mounted in trailer (60' only)Sign, background, red

Quantity, push button on center door stanchion(s)






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICE2.3.7.1 X 2.3.7.5 Proper suppression equipment shall be provided in the Wiring X electrical system to eliminate interference with radio & television

transmission & reception. This equipment shall not cause47.2 interference with any electronic system on the vehicle.

2.3.7.4 X2.3.9.4 ITS Provisions, Conduits - minimum 3/4" outside diameter

X From TerminateAntenna Wireless Lan ITS Enclosure

X Antenna GPS receiver ITS Enclosure03030303

Operator Control Unit, Operator dash ITS Enclosure To be determinedHeadsign compt Front dash To be determinedFront dash ITS Enclosure To be determined

03030303

Radio Control Head ITS Enclosure To be determined03030303

0404 Antenna 1

47.3 0204 2.3.9.6

Structural provisions for WLAN 2.3.10.9 Structural provision shall be provided for Authority installation 02 2.3.9.11 of a LAN antenna operating in 2.4 to 2.4835Ghz range, with conduit03 1 Motorola HAF4016 antenna 2.3.10.1103

Mounting provision cell modem antenna 2.3.9.12 Ground plane & mounting provisions for one cellular modemantenna to be used for CDPD transmission of data in the 870Mhz

03 range.

2.3.9.5 mounting provision to be provided for an 8 inch ITS OperatorAVL/GPS Control Module, max height 8", max width 8.7", max depth 3.1"

shock tolerance 18g for 3ms, housing splash proof & UV resistant, 47.4 vibration tolerance, 4g peak rms@5 to 150hz

2.3.9.7 Structural provision shall be provided in the ceiling to install 2 AVA signs constructed to withstand heavy duty environmental& service conditions found in transit operations.

NABI supply partialType

Standard conduitType

Type

Type

NABI supply

Panic, activates interior camera systemPanic, activates exterior camera systemPanic, activates upper clearance lights (flash)

NABI supplyQuantity, antenna(e)Standard access

Power from battery (hot at all times)Power through battery master switchPower through driver's master switchPanic, dash mountedPanic, floor mountedPanic, activates destination signs

12v DC24v DCAmperes (dedicated circuit)






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICENext Stop

47.5

Vehicle Information& Data System

47.6

Monitor, transmission faults (J1587)Monitor, ABS faults (J1587)

Monitor, stop requestMonitor, stop request, WC passengerMonitor, WC lift/rampMonitor, speed, vehicle (J1587)Monitor, speed, engine RPM (J1587)Monitor, engine faults (J1587)

Monitor, door, entranceMonitor, door, centerMonitor, door, exitMonitor, doors, single pointMonitor, hornMonitor, service brake application

NABI supplyNABI supply partial

Type - mfg

NABI supplyNABI supply partialFull automaticSemi-automatic

Type






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICEPublic Address Type

04 2.3.9.848

X Cole Hearse part #7792

Handsfree - Digital Recorders

2.3.9.8 8Speakers Speakers to have a minimum flat response of 100-15,000Hz

Speaker wires to be run to a terminal block in the electronics locker48.1 Speakers to interface with the PA system controlled by driver

X

01 X Selection, "IN-OUT-BOTH"Volume control, singleVolume control, dualQuantity, sensor, ambient, interiorQuantity, sensor, ambient, exterior

Speaker, exterior, entrance doorSpeaker, exterior, center doorSpeaker, exterior, exit door

Selection, "IN-OUT"

Mic type

Mic type

Quantity, interior speakersSpeakers, interior, standard manufacturerSpeakers, interior, standard mounting

Microphone, lapelMicrophone, handheldSwitch, amp, floor mount - SRSwitch, amp, on microphoneVOX

Mic type

HandsFree MicMicrophone, extra jack, on ampMicrophone, extra jack, on barrierMicrophone, extra jack, other location

Location

Microphone, gooseneck

Mobilepage (same as Midwest & GFI)Transit Audio






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICE2.3.7.1.2 4 Wiring & electrical equipment necessarily located under the vehicleElectrical System Wiring 4/0 shall be insulated from water, heat, corrosion, & mechanical

4/0 damage via an environmentally protective cover.49 X

XSR receptacle connected to bus exterior lighting system for

towing purposes near the front & rear glad hands.

Apply dielectric grease on non-sealed connections only.

2.3.7.1.3 X The control system shall be equipped to accommodate a wirelessJunction Boxes X diagnostic system. The operating system shall be a Palm OS based

X system. An RF Host Network controller with integrated palm size49.1 X PDA shall be able to communicate in real-time with the vehicles

X Multiplex system. The RF diagnostic tool shall be capable of troubleshooting & testing the communication loop & all inputs &

X outputs of the multiplex system in real time & provide pass/failfeedback to the operator. To further assist in troubleshooting an

X IO Controls G3 optional ladder logic format shall be incorporated into the design.

10% spare input & output shall be provided at each IO location.Wiring used for multiplexing shall be stamped with address of thecorresponding IO location.

System to be equipped with a 32K byte diagnostic diagnostic loggerwhich will collect system anomalies.

2.2.2.3.14Rear Run X

Controls, Gauges49.2 and Indicators X

X

X

X

X

X

2.3.1.3.1 XAutomotive Electric Lighter Accessory Socket

XLight Switch- 2 position toggle switch Wake Switch-toggle

Port, J1587 engine-transmission diagnosticIndicator, engine oil filterIndicator, transmission filterIndicator, air filterIndicator, air filter, graduated

Air Filter Restriction Gauge, mechanical

Gauge(s), temperature, with drag needlesGauge, oil pressure, electricalGauge, oil pressure, mechanicalGauge, air start tankGauge, 12v meterGauge, 24v meter

Throttle controlGauge, hour meterGauge, temperature, coolant, electricalGauge, temperature, coolant, mechanicalGauge, temperature, transmission, electricalGauge, temperature, transmission, mechanical

Rear start, with front master switch onRear start, without front master switch onRear run, FRONT-REARRear run, FRONT-OFF-REAREngine compartment lightsSwitch, retarder

Decal, schematic, battery boxDecal, schematic, air test ports & switchesDecal, schematic, rear run control boxDecal, schematic, entrance door headerDecal, schematic, center door headerDecal, schematic, exit door header

Size, generator cableSize, starter cable Tow connector, standardTow connector, special

Type

Decal, schematic, MEP

Spacing, hot stamp






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICE04 Generator04 X

49.3 04 450EMP 450

Regulator

49.4 04 X

04 XEqualizer

49.501 2.3.7.3 X Cost change 2010-226 accepted by customer01 Batteries Minimum of 1400 cold cranking amps

49.6 04 Exide SR - each battery shall have a purchase date of no m ore than 60 days from the dateX of release for shipment to the Authority

SR - starter circuit shall consist of a 24volt 80 kj asymmetrical electrochemical capacitor,02 Whitaker with dust cap & a high current carrying relay. High current cabli ng shall be 4/0. Controls shall bring the02 capacitor in parallel with the batteries just prior to a start attempt & shall isolate the02 X capacitor for the batteries 3 minutes after the vehi cal has been running, insuring the 02 Engine compartment capacitor is fully changed. High current cable to b e loomed and clamped to prevent 02 chaffing.

2.3.7.4 XDisconnect

49.7 XX

Fire Suppression System 2.3.7.7.1 Note: The GDS shall be powered through the battery isolation switch & be in full time sampling mode at all times.

Item #7

Item #8

Item #9

Item #1

Item #2

Item #3

Item #4

Item #5

Item #6

1ea switch2ea switchNABI standard switchLabel, switch functionSwitch open, engine shuts downList, items that do NOT go thru the master switch

Jump start plugNABI standard

Cust model

Jump start, standard locationJump start, special location

Location

Rating, ampere

Group 31-Maintenance FreeGroup 908-D -Maintenance FreeNABI standard

Cust model

Model

DelcoNiehoff (internal)Standard mountingSurepower

Surepower

DelcoNiehoffEMP 450Rating, ampere






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICE2.3.7.1 X All circuits & Circuit branches, except starter solenoid, headlampCircuit Breakers and battery 12 & 24 volt feeds to the operator's apparatus panel,

shall be protected by manual reset circuit breakers. 49.7.1 the exceptions shall be protected by automatic reset circuit breakers.

Fuses shall be used only where it can be demonstrated that circuitbreakers are not practical & inline type fuses shall not be used.

2.3.7.6 3 350 degrees FFire Detectors

(same as line 15)49.8 1 to monitor the engines turbo charger & surrounding area

1 Quantity, thermostat in Aux Heater compartment 350 degrees F

Articulated ArticulationBus Items Joint

50

Bellows

50.1

Pony Engine

50.2 Standard HVAC manufacturer's compressorDelete pony engineInterior accessMuffler, remote mount (not in pony compartment)Exhaust, stainless steel

BlackInsulated

Thermo-KingCarrierSutrak

HubnerTurntable, finish, natural aluminumTurntable, finish, floor rubber

HubnerGortiteGrey

NABI standard manufacturer

Quantity, thermostats in engine compartmentQuantity, thermostats in battery compartmentQuantity, thermostats in MEP compartmentOptical sensor

ManualAutomatic resetWith dust caps






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICEX The bus system shall be capable of refueling from an empty state to a complete Alternative full state within seven minutes.

Fuels51 04 Hanson quick connect defuel valve

Type

Fittings, SwagelockFittings, Hoke

System description

LNGDual FuelSCF, CNGGallons, LNGFill port, ParkerFill port, Moog

CNG






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICE02 Camera cables to be shielded CAT6e cables terminated ate each end with RJ45 connector.Surveillance Surveillance At the camera end, cabel should have 3' service loop . The camera cable are to be hidden behind

System & System the panels at each location, no holes for camera cab le drops are required. In lieu of the holes52 APC indicate the location of the cable end with tape or grease pencil marker.

02

02 504 Ceiling facing exit door

Front bulkhead front to middle2.9mmFront bulkhead looking forward2.9mmRear bulkhead forward facing2.9mmAbove driver front door entrance2.9mm

04 0 deleted the exterior camera cable provisions ref CC 2012-102

02

Switch, radio panic, activates exterior camera(s)

Type - lens

Camera, exterior, recordMonitor, exterior camera, LCDMonitor, exterior camera, dimension (diagonal)

Switch, radio panic, activates interior camera(s)

Loc #5

Type - lens

Quantity, provisions exterior camerasLoc #1

Type - lens

Loc #2

Loc #2

Type - lens

Loc #3

Type - lens

Loc #4

Type - lens

Black and whiteColorAudioQuantity, provisions interior camerasLoc #1

Type - lens

DigitalVideoTVXLoronixPrima Facie






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICE04 2.3.9.13 X Note: to be integrated with Clever system in field b y customerAPC System Contractor shall supply all the necessary software for the Authority

to download & process the retrieved data for its business use.52.1 04 X

2.2.6.1.3Miscellaneous XRequirements 10 lb. ABC

53 X labeled "Property of MASSPORT" letters 1-inch heightXX2 3.75 x 9 inch on the driver's barrier/ electronics cabinet1 3.75 x 9 inch at the rear exit door

2.2.1.4.2 XX

Curb Feelers / OneRepair Card Holder / Ref. 13.3 Attachment B

2.2.1.4.2 X clear plastic material 5 1/2" x 8 1/2"04 2.4.1

01 2.2.6.1.3 Aluminum Storage Box-front CS wheel Cost change to delete box 2010-214 accepted by custo merhouse

04 X 2.2.3.1.6 Luggage Racks-(1) 41.25 " luggage rack on the forward curbside wheel house,(1) 50" luggage rack streetside directly across from the entrance doorRevise luggage racks as per cost change 2012-090, customer has approved cost change

S1-Guard

Coat strapHolder, registrationHolder, trash bag

Emergency Reflector Kit

Type

Registration card holder

Fire extinguisher, label, date of inspectionKit, triangle2 Chock BlocksQuantity, take-one holdersQuantity, take-one holdersCoat hook

NABI provideNABI install functional systemNABI install wiringNABI install system sensors

Fire extinguisher, standardFire extinguisher, special

Luggage Racks






SALES ORDER CHANGE NOTICERESPONSIBLE SPECTEST DESCRIPTION

2.2.1.1.3 Paint adhesion testing must be completed on every 10th vehicle.Certifications

2.2.5.2.2 Noise Test - Instrumentation & other general requirement shall conform to SAE standard J366.

2.3.1.5.3 Noise Test - Exterior - Instrumentation & other general requirement shall conform to SAE standard J366. Required on Pilot Bus

2.3.7.3 Immediately prior to the time that the vehicle is delivered to the Authority's property the batteries shall be load tested to assure that they are fully charged. Batteries that fail this test shall be considered defective, removed from the vehicleand replaced.

2.3.7.6 Amerex written certification that installation requirements have been met & sufficient testing was made on the first vehicle system to ensure reliable fire fighting operation.

2.3.9.1 A complete HVAC capacity & performance analysis shall demonstrate compliance with all performance requirements01 A/C pull-down and heater pull-up tests to be successfully completed on the pilot.

04

01 2.1.5 Copy of Cummins IQA requiredInstallation Audits required*Thermo King HVAC*T&T wheelchair ramp*Twin Vision destination Sign

03*Vapor Doors*IO Controls Multiplex*Passenger seats

01 *Meritor rear axle01 2.3.5.1.4 Pilot bus - test Air pressure build rate, from 40 psi to governor cut-off, to be less than 3 minutes at fast idle.

Pilot bus test - Air pressure shall not leak down more than 5 psi over 15-minutes

01 Weight slip required for each bus


RespectiveRFP/Specification

MASSPORT 42’ Technical Specification PB Revised 011912 Page 1

ATTACHMENT B (REVISED)

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR

42’ LOW-FLOOR EMISSIONS CONTROL DIESEL VEHICLE WITH A CNG SYSTEM

Massachusetts Port Authority d.b.a MASSPORT

Boston, Massachusetts

MASSPORT 42’ Technical Specification PB Revised 011912 Page i

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR MASSPORT 42’ LOW FLOOR VEHICLE

SECTION 2.0 2.1.0 GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................1 2.1.1 SCOPE OF WORK ...........................................................................................................1

2.1.1.1 Vehicle Configuration 2.1.1.2 Power Configuration 2.1.1.3 Opportunity/Delivery 2.1.1.4 Identification 2.1.1.5 Service Proven Vehicle 2.1.1.6 Service Proven Vehicle Structure 2.1.1.7 Fire Safety

2.1.2 DEFINITIONS ..................................................................................................................4 2.1.3 ABBREVIATIONS ..........................................................................................................9 2.1.4 ACRONYMS, STANDARDS, AND CODES ...............................................................10 2.1.5 LEGAL REQUIREMENTS............................................................................................11

2.1.5.1 Buy America Certification 2.1.6 DESIGN REVIEW/PRE-PRODUCTION PROCESS ...................................................12

2.1.6.1 Pre-production Meeting 2.1.6.2 Initial Design Review 2.1.6.3 Follow-up Design Review 2.1.6.4 Final Design Review

2.1.7 PILOT BUS PROGRAM ................................................................................................16 2.1.8 CONTRACT DELIVERABLES LIST (CDR) ...............................................................16 2.1.9 OVERALL REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................................18

2.1.9.1 Dimensions 2.1.9.2 Underbody Clearance 2.1.9.3 Weight 2.1.9.4 Capacity 2.1.9.5 Service Life & Maintenance 2.1.9.6 Operating Environment

2.1.10 VIBRATION ...................................................................................................................21 2.1.11 RIDE QUALITY ............................................................................................................21

MASSPORT 42’ Technical Specification PB Revised 011912 Page ii

2.1.12 MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................22 2.1.12.1 Guards 2.1.12.2 Materials 2.1.12.3 General Conditions 2.1.12.4 Lubrication 2.1.12.5 Manuals and Records 2.1.12.6 Window Drawings 2.1.12.7 Generic Specifications 2.1.12.8 Access to Documents 2.1.12.9 Training and Technical Support

2.2.0 BODY .............................................................................................................................30 2.2.1 SHELL ............................................................................................................................30

2.2.1.1 General Requirements 2.2.1.2 Structure 2.2.1.3 Exterior & Applied Panels 2.2.1.4 Interior 2.2.1.5 Floor 2.2.1.6 Steps 2.2.1.7 Wheel Housing 2.2.1.8 Passenger Doors 2.2.1.9 Service Compartments & Access Door 2.2.1.10 Roof

2.2.2 OPERATING COMPONENTS ......................................................................................43

2.2.2.1 Doors 2.2.2.2 Windshield Wipers & Washers 2.2.2.3 Lighting, Controls & Instruments

2.2.3 INTERIOR TRIM ...........................................................................................................54

2.2.3.1 General Requirement 2.2.3.2 Passenger Seats 2.2.3.3 Driver's Seat 2.2.3.4 Floor Covering

2.2.4 WINDOWS .....................................................................................................................62

2.2.4.1 Driver's Windows 2.2.4.2 Side Windows

2.2.5 INSULATION ................................................................................................................64

2.2.5.1 Material 2.2.5.2 Performance

2.2.6 ANCILLARY FEATURES ............................................................................................64

2.2.6.1 Driver's Area

MASSPORT 42’ Technical Specification PB Revised 011912 Page iii

2.2.6.2 Mirrors 2.2.6.3 Passenger Assists 2.2.6.4 Destination Signs 2.2.6.5 Accessibility Provisions

2.3.0 CHASSIS ........................................................................................................................73 2.3.1 PROPULSION SYSTEM ...............................................................................................73

2.3.1.1 Vehicle Performance 2.3.1.2 Power Plant Mounting & Accessories 2.3.1.3 Power Plant 2.3.1.4 Fuel System (See Attachment #2) 2.3.1.5 Emissions

2.3.2 FINAL DRIVE................................................................................................................81

2.3.2.1 General Requirements 2.3.2.2 Hubodometer

2.3.3 SUSPENSION ................................................................................................................82

2.3.3.1 General Requirements 2.3.3.2 Springs & Shock Absorbers

2.3.4 STEERING .....................................................................................................................83

2.3.4.1 Strength 2.3.4.2 Turning Radius 2.3.4.3 Turning Effort

2.3.5 BRAKES .........................................................................................................................84

2.3.5.1 Service Brakes 2.3.5.2 Emergency Parking Brakes 2.3.5.3 Anti-Skid Braking System (ABS)

2.3.6 GENERAL CHASSIS ....................................................................................................86

2.3.6.1 Wheels & Tires 2.3.6.2 Bumper System

2.3.7 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ...…………………………………………………………88

2.3.7.1 General Requirements 2.3.7.2 Electrical Components 2.3.7.3 Batteries 2.3.7.4 Master Battery Switch 2.3.7.5 Radio Noise Attenuation 2.3.7.6 Fire Detection and Suppression System 2.3.7.7 Gas Detection System (GDS)

MASSPORT 42’ Technical Specification PB Revised 011912 Page iv

2.3.8 INTERIOR CLIMATE CONTROL ...............................................................................95 2.3.8.1 Capacity & Performance 2.3.8.2 Controls and Temperature Uniformity 2.3.8.3 Air Flow, Passenger Area 2.3.8.4 Air Flow, Operators Area 2.3.8.5 Air Intakes 2.3.8.6 Step-well Defrosters

2.3.9 VEHICLE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ...................................................................98

2.3.9.1 Make Ready Provisions, Intelligent Transportation System (ITS) 2.3.9.2 ITS Equipment Enclosure 2.3.9.3 ITS Provisions, Power Supply 2.3.9.4 ITS Provisions, Conduits 2.3.9.5 ITS Provisions, Operator Control Module (OCM) 2.3.9.6 ITS Provisions, Mounting Provisions Global Positioning Satellite Receiver

Antenna 2.3.9.7 ITS Provisions, Automated Vehicle Announcement (AVA) System 2.3.9.8 ITS Provisions, Speaker Requirements 2.3.9.9 ITS Provisions, Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) 2.3.9.10 ITS Provisions, Radio System 2.3.9.11 ITS Provisions, Radio Antennas 2.3.9.12 ITS Provisions, Cell Modem Antenna 2.3.9.13 ITS Provisions, Automatic Passenger Counting System (APC)

2.4.0 SECURITY CAMERA SYSTEM ..................................................................................102 2.4.1 REAR WHEEL DEFLECTOR SYSTEM………………………………………….. 102

2.4.1.1 Interchangeability 2.4.1.2 Operating Environment 2.4.1.3 Maintainability Requirements

MASSPORT 42’ Technical Specification PB Revised 011912 Page v

QUALITY ASSURANCE PROVISIONS SECTION 3.0

3.1.0 CONTRACTOR’S IN-PLANT QUALITY ASSURANCE REQUIREMENTS .........104 3.1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE ORGANIZATION ............................................................104

3.1.1.1 Control 3.1.1.2 Authority and Responsibility

3.1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE ORGANIZATION FUNCTIONS .....................................104

3.1.2.1 Work Instructions 3.1.2.2 Records Maintenance 3.1.2.3 Corrective Action

3.1.3 STANDARDS AND FACILITIES ...............................................................................104

3.1.3.1 Configuration Control 3.1.3.2 Measuring and Testing Facilities 3.1.3.3 Production Tooling As Media of Inspection 3.1.3.4 Equipment Use by Resident Inspectors

3.1.4 CONTROL OF PURCHASES .....................................................................................104

3.1.4.1 Supplier Control 3.1.4.2 Purchasing Data

3.1.5 MANUFACTURING CONTROL................................................................................105

3.1.5.1 Completed Items 3.1.5.2 Nonconforming Materials 3.1.5.3 Statistical Techniques 3.1.5.4 Inspection Status

3.1.6 INSPECTION SYSTEM ..............................................................................................106 3.1.6.1 Inspection Personnel 3.1.6.2 Inspection Records 3.1.6.3 Quality Assurance Audits

3.1.7 INSPECTIONS .............................................................................................................107

3.1.7.1 Inspection Stations 3.1.7.2 Resident Inspector

3.2.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS................................................................................................108 3.2.1 RESPONSIBILITY.......................................................................................................108 3.2.2 PRE-DELIVERY TESTS .............................................................................................108

3.2.2.1 Inspection – Visual and Measured

MASSPORT 42’ Technical Specification PB Revised 011912 Page vi

3.2.2.2 Total Vehicle Operation 3.2.3 POST-DELIVERY TESTS ...........................................................................................109

3.2.3.1 Visual Inspection 3.2.3.2 Vehicle Operation

MASSPORT 42’ Technical Specification PB Revised 011912 Page vii

WARRANTY PROVISIONS SECTION 4.0

4.1.0 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS................................................................................110 4.1.1 CONTRACTOR WARRANTY ...................................................................................110

4.1.1.1 Complete Vehicle 4.1.1.2 Body and Chassis Structure 4.1.1.3 Propulsion System 4.1.1.4 Major Subsystems 4.1.1.5 Extension of Warranty

4.1.2 VOIDING OF WARRANTY .......................................................................................111 4.1.3 EXCEPTIONS AND ADDITIONS TO WARRANTY ...............................................111 4.1.4 DETECTION OF DEFECTS ........................................................................................111 4.1.5 SCOPE OF WARRANTY REPAIRS ..........................................................................111 4.1.6 FLEET DEFECTS – OCCURRENCE AND REMEDY ..............................................112 4.2.0 REPAIR PROCEDURES .............................................................................................112 4.2.1 REPAIR PERFORMANCE ..........................................................................................112 4.2.2 REPAIRS BY CONTRACTOR ...................................................................................112 4.2.3 REPAIRS BY AUTHORITY .......................................................................................113

4.2.3.1 Parts Used 4.2.3.2 Contractor Supplied Parts 4.2.3.3 Defective Components Return 4.2.3.4 Failure Analysis 4.2.3.5 Reimbursement for Labor 4.2.3.6 Reimbursement for Parts 4.2.3.7 Reimbursement Requirements

4.2.4 WARRANTY AFTER REPAIR/REPLACEMENT ....................................................114

MASSPORT 42’ Technical Specification PB Revised 011912 Page viii

ATTACHMENTS

Attachment No. 1. Hybrid Propulsion Systems (Deleted) Attachment No. 2. CNG Fuel System Attachment No. 3. Physical Height - Required Clearances Attachment No. 4 Maintenance Personnel Skill Levels Attachment No. 5 NABI Drawing of Camera Cable End Locations Attachment No. 6 Major Subsystems Warranty Coverage

MASSPORT 42’ Technical Specification PB Revised 011912 Page 1 of 114

SECTION 2.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

2.1.0 GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS: 2.1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

2.1.1.1 Vehicle Configuration: (Amended) These technical specifications are intended to provide a general description of Forty Foot (42’), Low Floor with two passenger door openings, diesel powered, high performance buses designed for providing Airport customers and their luggage round trip transportation between Logan Airport terminals, subway stations and the consolidated car rental car facility. The vehicle exterior shall appear progressive and modern taking on the attributes of aerodynamic vehicle styling. These vehicles are intended for use by the widest possible spectrum of passengers, including children, adults, the elderly and handicapped. This vehicle must also be capable of transporting luggage belonging to passengers to and from airport and car rental facilities. These Technical Specifications are not intended to dictate any specific design but rather are intended to indicate the type of passenger transport vehicle and equipment desired by AUTHORITY and certain standards of performance, which must be achieved. It is the AUTHORITY’s intention to purchase new low floor vehicles that are fully compliant with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (ADA). An exception is that no passenger stop request system is required for the buses due to their operation as airport shuttle buses where the bus route is a set route and passengers cannot board or alight at their options. If other applicable ADA's requirements exceed these specifications, then the contractor shall comply with ADA. Vehicles shall incorporate features essential for safe, fast, efficient, and comfortable operation by the operator to ensure excellent road and traffic visibility, as well as adequate means for safe passenger movement, under all driving conditions. Vehicles shall be easily maneuverable in normal and heavy traffic. The vehicle shall have two (2) passenger doorways on the curbside, with the front passenger doorway located ahead of the front tires. The rear passenger doorway shall be located ahead of the rear tires. All doorways shall have low floor entry for use with street, low-level station platforms and/or street curbs. The low-floor section in the vehicle shall extend from the front doorway to rearward of the rear doorway. The front doorway shall incorporate the ramp system mechanism for the mobility impaired. These vehicles shall provide maximum passenger appeal in appearance, comfort, and safety; combined with excellence in operating characteristics, standardization with existing AUTHORITY fleet, economy of operation, optimum perimeter seating, and conformity with state and federal regulations and emission standards. These vehicles shall incorporate a high level of subsystem integration coordinated with central diagnostic functions and single point Operator interface.


These technical specifications have been prepared with emphasis on in-service reliability. The basic structure of the vehicle including major suspension components shall be designed to last the life of the vehicle without major overhaul or replacement. 2.1.1.2 Power Configuration: (Amended) The bidder shall price the vehicle in following options:

Option 3: CNG fueled engine meeting or exceeding all 2010 emission regulations and

standards. (ATTACHMENT No. 2) NOTE: In the event the EPA adjusts Emission Regulations after this writing, the

delivered bus power plants are required to meet the most current certification levels. The vehicle will provide very low exhaust emissions as a result of; a fully 2010 EPA certified engine, exclusive use of CNG fuel. 2.1.1.3 Operation/Delivery: (Omit) 2.1.1.4 Identification: (Amended) All vehicle equipment shall be identified in accordance with the following conventions:

a) With the operator looking through the windshield, items located on the operator's

right shall be designated “curbside,” and items on the operator's left shall be designated “street side.”

b) Multiple items, such as windows, lighting fixtures and seats, shall be numbered

consecutively from forward to rearward for the curbside of the vehicle and then from the rearward to forward for the street side of the vehicle.

c) Two (2) ADA compliant passenger door openings located on curb side of vehicle.

2.1.1.5 Service Proven Vehicle: The AUTHORITY is willing to take advantage of new technologies when practical and with minimal risk. The contractor shall demonstrate the benefit of using any new technology being proposed and provide evidence that the AUTHORITY will not end up with a problematic design. The AUTHORITY requires that all vehicles; vehicle systems and component designs shall be service-proven. A service-proven design shall meet all the following criteria:

a) Used in revenue service for at least 3 years. b) Used in operation for at least 5,000,000 miles with at least 100,000 miles per vehicle. c) Used on a minimum fleet size of 50 vehicles.


d) Has achieved a MMBF consistent with the AUTHORITY’s goal of 20,000 miles (Ref. Section 2.1.9.5.3).

e) Demonstrated as reliable with appropriate quality service history that includes

documentation reflecting performance in previous applications. The AUTHORITY will make all appropriate determinations in regard to acceptable service history.

The Bidders shall submit specific details of the application history provided by current/former users of the equipment. A slightly modified proven design may be approved at the discretion of the AUTHORITY. 2.1.1.6 Service Proven Vehicle Structure: To demonstrate that the vehicle structure will survive in the AUTHORITY’s operating environment, the contractor shall submit a test report from a reputable laboratory, approved by the AUTHORITY, describing a shaker table fatigue test of the Bidders vehicle structure, verifying the 12-year life, and strength and fatigue life requirements. In the absence of the Shaker Table Test, the Contractor shall prepare a Structural Analysis Report (SAR) for the vehicle body structure. The SAR will demonstrate that the structure has sufficient strength to meet the 12-year life requirement. The SAR will be independently verified by the AUTHORITY during the Design Review process and the Contractor shall provide all support necessary. The Bidder shall submit for AUTHORITY Review and Approval, any planned modifications to the vehicle, from that subjected to the Shaker Table Test as design enhancements. A description of the modifications to the structure shall include justification for the changes, and a detailed analysis demonstrating that these changes will enhance and not adversely affect the structural strength, operability, and maintainability of the vehicle in the Boston snow and salt water environment. If the vehicle structure has not yet completed all requirements to document the validation of the service proven structure, the bidder shall submit in a preliminary plan and schedule for the validation process in accordance with the AUTHORITY’s requirements, that will meet the pilot vehicle design and delivery schedule. 2.1.1.7 Fire Safety: The vehicle shall be designed and manufactured in accordance with all applicable fire safety and smoke emissions regulations. These provisions shall include the use of fire-retardant/low-smoke materials, fire detection systems, firewalls, and facilitation of passenger evacuation. All materials used in the construction of the passenger compartment of the vehicle shall be in accordance with the Recommended Fire Safety Practices defined in FTA Docket 90, dated October 20, 1993. Materials entirely enclosed from the passenger compartment need not comply, unless otherwise specified. In addition, smaller components and items, such as switch knobs and small light lenses, shall be exempt from this requirement. The contractor shall provide for review at the pre-production meeting, the smoke and flammability characteristics certification for all material used in the construction of the passenger compartment.


2.1.2 DEFINITIONS: (Amended) The following are definitions of special terms used in Section 2.0. (Alphabetize definitions) Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA): Refers to requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, as published in the Federal Register, 49 CFR Parts 27, 37, and 38, Transportation for Individuals with Disabilities, and as further amended. Approved or Approved Type: Design, type of material, procedure, or method given written acceptance by the AUTHORITY. Audible Discrete Frequency: An audible discrete frequency is determined to exist if the sound power level in any 1/3-octave band exceeds the average of the sound power levels of the two adjacent 1/3-octave bands by 4 decibels (dba) or more. AUTHORITY (or MASSPORT): The Massachusetts Port AUTHORITY is the transportation provider for the Boston Airport System. Bidder: The contractor submitting a proposal in response to the AUTHORITY RFP for 42’ foot CNG vehicles. Classes of Failures (also Failure): Classes of failures are described as follows:

Class 1: Physical Safety: A failure that could lead directly to passenger or driver injury and represents a severe crash situation. Class 2: Road Call: A failure resulting in an enroute interruption of service. Service is discontinued until the vehicle is replaced or repaired or repaired at the point of failure. Class 3: Vehicle Change: A failure that requires the removal of the vehicle from service during its assignments. The vehicle is operable to a rendezvous point with a replacement vehicle. Class 4: Bad Order: A failure that does not require removal of the vehicle from service during its assignments but does degrade vehicle operation. The failure shall be reported by the driver, inspector or hostler.

CNG: Compressed Natural Gas which is mixtures of hydrocarbon gases and vapors consisting principally of methane in gaseous form that has been compressed for use as a vehicular fuel.

CNG Cylinder: A container constructed, inspected, and maintained in accordance with U.S.

Department of Transportation regulations or ANSI/IAS NGV2, Basic Requirements for Compressed Natural Gas Vehicle (NGV) Fuel Containers. Contractor: The person or persons, firm, partnership, corporation, or combination thereof which has entered into a procurement contract with the AUTHORITY to supply the vehicles.


The prime contractor is solely responsible to the AUTHORITY for the quality and proper functioning of the vehicles and all components. Contractor's Drawings: Items such as general arrangement drawings, detail drawings, graphs, diagrams, and sketches that are prepared by the Contractor to detail its work. Curb Weight: Weight of vehicle with maximum usable levels of all consumables, such as fuel, and other fluids, and including all equipment required for operation and required by this Technical Specification, but without passengers or operator. Decibels (dba): Decibels with reference to 0.0002 microbar as measured on the “A” scale. Design Operating Profile (also Duty Cycle): The operating profile for design purposes shall consist of simulated transit-type service in the Boston metropolitan area of operation. The duty cycle is described in the figure "Transit Vehicle Duty Cycle." The duty cycle consists of the following phases to be repeated in sequence:

Central Business District (CBD) Phase of 2 miles with 7 stops per mile and a top speed of 20 mph, with an average dwell time of 7 seconds per stop. Arterial Route Phase of 2 miles with 2 stops per mile and a top speed of 40 mph, with an average dwell time of 7 seconds per stop. Commuter Phase of 4 miles with 1 stop and a maximum speed of 55 mph with a stop dwell time of 20 seconds, and an end of line turnaround of 5 minutes.

Transit Vehicle Duty Cycle

Phase Stops/ Mile

Top Speed (mph)

Miles Accel. Dist. (ft)

Accel. Time (sec)

Cruise Dist. (ft)

Cruise Time (sec)

Decel. Rate

(fpsps)

Decel. Dist. (ft)

Decel. Time (sec)

Dwell Time (sec)

Cycle Time (min-sec)

Total Stops

CBD 7 20 2 155 10 540 18.5 6.78 60 4.5 7 9-20 14 Idle - - - - - - - - - - - 5-0 -

Arterial 2 40 2 1035 29 1035 22.5 6.78 255 9 7 4-30 4 CBD 7 20 2 155 10 540 18.5 6.78 60 4.5 7 9-20 14

Arterial 2 40 2 1350 29 1350 22.5 6.78 255 9 7 4-30 4 CBD 7 20 2 155 10 540 18.5 6.78 60 4.5 7 9-20 14

Commuter 1 stop for

phase

Max or 55

4 5500 90 2 miles +

4580 ft

188 6.78 480 12 20 5-10 1

Total 14 47-10 51

The vehicle shall be loaded to SLW and shall average approximately eighteen, (18) mph while operating on this duty cycle. Operation shall continue regardless of the ambient temperature or weather conditions. The passenger doors shall be opened and closed at each stop, and the vehicle shall be knelt at each stop during the CBD phase. The braking profile shall be:

16 percent of the stops at 3 fpsps 50 percent of the stops at 6 fpsps 26 percent of the stops at 9 fpsps


8 percent of the stops at 12 fpsps

These percentages of stops shall be evenly distributed over the three phases of the duty cycle. For scheduling purposes, the average deceleration rate is assumed. Driver's Eye Range: The 95th-percentile ellipse defined in SAE Recommended Practice J941, except that the height of the ellipse shall be determined from the seat at its reference height. Equal: Whenever the words “equal”, “equivalent” or “approved equal” are used in connection with make or quality of material or equipment, the proposed alternative shall be functionally compatible with and of equal or better quality than the item it is proposed to replace. The Technical Project Manager’s decision as to whether any material or equipment proposed is equal to that specified shall be binding and final on both the Contractor and the AUTHORITY. Failure Rate: The frequency of failure, expressed as failures per mile. Failure rate is the mathematical reciprocal of Mean Mileage Between Failures (MMBF). Finite Element Analysis (FEA): A structural analysis model using a recognized computer program that will be utilized to establish the structural adequacy of the vehicle body, chassis, frame and other structural parts. Fireproof Materials: Materials that will not burn or melt at temperatures less than 2,000 degrees Fahrenheit (2000°F). Fire-Resistant Materials: Materials that have a flame spread index less than 150, as measured in a radiant panel flame test per ASTM-E 162-90. Fire Retardant Materials: Materials that have a flame-spread index less than 35, as measured in a radiant panel flame test per ASTM-E-162-90. Free Floor Space: Floor area available to standees, excluding ingress/egress areas, area under the seats, area occupied by the feet of seated passengers, and the vestibule area. Gross Load: One hundred-fifty pounds (150 lbs.) for every designed passenger seating position, for the driver and for each 1.5 square feet of free floor space. Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW): Curb weight plus gross load. Gross Vehicle Weight Rated (GVWR): The maximum total weight as determined by the vehicle manufacturer, at which the vehicle can be safely and reliably operated for its intended purpose. Human Dimensions: The dimensions used in the Technical Specifications are defined in SAE Recommended Practice J833.


Inspector: The person or firm designated by the AUTHORITY as its quality assurance representative. A representative(s) of the AUTHORITY assigned to inspect materials and workmanship. Jerk Rate: Time rate of change of acceleration and deceleration, equal to the second time derivative of velocity. Maintenance Personnel Skill Levels: Defined below are maintenance personnel skill levels and straight wage rates used in Section 2, Technical Specifications; Section 3, Quality Assurance Provisions, and Section 4 Warranty Provisions. Maintenance Personnel Skill Levels (See Attachment No. 4 for additional information)

4M: Journeyman or Class “A” Mechanic 3M: Service Mechanic “B” Class Servicer 2M: Mechanic Helper or Bus Servicer

Mean Mileage Between Failures (MMBF): The mean operating mileage between independent failures. Pilot Vehicle: Pilot Bus Testing and Demonstration program and approval of Final Design Configuration by the AUTHORITY. Proof (used as a suffix): Apparatus is designated as “splash proof,” “dustproof,” etc., when so constructed, protected, or treated that its successful operation is not interfered with when subjected to the specified material or condition. Reliability: The probability of performing a specified function without failure and within design parameters for the distance, under actual operating conditions. Safe: The condition in which passengers, operators, or maintenance personnel are secure from threat or danger, harm, or loss arising from improper design, manufacture, assembly, malfunction, or failure of the vehicle or any of its components or systems. Seated Load: One hundred-fifty pounds (150 lbs.) for every designed passenger seating position and for the driver. Seated Load Weight (SLW): Curb weight plus seated load. Self-Extinguishing: Materials in which flame propagation is limited to 4.0 inches when tested in accordance to FMVSS 302. Special Listings: Technical Documentation regarding the Operation and Maintenance of a vehicle or the vehicle subcomponents which is not provided as part of the OEM or OEM vendor Maintenance and Parts Manuals.


Standard Configuration Vehicle: The 42-foot vehicle described in this Technical Specification. Signing, colors, and other information shall be found in attachments. Standards: Standards referenced in these Technical Specifications are the latest revisions unless otherwise stated. Standee Line: A two inch wide line, marked in yellow, across the vehicle aisle in line with the front curb-side modesty panel to designate the forward area which passengers may not occupy when the vehicle is moving. Structure: The basic body, including floor deck material and installation, load bearing external panels, structural components, axle mounting provisions, and suspension beams and attachment points. Subcontractor: An individual, firm, partnership, corporation, or joint venture to whom the Contractor sublets any part, subsystem, component or hardware for the Contract. Supplier (or Sub-supplier): Person(s), firm, partnership, corporation or combination thereof who builds, produces services, or supplies materials, equipment or apparatus for installation on the vehicle. Supplier-furnished materials or services shall comply with all contract requirements. Tamperproof: Fasteners are designated as tamperproof when they are selected so that they cannot be easily loosened by hand or with common tools such as a flat blade or cross-recessed head screwdriver or pliers. Tamperproof Fasteners shall be tamper resistant Torx type. Technical Project Manager: The person designated by the AUTHORITY to be its liaison with the Contractor on all technical matters pertaining to the work. The Technical Project Manager is empowered to act on behalf of the AUTHORITY in such matters as acceptance of Contractor's drawings, test procedures, First Article approvals, and vehicle acceptance. The Technical Project Manager is responsible for technical issues on behalf of the AUTHORITY, and shall be designated as such on official AUTHORITY letterhead. Tight (used as a suffix): Apparatus is designated as “watertight,” “dust-tight,” etc., when so constructed that the enclosing case will exclude the specified material. Time Down: The lapsed time during which equipment is not capable of doing useful work because of maladjustment, malfunction, or maintenance-in-progress. Vehicle: A complete vehicle that conforms to these Technical Specifications and is ready to operate.


2.1.3 ABBREVIATIONS: (Amended) The following is a list of abbreviations used in Section 2, Technical Specifications.

AVL Automated Vehicle Location °F Degrees Fahrenheit °C Degrees Celsius CAD Computer Aided Dispatch CDR Contract Deliverables Requirements cfm Cubic Feet Per Minute DC Direct Current EMI Electromagnetic Interference fpm Feet Per Minute fpsps Feet Per Second Per Second FRP Fiber reinforced plastic GPS Global Positioning System GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight, Rated HCFC Hydro chlorofluorocarbon HP Horsepower HVAC Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning Hz Hertz ITS Intelligent Transportation System KHz Kilohertz LED Light Emitting Diode Lbs Pounds mA milli-ampere AUTHORITY Massachusetts Port Authority (MASSPORT) MHz Megahertz mph Miles Per Hour mphps Miles Per Hour Per Second MMBF Mean Mileage Between Failures MTTR Mean Time To Repair NTP Notice to Proceed OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer PA Passenger Announcements PLC Programmable Logic Controller psi Pounds Per Square Inch psig Pounds Per Square Inch, Gauge RFI Radio Frequency Interference rpm Revolutions Per Minute SLW Seated Load Weight VMS Vehicle Messaging System


2.1.4 ACRONYMS, STANDARDS AND CODES: The following is a list of acronyms, standards and codes used in Section 2. All standards and codes that are specified in these Technical Specifications are the latest revisions unless otherwise noted. The latest revision in effect for each standard at the time of Notice to Proceed (NTP) shall be used in conjunction with the Technical Specifications. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all applicable standards and for supplying copies to all subcontractors/sub-suppliers. If the Contractor proposes to use a substitute standard (i.e., international standard), the Contractor is required to provide proof-of-equivalency for the AUTHORITY’s review and approval for each substituted standard. The following is a list of standards and codes that must be met, whether or not they are specifically referenced in these Technical Specifications.

ADA Americans with Disabilities Act ANSI American National Standards Institute APA American Plywood Association APTA American Public Transit Association ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials ATA Air Transport Association of America AWG American Wire Gauge AWS American Welding Society BMCS Bureau of Motor Carrier Safety CFR Code of Federal Regulations DOT United States Department of Transportation DPU Massachusetts Department of Public Utilities EIA Electronic Industries Association EPA Environmental Protection Agency FCC Federal Communications Commission FMCSR Federal Motor Carrier Safety Regulations FMVSS Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards FTA Federal Transit Administration (formerly UMTA), an agency within the DOT IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers ISO International Standards Organization JIC Joint Industrial Council MIL Military Specification NEC National Electrical Code NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers' Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association NHTSA National Highway Traffic Safety Administration PCMCIA Personal Computer Memory Card International Association PTI Pennsylvania Testing Institute at Altoona, PA SAE Society of Automotive Engineers SPI Society of the Plastics Industry UL Underwriters Laboratories Incorporated USDOT United States Department of Transportation


2.1.5 LEGAL REQUIREMENTS: The vehicle shall meet and the Contractor shall comply with all applicable Federal, State, and local regulations in effect for motor vehicles at the date of manufacture. These include but may not be limited to FMVSS, ADA, EPA and all applicable FMCSR and NFPA regulations in effect at the time the NTP is issued. Local regulations are defined as those below the state level. In the event of any conflict between the requirements of this Specification and any applicable legal requirement, then the legal requirement shall prevail. The Contractor shall submit FMVSS certificates of compliance or waiver from appropriate regulatory agency to the Authority before delivery of the first vehicle. The Contractor shall deliver a copy of the PTI Test Report for the vehicle to the Authority before delivery of the pilot vehicle. The Contractor must comply with all provisions of CFR 49, including Buy America Pre Award and Post Delivery Audit requirements and provide all related documentation substantiating same to the Authority or its designee at their request. Notwithstanding, anything in the Contract to the contrary, it is understood and agreed to by the Contractor that the Massachusetts Port AUTHORITY, herein referred to as the AUTHORITY, provided the Technical Specification for the sole purpose of describing in general terms the performance required from each vehicle, each vehicle’s systems and the discrete subsystems that make up the vehicle. The specification provided by the AUTHORITY does not in any way constitute a design of the vehicle or of such subsystems or discrete components. It is further understood that the AUTHORITY makes no representations regarding the Technical Specifications. It shall be incumbent on the Contractor to verify the accuracy of the Technical Specifications prior to the time of the bid. This Technical Specification is intended to leave the Contractor free to provide its own detailed design for the basic vehicle and the vehicle’s ancillary equipment. The Contractor shall assume complete and overall responsibility for the design and satisfactory operation of the vehicle and the vehicle’s subsystems or component parts. The Contractor’s responsibility includes, but is in no way limited to; ensuring that the design and manufacture of the vehicle and the vehicles component parts are appropriate, coordinated, and compatible and that they perform correctly throughout the life of the vehicle, whether together or individually. The Contractor shall ensure that each manufacturer of major items of equipment (for example, engine, transmission, brakes, air conditioning, heating and cooling controls, doors and controls, seats, lighting) has a complete copy of the Technical Specifications. Sub-suppliers shall approve of and sign-off on the Contractor’s specific application of their components. Proof of sub-suppliers installation approval shall be provided to the AUTHORITY.

2.1.5.1 Buy America Certification: The Contractor shall before award, submit data, information and documentation, that will assist the AUTHORITY in certifying that the Contractor manufacturing plan meets or exceeds the requirements of the “Buy America” requirement in accordance with 49 CFR Part 661. The Contractor shall submit a detailed manufacturing plan. It shall include final assembly that would typically include, at a minimum: the installation and interconnection of the engine, transmission, axles, including the cooling and braking systems; and the


installation and interconnection of heating and air conditioning equipment. In addition, the installation of pneumatic and electrical systems, door systems, passenger seats, passenger assists, destination signs, mobility aid ramps; and road testing, final inspections, repairs and preparation of the vehicle for delivery. The Contractor shall provide enough detail about these activities that will allow the AUTHORITY to determine that these activities constitute adequate final assembly under Buy America requirements without requesting an FTA determination of compliance. The AUTHORITY’s Resident Inspector will continue to monitor the Contractor’s compliance as specified in Section 3.1.7.2 Resident Inspector.

2.1.6 DESIGN REVIEW/PRE-PRODUCTION PROCESS: Pre-Production process includes a Pre-Production meeting and a two-tier Design Review, which consists of an Initial Design Review and Follow-Up Design Reviews as needed. The Contractor shall provide sufficient information that explains how the vehicle meets the specification requirements. The AUTHORITY requires that the basic body and chassis design offered replicates a motor vehicle that is service proven and has been PTI Altoona tested. This documentation, if approved by the Technical Project Manager, may substitute for or mitigate testing requirements established of this specification. Exhibit 1-1 provides a summary of specified requirements that have to be approved by the AUTHORITY. Exhibit 1-1 is provided solely for the convenience of the Contractor and does not purport to be complete. Said listing remains subject to modification by the AUTHORITY during contract execution.


EXHIBIT 1-1

List of Required AUTHORITY Approvals

Required Design Review Approvals Specification

Reference Material samples 2.1.12.2 Fiber Reinforced Materials 2.1.12.2 Color pigmented FRP and plastics 2.1.12.2 Design drawings of critical welds 2.1.12.3 Use of Phillips head, sheet metal and self tapping screws and blind rivets

2.1.12.3

Lubricants 2.1.12.4 Paint Application Document 2.2.1.1.3 Exterior Paint Scheme 2.2.1.1.3 Interior and exterior graphics 2.2.1.1.4 Fatigue Life Analysis Tests 2.2.1.2.1 Use of Bonded or Bolted Joints in Fiber Reinforced Material 2.2.1.2.5 Use and Management of Dissimilar Metals 2.2.1.2.6 Tow method and bar design 2.2.1.2.7 Jacking pad locations 2.2.1.2.8 Hoisting location 2.2.1.2.9 Modesty panels 2.2.1.4.3 Wheel Housings 2.2.1.7 Door Design 2.2.1.8 Floor access fasteners 2.2.1.9 Interior and exterior access door design 2.2.1.9 Roof Sealant 2.2.1.10.1 Door mechanical and control system 2.2.2.1.1 Location of Rear Door Master Switch 2.2.2.1.1 Warning Chime 2.2.2.1.4 Roof ventilator decals and escape hatch 2.2.2.1.6 Exterior lighting mounting locations 2.2.2.3 Service area lighting and switch 2.2.2.3.8 Indicator Lamps 2.2.2.3.12 Interior trim design, layout, and aesthetic features 2.2.3.1 Samples interior colors and patterns 2.2.3.1.1 Seating arrangement 2.2.3.2 Priority seating decal 2.2.3.2.1 Seat mounting and arrangement 2.2.3.2.1 Operator’s seat design and location 2.2.3.3 Operator’s seat Fabric 2.2.3.3 Floor Covering Color 2.2.3.4 Windshield Shade Band 2.2.4.1.1 Window and sash frame mounting rubber 2.2.4.2.2


Required Design Review Approvals Specification

Reference Window Lock 2.2.4.2.2 Emergency window instructions 2.2.4.2.2 Ventilation blower noise reduction 2.2.5.2.2 Operator’s console layout 2.2.6.1 Driver’s locker 2.2.6.1.4 Location of Fire Extinguisher 2.2.6.1.4 Location and number of mirrors 2.2.6.2 Door Entry Assists 2.2.6.3 Mobility aid clearance drawings 2.2.6.5 Mobility aid securement devices 2.2.6.5.3 Engine/Transmission configuration 2.3.1.3 Cooling systems 2.3.1.3.3 Fuel system design 2.3.1.4/Attach #2 Power steering filler ID tag 2.3.4 Air Dryer System 2.3.5.1.4 Bumper system 2.3.6.2 Electrical components, configuration, installation 2.3.7 Location of Multiplex Control Modules 2.3.7.2.2 Multiplex Diagnostics 2.3.7.2.2 Fire detection and suppression system 2.3.7.6 Gas Detection System 2.3.7.7 Intelligent Transportation System Location 2.3.9 Design and construction of radio compartment 2.3.9


2.1.6.1 Pre-production Meeting: The pre-production meetings are for the purpose of resolving design issues for which the AUTHORITY requires prior approval. Those requirements that cannot be resolved will be deferred to the design review process for resolution. The Contractor should be prepared to present any and all items critical to design, delivery, testing, acceptance, and overall contractual performance. The Pre-production Meetings will be held at an AUTHORITY designated location. 2.1.6.2 Initial Design Review: The objective of the Initial Design Review shall be for the Contractor to present the outstanding design details of the vehicle, for the AUTHORITY’s review and approval, which may include at a minimum the following deliverables:

a) Weight Control Strategy b) Structural Analysis Status Report c) Test Program Plan d) Manual Outlines (2.1.12.5)

The Initial Design Review will be held at the Contractor's final assembly plant location. In addition to the above items, the Contractor should be prepared to present any and all items critical to design, delivery, testing, acceptance, and overall contractual performance that were not resolved at the Pre-production Meetings. 2.1.6.3 Follow-Up Design Review: The objective of the Follow-Up Design Review shall be for the Contractor to gain AUTHORITY approval for all those items not approved during the Pre-production Meetings and at the Initial Design Review. During Follow-Up Design Reviews, any open issues as a result of the documentation submitted to the AUTHORITY shall also be discussed along with any new submittals such as, but not limited to:

a) FEA Output b) Outlines for training programs (2.1.12.9) c) CDR's

Follow-up design reviews shall continue at the Contractor’s facility, the first article acceptance inspection (FAI) location(s) appropriate for the item(s) being reviewed and approved by the AUTHORITY. 2.1.6.4 Final Design Review: A final review of all the design drawings, required analysis, AUTHORITY Approvals and Contract Deliverables shall be conducted no later than 1 month before any work is started on the pilot vehicles. Items closed during earlier reviews need not be addressed again. The objective of the review is to freeze the design of the pilot vehicles and to assure both the AUTHORITY and the Contractor that there is total agreement as to the configuration of the pilot vehicle before construction begins.


2.1.7 PILOT BUS PROGRAMS: The Pilot Bus shall be delivered to the AUTHORITY no less than 5 months in advance of the beginning of serial bus delivery. This bus shall be used for testing and demonstration on the AUTHORITY's property for a one-month period. The objective of the pilot bus programs is to ensure that an acceptable design configuration and vehicle performance is achieved and to lessen the probability of costly and inconvenient retrofits. At the end of the one-month test period, the preferences of the AUTHORITY’s Operations and Maintenance Departments as well as any known problems and required modifications will be identified and conveyed to the Contractor. The design configuration defined at that time will become the basis for the production of buses 2 through the end of production under this Contract. The Contractor shall submit for AUTHORITY approval a detailed Pilot Bus Program Plan at the Initial Design Review. Because of scheduling constraints, the Contractor may, with the AUTHORITY’s approval, begin production of buses 2 through the end of production upon successful completion of Pilot Bus Testing and Demonstration program (approximately 1 month), and approval of Final Design Configuration by the AUTHORITY. 2.1.8 CONTRACT DELIVERABLES REQUIREMENTS LIST (CDR): This listing of Contract Deliverables (Exhibit 1-2) is prepared solely as a reference and does not claim to have all CDR’s as defined by the contract documentation herein. The Contractor bears the responsibility for submitting a complete and comprehensive contract deliverables schedule for the AUTHORITY’s review and approval. The schedule shall include the following:

a) Item Number b) Quantity to be Submitted c) Title and Description d) Contract Specification Reference e) Reason for Submittal (information or approval) f) Required Submittal Date g) Actual Submittal Date h) Current Status and Any Other Pertinent Information.

Following schedule approval, the Contractor shall continue to provide monthly status reports to the AUTHORITY. The AUTHORITY reserves the right to increase/decrease CDR’s as required during the course of the Contract.


EXHIBIT 1-2 CDR List

CDR Description Specification

Reference 001 Sub-supplier Installation Sign-offs 2.1.5 002 Project Manufacturing Plan 2.1.5.1 003 Design Review Data and Documentation 2.1.6.2 004 Pilot Vehicle Program 2.1.7 005 Contract Deliverable Requirement (CDR) Schedule 2.1.8 006 Weight Control Strategy 2.1.9.3 007 Vehicle Weight Record for Each Vehicle 2.1.9.3 008 Material Samples 2.1.12.2 009 Drawings of Critical Weld Areas 2.1.12.3 010 Component Adjustment and Settings 2.1.12.3 011 Manuals and Records 2.1.12.5 012 Window Drawings 2.1.12.6 013 Generic Specifications 2.1.12.7 014 Training Program 2.1.12.9 015 Training Tools and Test equipment 2.1.12.9 016 Operators Training 2.1.12.9.1 017 Maintenance Training 2.1.12.9.2 018 Renewal Parts Manual Seminar 2.1.12.9.5 019 Paint Documentation 2.2.1.1.3 020 Paint Schemes 2.2.1.1.3 021 Fatigue Life Analysis 2.2.1.2.2 022 Interior Material and Color Samples 2.2.3.1 023 Computer for Destination Sign System 2.2.6.4.7 024 Operating Manual Outline 2.1.12.9.1 025 Operating Manual Draft 2.1.12.9.1 026 Operating Manual Final 2.1.12.9.1 027 Operating Manual CD ROM 2.1.12.9.1 028 Running Repair and Service Manual Outline 2.1.12.9.2 029 Running Repair and Service Manual Draft 2.1.12.9.2 030 Running Repair and Service Manual Final 2.1.12.9.2 031 Running Repair and Service Manual CD ROM 2.1.12.9.2 032 Vendor Manuals List 2.1.12.9.2

033 Vendor Manuals Outline 2.1.12.9.2

034 Vendor Manuals Draft 2.1.12.9.2

035 Vendor Manuals Final 2.1.12.9.2

036 Vendor Manuals CD ROM 2.1.12.9.2

037 Renewal Parts Manual Outline 2.1.12.9.3 038 Renewal Parts Manual Draft 2.1.12.9.3 039 Renewal Parts Manual Final 2.1.12.9.3


CDR Description Specification

Reference 040 Renewal Parts Manual CD ROM 2.1.12.9.3

2.1.9 OVERALL REQUIREMENTS

2.1.9.1 Dimensions:

2.1.9.1.1 Physical Size: (Amended) With the exceptions of exterior mirrors, marker and signal lights, bumpers, fender skirts, and rub-rail, the vehicle shall have the following overall dimensions:

a) Length: 42.5 feet b) Width: 102 inches (+0, -1 inch) c) Height: 133 inches, maximum (Height justification in Attachment No. 3)

2.1.9.2 Underbody Clearance: The vehicle shall maintain the minimum clearance dimensions defined in SAE Standard J689, regardless of load up to the gross vehicle weight rating.

a) Ramp Clearances. Approach angle shall be no less than 8.5. Departure angle shall

be no less than 9. The break-over angle shall be no less than 8º. b) Ground Clearance. Ground clearance shall be no less than 10 inches except within

the axle zone, and wheel area. c) Axle Clearance. Axle zone clearance, which is the projected area between tires and

wheels on the same axial centerline, shall be no less than 5.5 inches. d) Wheel Area Clearance. Wheel area clearance shall be no less than 8 inches for parts

fixed to the vehicle body and 6 inches for parts that move vertically with the axles. e) Non-compliant clearances must be identified to the AUTHORITY. Non-compliances

will not be considered without appropriate protection for all non-compliant structure and components.

2.1.9.3 Weight: (Amended) Curb weight shall not exceed 31,900 pounds and shall be adjusted for the weight of equipment supplied under changes ordered. All equipment shall be arranged so that its weight is distributed to equalize tire loading not in excess of tire rating, and maximize adhesion braking and propulsion. The tire loading on opposite sides of an axle shall be within 5% of each other. Once a vehicle design is determined, the Contractor shall provide a weight control strategy for all phases of vehicle development.


The goal of the weight control program shall be to minimize the curb weight of the vehicle and to assure that the curb weight shall not increase as the design finalizes. The weight control strategy shall be as follows. Three (3) months after NTP, and every 3 months thereafter until the weighing of the first vehicle, the Contractor shall submit a report on the estimated total vehicle weight. The submission shall include a list of weights for key components on the vehicle, and an estimate of the percentage that the key component contributes to the total estimated vehicle weight. As actual equipment weights become available, they shall replace the estimated weights in these reports. Estimated and actual weights shall be clearly designated in the quarterly reports. The Contractor shall require the full cooperation of subcontractors in this effort, and shall require weighing of components at the earliest possible dates. The Contractor shall weigh each completed vehicle at shipment using a certified scale that produces a printed record of the weight, measured in pounds, and shall furnish the weight ticket to the AUTHORITY. Weights of components added by the Contractor after shipment, but before acceptance of the vehicle, shall be recorded on the vehicle acceptance form and inserted in the respective Vehicle History Book. 2.1.9.4 Capacity: Rated capacity of the standard configuration vehicle shall be no less than that delineated in Section 2.2.3.2. 2.1.9.5 Service Life & Maintenance:

2.1.9.5.1 Service Life: The vehicle shall be designed to operate as described in 2.1.1.1 for at least 12 years or 500,000 miles. It shall be capable of operating at least 40,000 miles per year including the twelfth year. 2.1.9.5.2 Maintenance & Inspection: Scheduled maintenance or inspection tasks as specified by the Contractor shall require a skill level of 4M or less. Scheduled maintenance tasks shall be related and shall be grouped in maximum mileage intervals. Based upon the design operating profile, routine scheduled maintenance actions, such as filter replacement and adjustments, shall not be required at intervals of less than 6,000 miles, except for routine daily service performed during the fueling operations. Oil/filter change intervals may be extended, as indicated from a regular oil analysis program undertaken in cooperation with the engine manufacturer. Higher levels of scheduled maintenance tasks shall occur at even multiples of mileage for lower level tasks.

2.1.9.5.3 Mean Mileage Between Failures: The following are design goals for mean mileage between failures by failure class, provided that all specified preventive maintenance procedures are followed.

A) Class 1: Physical Safety: Mean mileage shall be greater than one million

(1,000,000) miles.


b) Class 2: Road Call: Mean mileage shall be greater than twenty thousand (20,000) miles.

c) Class 3: Vehicle Change: Mean mileage shall be greater than sixteen thousand (16,000) miles.

d) Class 4: Bad Order. Mean mileage shall be greater than ten thousand (10,000)

miles.

2.1.9.5.4 Mean Time to Repair: Repair time and skill levels required for various repairs to vehicle components shall not exceed mean time or skill levels typically required by the AUTHORITY to repair 40-foot transit vehicles manufactured prior to 2007. 2.1.9.5.5 Accessibility: All systems or components serviced as part of periodic maintenance or whose failure may result in Class 1 or Class 2 failures shall be readily accessible for service and inspection. To the extent practical, removal or physical movement of components unrelated to the specific maintenance and/or repair tasks involved shall be unnecessary. Relative accessibility of components, measured in time required to gain access, shall be inversely proportional to frequency of maintenance and repair of the components. 2.1.9.5.6 Interchangeability: Components with identical function shall be interchangeable to the extent practical. These components shall include passenger window hardware, interior trim, lamps, lamp lenses, and seat assemblies. Components with non-identical functions shall not be, or appear to be, interchangeable.

2.1.9.6 Operating Environment: The vehicle shall be capable of being operated at the specified performance levels, and stored and maintained without impairment resulting from the natural or induced environmental conditions within which the AUTHORITY intends to operate the vehicle in service. The following climatic factors shall be used as design guidelines and shall be considered as operational requirements.

a) Temperature and Solar Load: Ambient air temperature: Minimum................................................................................................... -20F Maximum ................................................................................................. 120F Humidity: Minimum....................................................................................................... 5% Maximum .................................................................................................. 100% b) Precipitation:


Maximum rainfall rate ........................................................... 4 inches per hour Maximum snowfall rate ......................................................... 5 inches per hour Maximum snow accumulation ............................................................ 18 inches c) Wind: Maximum sustained speed ..................................................................... 40 mph Maximum gust speed ............................................................................. 70 mph d) Air contamination: The vehicle shall operate as specified under air contamination

levels which occur in the coastal environment that exists in the AUTHORITY’s service area.

e) Road contamination: The vehicle shall operate as specified under the dust, trash, and

leaf accumulation conditions experienced in the AUTHORITY’s service area. Salt and other chemicals are frequently applied to streets during adverse winter weather conditions.

The vehicle shall achieve normal operation in temperature ranges of -20F to 115F, at relative humidity between 5 percent and 100 percent. Degradation of performance due to atmospheric conditions shall be minimized at temperatures below -20F or above 115F. If special equipment or procedures must be employed to start the vehicle when exposed to extreme weather conditions, the Bidder must incorporate the parameters and recommended procedures in Attachment 1. Speed, gradeability, and acceleration performance requirements shall be based upon SAE J1995 conditions of 77F air inlet temperature, 29.31 Hg dry barometer. Performance degradation at conditions other than the test standard shall not exceed one percent for each 3F and four percent for each 1,000 feet of altitude above the standard. The interior climate control system shall perform in accordance with Section 2.3.8.

Actual localized temperatures and conditions within and under the vehicle body may be more severe than those listed. The Contractor shall be responsible for evaluating and advising the AUTHORITY if there are any special environmental factors to which its equipment may be sensitive, and that are not listed in this section.

2.1.10 VIBRATION: The Contractor shall design components electrical, mechanical, and other connections to operate without degradation during and after exposure to vibration as encountered in normal service. Mechanical components shall be mounted to minimize transfer of vibrations to passengers. 2.1.11 RIDE QUALITY: The vehicle shall be free from objectionable vibration and shock. All equipment mounted in the passenger area shall be free from resonance to avoid annoying audible and visual distraction. The ride quality of the vehicle shall equal or exceed that of the latest model year AUTHORITY-owned Emission Controlled Diesel Vehicle.


On poor quality road surfaces, the ride quality shall not contain excessive instability or bottoming when the vehicle is driven at prudent speed. The Contractor shall submit evidence, such as analysis and comparative tests, establishing that the design used produces a ride quality comparable to the best state of the art vehicles. Ride quality shall conform to these guidelines with the load ranging from curb weight to GVWR.

2.1.12 MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS

2.1.12.1 Guards: Piping, pumps, wiring, control rods, and equipment located within the vehicle shall be adequately protected against damage or interference by, or hazard to, passengers or the operator. Inclusive of this requirement shall be fluids and other related materials. When a shield or guard is placed around a unit requiring inspection and/or lubrication, the shield shall be so secured as to provide for easy access to the unit. All electronic and electrical systems shall function properly without degradation from electromagnetic sources and without degrading the electromagnetic environment. All electronic and electrical systems shall not be susceptible to temporary or permanent malfunctions subject to electromagnetic sources, either transient or steady state in nature. Electromagnetic interference arising from sources such as transmitters or other equipment located either on-board or adjacent to the vehicle or from component parts of the vehicles ignition or electrical power supply system shall not degrade the operating life expectancy of the on-board electronic equipment. 2.1.12.2 Materials: Upon request of the AUTHORITY the Contractor shall submit samples of materials for examination, tests, and concurrence. All samples requested in this Specification, to be sent to the AUTHORITY, shall be delivered F.O.B. destination as designated by the AUTHORITY. All parts shall be new and in no case will used, reconditioned, obsolete or discontinued parts be used. Repairs or corrective actions to parts and components supplied under this Technical Specification shall be agreed upon in advance by the AUTHORITY. Any one part or unit used in the construction of these vehicles shall be an exact duplicate in manufacture, design and construction of each of the base order vehicles. Optional vehicles may incorporate product improvements and upgrades with AUTHORITY approval. Fiber reinforced components shall not have sections that are fiber or matrix rich, or fiber or matrix poor. Plastic components shall not have resin rich, or resin poor sections. All fiber and matrix materials used in the vehicles shall require prior approval by the AUTHORITY at the pre-production meeting.


2.1.12.3 General Conditions: All piping, pumps, tubing, cables, and wiring shall be properly bracketed. All pass through holes for piping, tubing, cables, and wires shall be free of sharp and rough edges, protected by grommets, solid sleeve P-clamps or other by other means to prevent damage over the life of the vehicles. To the maximum extent possible all piping, tubing and cables located underneath the vehicle shall have provisions to protect the systems from road debris, salt and sand via a protective plate or other suitable means. Final approval of the protective provisions will be provided by the AUTHORITY during the First Article Inspection. All mounting of assemblies and subassemblies including the power plant and accessories shall be mechanically isolated to minimize the transmission of vibration of the body structure. If the engine cradle assembly is directly mounted to the vehicle structure, the engine and transmission assembly shall be shock mounted to the engine cradle assembly. All pipe fittings shall be of heavy-duty type and shall be designed to withstand the maximum pressure that could be generated under normal or overload conditions, within the air or fluid system of which they are a component. All coolant and water lines routed through the interior of the vehicle will be done in a method that prevents leaks into the interior of the vehicle. Provisions shall be made to retain all fluid leaks, which have the potential of entering the passenger and driver’s area of the vehicle in a manner as approved by the AUTHORITY. All burrs and sharp edges shall be dressed so as to prevent injury to passengers, operators, and maintenance personnel.

All clevises shall be removable and not welded to the rods.

All painted aluminum sheets shall be thoroughly cleaned and coated on the outside with zinc-chromate protective paint, or approved equal, prior to installation on the vehicle. All aluminum surfaces not otherwise protected and installed in areas subject to corrosion shall be anodized. Anodizing specifications shall require concurrence of the AUTHORITY. Wood of any type shall not be used except where specified herein and approved by the AUTHORITY. The structure shall be assembled by bolting, riveting, welding, or adhesive bonding. All welding connections shall conform to AWS standards for quality and fitness for purpose. Welding procedures, welding materials, and qualifications of welding operators and inspectors shall be in accordance with AWS and ASTM standards. Appropriate European on (or) other international standards may be used if the Contractor demonstrates the equivalence of these standards to the AUTHORITY. Welds shall have a finished appearance where visible. For all welded connections, the contact surfaces shall be free of scale, grease, and paint. The Contractor shall supply design prints of all critical areas and joints of the structure to the AUTHORITY at the pre-production meeting, for production inspection purposes.


All surfaces to which springs are attached shall be of such a pattern as to prevent excessive grooving or wear of the parts. All joints shall be protected by application of zinc-chromate metallic compound, butyl tape sealer, or approved equal, at assembly. All bolts, nuts, washers and exposed linkage shall be zinc- or cadmium-plated carbon steel, or stainless steel. Zinc plating shall conform to the latest revision of ASTM-B-633, Type II, SC3 or SC4. Cadmium plating shall conform to the latest revision of Federal Specification QQ-P-416b, Class 2 or 3, Type II. All bolted connections shall be designed to a minimum strength value of SAE Grade 5 or metric equivalent nuts and bolts using a minimum design margin of 1.5 based on proof load of the bolt. Bolts and nuts shall be SAE Grade 5 or better and marked according to SAE Standards J429 and J995 or metric equivalent. Any deviations from this standard will require AUTHORITY approval during Design Review. Bolt projections through nuts shall exceed 1-½ threads and shall not exceed thickness of a standard nut. Should there be a reason for excessive bolt projection, the bolts shall be double nutted. All sheet metal screws shall comply with ASTM and SAE recommendations relative to quality and installation. Phillips headed fasteners, self tapping and sheet metal screws, blind rivets and rivnut-type fasteners shall not be used without prior approval of the AUTHORITY for each specific application. Specific manufacturer's recommendations as to the adjustment and settings of components shall be provided to the AUTHORITY before delivery of the first vehicle. Items such as air spring heights, voltage regulator, governors, engine tune-up data and any other pertinent data shall be furnished to allow time to prepare service and inspection forms for initial vehicle inspection. All air, oil, and water lines and openings into equipment units shall, during the building process, be sealed, plugged, or adequately protected against entrance of contaminants until connected. Mounting of major assemblies including engine, transmission, axles, power steering and suspension components shall be such that dismounting shall be easily carried out by conventional shop methods. Drainage shall be provided in all body structure members. Enclosed structural cavities shall be vented to prevent condensation build up. Any enclosed structural cavities of steel members shall be treated with a rust-inhibiting coating.


2.1.12.4 Lubrication: A lubrication list will be provided to the AUTHORITY indicating the Contractor's standard lubricants. If any lubricants used on the vehicle are not compatible with AUTHORITY lubricants, the Contractor shall be notified of any deviation, and such lubricants shall require the concurrence of the AUTHORITY prior to fabrication of the first vehicle. All lubrication fittings shall be masked in order to keep then free from paint and undercoating. All lubricant sumps shall be fitted with magnetic-type, drain plugs of a standard inch-size. Fittings shall be located to be conveniently reached from a pit and/or hoist. All grease fittings shall be of the threaded type without using special adapters. 2.1.12.5 Manuals and Records: (Amended) Any time the term “Maintenance Manuals” is used in this specification, it is intended that it shall include detailed instructions for servicing and maintaining the vehicle, electrical prints, pneumatic diagrams and hydraulic diagrams. All manuals shall be provided in both the electronic and hard copy formats. All manuals are assumed to apply to both the electronic and hard copy formats. The AUTHORITY requires both maintenance and parts manuals, including all text and images, to be available in an electronic media consistent with industry standards. The AUTHORITY’s preferred format is PDF for deployment over its Windows NT-based Intranet. Appropriate navigation and frame structures shall be provided within these documents. It is encouraged that electronic linkages exist with the vendor to enhance customer support opportunities, including e-mail. Draft design of this electronic documentation will be submitted within sixty (60) days of contract award by either CD-ROM or available via a secure download. Two (2) draft copies of component vendor manuals and records shall be furnished with the delivery of the Pilot Vehicle. A copy of the manuals for similar vehicles and equipment with notation to reflect required changes for the AUTHORITY vehicles are acceptable for this submittal.

Concurrent with the delivery of the first serial production vehicle, the Contractor shall furnish to the AUTHORITY three (3) copies of interim manuals (model specific content) for all applicable “Special Listings”, “Maintenance Manuals” and “Parts Manuals” for the vehicles furnished under the Specification. This shall include electrical prints, pneumatic diagrams and hydraulic diagrams. After the delivery of the last production vehicle, the Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of all final Manuals complete with all applicable revisions included and inserted.

Manuals may be submitted in Adobe PDF or approved equal format on a recordable CD-ROM. This PDF document shall allow footnotes, updates, comments or clarifications to be made and saved to this same CD-ROM. Electronic files, regardless of format shall allow updates or changes at a later date by the AUTHORITY. Three (3) copies of these electronic files on separate recordable CD-ROM disks shall be provided to the AUTHORITY prior to or within ten (10) days of acceptance of the second vehicle.


Twenty eight (28) copies of the vehicle operating manual shall be provided within fourteen (14) days before delivery of the sixth production vehicle. The Vehicle History Book shall be completed and submitted with the delivery of each vehicle. 2.1.12.6 Window Drawings: (Amended) Three (3) sets of drawings showing all window, and door glass, as installed in the vehicles furnished under this Specification, shall be furnished to the AUTHORITY prior to or within ninety (90) days after NTP. The drawings shall show all replacement part numbers and an illustration within the parts manual. 2.1.12.7 Generic Specifications: The Contractor shall supply, in hard copy and in electronic format, with delivery of the Pilot vehicle, generic specifications for purchased items used in the manufacture of the vehicles supplied by this procurement. These specifications will facilitate maximum sources for replacement parts equal to the original equipment manufacturer. Each item must be identified by an (OEM) part number, supplier's part and/or model number and generic specifications. These specifications shall include information such as: performance, dimensions, capacities, material composition, finish, tolerances, viscosity, hardness, circuit diagrams, and other descriptions necessary to obtain replacement items equal to those used in manufacture. Specifications shall be provided for the following:

- All fluids/lubricants - Wheels - All filters - Shock absorbers - Brake linings - Electric motors - Brake drums - Motor brushes - Brake slack adjusters - Hoses/fittings - Brake chambers - Logic boxes - Brake chamber diaphragm - Batteries - Replacement body panels/doors - Radiator - Passenger doors - Glazing - Heater/defroster cores - Cleaning products - Bumpers - Suspension bushings - Lamps - Steering pins and bushings - Signage - Fuel System - HVAC System

2.1.12.8 Access to Documents: The Contractor shall agree that any and all training aids, drawings, shop drawings, plans, specifications, sketches, and any and all graphic depictions produced by the Contractor during the performance of this contract and pertaining to the construction, appearance, building methods and operation of the subject vehicles shall be made available to the AUTHORITY, and can be used to secure the manufacture or replacement of any assembly or component for its use in maintaining vehicles without any payment of royalties by the AUTHORITY. Such documents shall be in hard copy and in electronic format that can be


modified at a later date by the AUTHORITY. Confidential Design Document only may be provided in “Read Only Electronic Format” and those only after presentation to and concurrence by the AUTHORITY that such documents are Confidential Design Documents. 2.1.12.9 Training and Technical Support: (Amended) Vehicle related training for AUTHORITY personnel shall consist of five phases:

a) Vehicle operation, which includes detecting and resolving in-service problems and

emergencies that result in minimal delays. b) Maintenance of components or assemblies—which includes inspections, lubrication,

adjustments, repairs, and replacements normally performed at the Maintenance Shop. c) Familiarization with renewal parts. d) Facility support and OEM Liaison.

The AUTHORITY shall be responsible for providing classroom facilities and space for training aids. The AUTHORITY shall approve in advance the course content for each training program. Six months after the NTP, the Contractor shall furnish the AUTHORITY with an outline of the training program for evaluation. The outline shall include the number of classroom and field instruction hours that the Contractor recommends for each system on the vehicle; the qualifications of the instructors; a list of training aids to be used and furnished; and a brief description of the scope of instruction to be covered. The Contractor and appropriate suppliers shall train AUTHORITY personnel on actual equipment whenever possible. The Contractor or suppliers shall be responsible for replacing any parts damaged as a direct result of training activities by the vendor trainer.

As part of the maintenance-training program, one (1) complete set of all special tools and test equipment necessary to service and maintain each vehicle system shall be provided at the time of delivery of the first production vehicle. Special tools are defined as those not readily available from Sears or Snap-On. Examples of standard tools are combination wrenches, screws drivers, hammers or tools would normally be found in a mechanic tool box. Example of special tools are temperature adapter, tachometer readers, valve driver, pressure probe, diagnostic software and laptops, tools to work on low floor type axles, etc… Instructions and/or training on how to use these special tools and equipment shall be provided at the same time. At the completion of the training program the special tools, test equipment, and training aids shall be turned over to the AUTHORITY in proper working order. The contractor shall assume that the AUTHORITY has no special tools for vehicle maintenance.

2.1.12.9.1 Operator Training: (Amended) Operator training shall be based on the Operating Manual. To ensure the safety of maintenance personnel, operating personnel, and passengers, the Contractor shall supply


two sets of DVD’s one month after the delivery of the first production vehicle. The tapes shall cover the following topics:

a) Service preparation b) Normal operating procedures c) Emergency operating procedures d) Moving a vehicle with a problem (fault).

Prior to the first production vehicle going into service, the Contractor shall instruct an AUTHORITY selected group of representatives for a training session. The training shall take place at the AUTHORITY Facility and, as required, on-board fully operational vehicles. The AUTHORITY will provide the agenda at least 1 week prior to the training. A possible second training follow-up session shall be held at the discretion of the AUTHORITY. The follow-up shall take place one month after the first six vehicles have been accepted for service. The AUTHORITY will provide the agenda at least 1 week prior to the training. 2.1.12.9.2 Maintenance Training: (Amended) The Contractor shall provide sufficient training for the AUTHORITY’s personnel to permit satisfactory servicing and maintenance of the vehicles at the AUTHORITY’s garages. The training shall include classroom and “hands-on” instruction. The “hands-on” instruction shall be given on an operational vehicle or on functioning mockup training aids, if possible, and includes an introduction to faults, troubleshooting and subsequent repair. Classroom instruction shall include not only the anatomy and functionality of the parts, but also the essentials of routine care, including lubrication schedules, adjustments, limits, test frequency, inspection frequency, troubleshooting, removal and replacement. At the conclusion of the classroom instructions, the Contractor shall furnish to the AUTHORITY a complete set of lesson plans and training aids including, but not limited to, classroom notes, films, photographs, displays, slides, and tapes used in presenting the courses. The Contractor shall assume that AUTHORITY personnel have no knowledge of the features of the vehicles. The course of instruction should include systems integration familiarization and be given in two parts. The first part shall occur two months prior to the delivery of the first production vehicle and shall cover basic instruction, including fundamentals and general familiarization with the vehicles and vehicle components. The second part of the instruction shall begin approximately one month after the delivery of the first production vehicle. A final schedule for maintenance training shall be submitted to the AUTHORITY for approval six months before scheduled delivery of the first production vehicle. Maintenance training shall include in-depth instruction covering as a


minimum the maintenance activities normally performed at a garage on the following systems:

- Power module - Door Systems - Vehicle electrical system - Mobility aid ramp - Vehicle air system - Articulated Hinge - Engine and DPF systems - Transmission & Retarder - Destination Signage - Radio - Multiplex System - Towing and Recovering - Public Announcement system (PA) - Fuel System - Operator Controls - Safety Procedures - Fire Suppression System - Fuel Alley Procedures - Rear axle assembly, including - CNG Systems suspension and brakes - - Front axle assembly, including suspension and brakes - HVAC system, including auxiliary heater and any floor level heating units and any EPA certifications required for handling refrigerants

The Contractor shall furnish copies to the students of training manuals for each subject. In lieu of special training manuals, the Contractor may utilize the Running Repair and Service Manual, the Schedule Repair and Overhaul Manual and/or applicable Vendor Manuals for instructional purposes. In the event the Contractor utilizes such manuals, they will be in addition to the quantity specified in Section 2.1.12.5.

The times and duration of the instruction periods, and the quantity of personnel available to attend class, shall be at the discretion of the AUTHORITY. The AUTHORITY will attempt to make available as many technicians for 8 hours per normal working day without impacting service. 2.1.12.9.3 Renewal Parts Manual Seminar: The Contractor shall provide a Renewal Parts Manual Seminar to familiarize material management personnel with the vehicle components. The seminar shall be for one class not to exceed 10 people held during daylight hours at a location to be designated by the AUTHORITY. The course shall not exceed 20 hours but be no less than 6, and shall include both classroom and field instruction. The seminar shall be conducted within one month of delivery of the first production vehicle.


2.2.0 BODY 2.2.1 SHELL

2.2.1.1 General Requirements:

2.2.1.1.1 Design: The vehicle shall have a clean, smooth, simple design, primarily derived from vehicle performance requirements and passenger service criteria established by Section 2: Technical Specification. The exterior and body features, including grilles and louvers, shall be shaped to allow complete and easy cleaning by automatic vehicle washers without snagging washer brushes. Water and dirt shall not be retained in or on any body feature to freeze or bleed out onto the vehicle after leaving the washer. Body and windows shall be sealed to prevent the entrance of air, dust, or water, under normal operating conditions, as well as, during cleaning by the automatic vehicle washers for the service life of the vehicle. Accumulation on any window of the vehicle of spray and splash generated by the vehicles wheels on a wet road shall be minimized.

2.2.1.1.2 Materials: Body materials shall be selected and the body fabricated to reduce maintenance, extend durability, and provide consistency of appearance throughout the life of the vehicle. Detailing shall be kept simple; add-on devices and trim shall be minimized and where necessary, integrated into the basic design. 2.2.1.1.3 Finish & Color: (Amended) All exterior surfaces shall be smooth and free of visible fasteners, wrinkles, and dents. Areas where external fasteners may be required must be submitted to the AUTHORITY for approval in advance of the Pilot Vehicle. Exterior surfaces to be painted shall be properly cleaned and primed as appropriate for the paint used, prior to application of paint to assure a proper bond between the basic surface and successive coats of original paint for the service life of the vehicle. Paint and anti-graffiti clear coat shall be applied using approved Dupont Blue Imron Elite BS420EW, and White Imron Elite P9360EW, Single stage low VOC paint, with a minimum gloss of 95 as measured in ASTM E97-92. Proper adhesion between the basic surface and successive coats of the original paint shall be measured using a Cross Hatch Adhesion Test as outlined in ASTM D3359B. Adhesion testing must be completed on every 10th vehicle. All paint shall be applied smoothly and evenly with the finished surface free of dirt, runs, orange peel, and other imperfections. All exterior finished surfaces shall be impervious to diesel fuel, gasoline, natural gas and commercial cleaning agents. Finished surfaces shall not be damaged by controlled applications of commonly used graffiti-removing chemicals. The Contractor shall prepare a paint coating and application document containing procedures for surface cleaning and preparation, priming, surfacing, and painting for the vehicle body and all equipment that is painted or powder coated. A detailed paint


schedule showing the equipment painted, paint type and manufacturers, recommended thickness, and other pertinent information shall also be included. This document shall be submitted for review at the pre-production meeting and shall be part of the maintenance manuals. Any equipment or parts of equipment which would be damaged or suffer impaired operation from painting shall not be painted and shall be corrosion-resistant. Excluding original manufacturer painting the following items shall not be painted:

a) Wire and cable b) Heat transfer surfaces c) Electrical insulators d) Elastomeric portions of air and refrigerant lines e) Grounding pads f) Elastomeric parts g) Grease fittings h) Linkages i) Threaded parts used for adjustments j) Electrical equipment k) Wearing surfaces

A two tone paint application of white and blue shall be applied as per 2.2.1.1.3 Finish and Color with a graphics airplane approved design on both sides of bus. 2.2.1.1.4 Numbering & Signing: (Amended) Monograms, numbers and other special signing shall be similar to that used on AUTHORITY's vehicle fleet and shall be applied to the inside and outside of the vehicle. Unless otherwise specified or approved by the AUTHORITY, all interior lettering, numbering, labeling, etc. shall be clearly printed, where applicable, on 0.080-inch anodized aluminum plate by the following process:

a) Photo–etching and epoxy paint.

The plates or decals shall be mechanically fastened or applied in a manner approved by the AUTHORITY. All text shall be Helvetica medium. Graphics shall be provided as follows:

a) Vehicle numbers shall be applied in areas to be approved and in a sequence to be

selected by the AUTHORITY. b) A logo type design shall be applied to the vehicle exterior in areas to be selected

by the AUTHORITY. Logo design shall be furnished by the AUTHORITY. c) A VALE and CNG (If Option used) decal shall be applied to the vehicle exterior.


d) Plate size and wording on the Contractor’s name plate shall be approved by the AUTHORITY.

e) Additional AUTHORITY-approved graphics shall be provided for passenger and

safety information. f) At least one sign shall be provided on each side of the vehicle interior to indicate

that seats at the front are priority seats for elderly and persons with disabilities.

All signage shall comply with ADA reference 49 CFR Part 38. All signage issues including samples of all interior plates and decals shall be presented during the design review process and the AUTHORITY shall have final approval on all aspects of numbering and signing. 2.2.1.1.5 Pedestrian Safety: Exterior protrusions greater than 1/2 inch and within 80 inches of the ground shall have a radius no less than the amount of the protrusion. The curbside and street side rearview mirror(s) and required lights and reflectors are exempt from the protrusion requirement. Grilles, doors, bumpers, and other features on the sides and rear of the vehicle shall be designed to minimize the ability of unauthorized riders to secure toeholds or handholds. 2.2.1.1.6 Passenger Windows: A minimum of 10,000 square inches of window area, including drivers, and door windows shall be required on each side of the 40-foot vehicle. Specific requirements for side windows are in Section 2.2.4.2. 2.2.1.1.7 Passenger Doors: Two doors shall be provided on the curbside of the vehicle equipped with stanchions, actuators, lighting, emergency overrides and other equipment necessary to allow safe and efficient passenger ingress and egress. The rear doors will be interlocked as specified in Section 2.2.2.1.2. All doors shall be ADA compliant. Specific requirements for doors are in Section 2.2.2.1.

2.2.1.2 Structure:

2.2.1.2.1 Altoona Testing: Prior to acceptance of the first production vehicle, the structure of the vehicle shall have undergone appropriate structural testing and/or analysis, including FTA required Altoona testing, to ensure adequacy of design for the urban transit service. Any items that required repeated repairs or replacement shall undergo corrective action with supporting test and analysis. A report clearly describing and explaining the failures and corrective actions taken to ensure any and all such failures will not occur shall be submitted to the AUTHORITY.


2.2.1.2.2 Strength & Fatigue: (Amended) The structure of the vehicle shall withstand the transit service conditions found in the Boston service area throughout its service life and shall operate with applied scheduled maintenance, in accordance with the procedures specified in the service manual, for a minimum of 12-years. Under normal conditions of transit service the structure shall withstand fatigue damage that is sufficient to cause Class 1 or Class 2 failure. The structure shall also withstand impact and inertial loads due to normal street travel throughout the vehicles service life without permanent deformation or damage. 2.2.1.2.3 Distortion: The vehicle, at GVWR and under static conditions, shall not exhibit deformation or deflection that impairs operation of doors, windows, or other mechanical elements. Static conditions include the vehicle at rest with any one wheel or dual set of wheels on a 6-inch curb or in a 6-inch-deep hole. 2.2.1.2.4 Resonance: All structure-, body-, and panel-bending mode frequencies, including vertical, lateral, and torsional modes, shall be sufficiently removed from all primary excitation frequencies to minimize audible, visible, or sensible resonant vibrations during normal service. 2.2.1.2.5 Material: (Amended) The vehicle body shall be constructed using only high strength materials and fasteners. The structure and any applied panels shall require corrosion preventative coating or after treatment during construction and last throughout the service life of the vehicle. Detailing shall be kept simple; add-on devices and trim, where necessary shall be minimized and integrated into the basic design. 2.2.1.2.6 Corrosion: The vehicle shall resist corrosion from atmospheric conditions and road salts. The vehicle understructure and exterior shall maintain structural integrity and nearly maintain original appearance throughout its service life, provided it is maintained by the AUTHORITY in accordance with the procedures specified in the service manual. Metallic materials exposed to the elements and all joints and connections of dissimilar metals shall be corrosion-resistant and shall be protected from galvanic corrosion. Representative samples shall withstand a two-week salt spray test in accordance with ASTM Procedure B-117 with no visual or structural detrimental effects to normally visible surfaces, and nor significant structural degradation or weight loss of over one percent for other members or components. All exposed surfaces under the finished vehicle shall be generously sprayed with non-flammable resin type undercoating. 2.2.1.2.7 Towing Requirements: (Amended) Permanent, vehicle mounted, provisions shall be made for the AUTHORITY to recover the vehicle by lift towing at the front using the AUTHORITY’s stinger equipped recovery vehicle with standard lift tow attachments. The AUTHORITY’s standard towing attachments are designed to pin to lift tow eyes at the front of the vehicle. Theses


standard AUTHORITY attachments will be available for review by the contractor at the first project meeting. The vehicle mounted towing eyes shall withstand, without permanent deformation, tension loads up to 1.2 times the curb weight of the vehicle within 20 of the longitudinal axis of the vehicle. The suspension system/axles shall not require special handling while the vehicle body is lifted for towing or while being towed. The rear towing device(s) shall not provide a toehold for unauthorized riders. Provisions shall be made at the front of the vehicle to allow attachment of a rigid tow bar that shall permit flat towing of the vehicle, at curb weight. Each towing device shall accommodate a tow hook with a one-inch throat. The towing devices, and tow bar design shall require specific approval of the AUTHORITY. The details of vehicle recovery and towing shall be discussed at the first Project Meeting. Provisions shall be made to connect air from the towing vehicle to the service brake application valve. These connections shall be in a readily accessible location in the front and rear of the vehicle, and be identified by blue color coded glad hand connections. Provisions shall also be made to connect air from the towing vehicle to the wet tank and to the parking brake relay valve. These connections shall be in a readily accessible location in the front and rear of the vehicle, and be identified by red color coded glad hand connections. An electrical receptacle connected to the vehicle exterior lighting system for towing purposes shall be provided near the front and the rear glad hands using an AUTHORITY approved connector. 2.2.1.2.8 Jacking: It shall be possible to safely jack up the vehicle, at curb weight, with a common 10-ton bottle or floor jack with or without special adapter, when a tire or dual set is completely flat and the vehicle is on a level, hard surface, without crawling under any portion of the vehicle. Jacking from a single point shall permit raising the vehicle sufficiently high to remove and reinstall a wheel and tire assembly. Jacking pads located on the axle or suspension near the wheels shall permit easy and safe jacking with the flat tire or dual set on a 6-inch high run-up block not wider than a single tire. Jacking and changing any one tire shall be completed by a 2M mechanic helper in less than 30 minutes from the time the vehicle is approached. The vehicle shall withstand such jacking at any one or any combination of wheel locations without permanent deformation or damage. Jacking pads shall be painted safety yellow for ease of identification. 2.2.1.2.9 Hoisting: The Contractor shall provide in Attachment No. 1 with the bid submission, a detailed description of recommended hoisting procedures. The Contractor’s procedures should include but not be limited to hoisting under the following conditions:


a) Routine daily maintenance to include inspection, fluid and tire changes, brake adjustment and replacement;

b) Suspension system maintenance and replacement; c) Transmission, engine or power plant cradle removal; d) Replacement of the rear or front axle assemblies.

The Contractor shall assist the AUTHORITY with modification of existing hoists and procurement of new hoists that will safely and efficiently accommodate these vehicles. 2.2.1.2.10 Fire Protection: The passenger and engine compartments shall be separated by a bulkhead(s) which shall, by incorporation of fireproof materials in its construction, be a firewall. The engine compartment shall include areas where the engine and exhaust systems are housed including the muffler, if mounted above the horizontal shelf. This firewall shall preclude or retard propagation of an engine compartment fire into the passenger compartment and shall be in accordance with the Recommended Fire Safety Practices defined in FTA Docket 90, dated October 20, 1993. Only necessary openings shall be allowed in the firewall, and these shall be fireproofed. Any passageways for the climate control system air shall be separated from the engine compartment by fireproof material. Piping through the bulkhead shall have copper, brass, or fireproof fittings sealed at the firewall with copper or steel piping on the engine side. Wiring may pass through the bulkhead only if connectors or other means are provided to prevent or retard fire propagation through the firewall. The conduit and bulkhead connectors shall be sealed with fireproof material at the firewall. Engine access panels in the firewall shall be fabricated of fireproof material sealed with heat resistant gaskets and secured with fireproof fasteners. These panels, their fasteners, and the firewall shall be constructed and reinforced to minimize warping of the panels during a fire that will compromise the integrity of the firewall. 2.2.1.2.11 Crashworthiness: (Amended) The vehicle body and roof structure shall withstand a static load equal to 150 percent of the curb weight evenly distributed on the roof with no more than a six-inch reduction in any interior dimension. Windows shall remain in place and shall not open under such a load. The vehicle shall withstand a 25-mph impact by a 4,000-pound, post-1973, American automobile at any point, excluding doorways, along either side of the vehicle with no more than three-inches of permanent structural deformation at seated passenger hip height. This impact shall not result in sharp edges or protrusions in the vehicle interior. Exterior panels and their supporting structural members shall withstand a static load of 2,000-pounds applied perpendicular to the vehicle anywhere below the passenger windows by a pad no larger than five inches square. This load shall not result in deformation that prevents installation of new exterior panels to restore the original appearance of the vehicle.


2.2.1.3 Exterior & Applied Panels: 2.2.1.3.1 Strength & Installation: Only exterior panels that are above the rub-rail may be structural components. Exterior surface panels shall not be installed or retained with visible rivets or fasteners. 2.2.1.3.2 Repair & Replacement: Exterior panels below the mid-level (old rub-rail location) shall be divided into sections that are repairable or replaceable by 4M mechanic in less than 30 minutes for a section up to five feet long (excludes painting). Exterior side panels above the mid-level (old rub-rail location) and below the lower daylight opening shall be repairable or replaceable by a 4M mechanic in less than 1-1/2 hours for a section up to five feet long (excludes painting). 2.2.1.3.3 Rain Gutters: Gutters shall be provided to prevent water flowing from the roof onto the side windows and passenger doors. When the vehicle is decelerated, the gutters shall not drain onto the windshield, or driver's side window, or into the door boarding area. Cross sections of the gutters shall be no less than 0.25 square inches. 2.2.1.3.4 License Plates: Corrosion resistant provisions shall be made to securely mount standard size U.S. license plates on a bracket which is mounted to the front and rear of the vehicle using all four holes in the license plates. These provisions shall flush mount or recess the license plates so that they can be cleaned by automatic vehicle washing equipment without being caught by the brushes. License plates shall be mounted on the street side or center of, the vehicle and shall not allow a toehold or handhold for unauthorized riders. 2.2.1.3.5 Rub-rails: Omitted, bus designed without rub rails.

2.2.1.4 Interior:

2.2.1.4.1 Headroom: Headroom above the aisle and at the centerline of the aisle seats shall be no less than 78 inches and may taper in the rear portion of the vehicle to no less than 74 inches at the forward edge of the rear bench seat. At the centerline of the perimeter seating, headroom shall be no less than 62 inches or no lower than the required top of the side window. Headroom at the back of the rear bench seat may be reduced to a minimum of 56 inches, but it shall increase to the normal ceiling height at the front of the seat cushion. At any area of the vehicle directly over the head of the seated passenger and positioned where the passenger entering or leaving the seat is prone to strike his head, padding shall be provided on the overhead paneling.


2.2.1.4.2 Driver Barrier: An opaque barrier or bulkhead between the operator and the street side front wheelhouse or passenger seat shall be provided. The electrical cabinet (Section 2.3.9.2) mounted on the street side front wheelhouse shall function as the driver barrier. The barrier shall minimize glare and reflections in the windshield directly in front of the barrier from the interior lighting during night operation. The barrier shall extend from the floor or wheel housing to the ceiling and shall fit the vehicle side windows, wall, and ceiling panels to effectively close off the driver’s area and seal the area between the cabinet and the side window. The driver barrier shall be positioned to allow full adjustment of the driver's seat, which requires 45 inches from the heel point. The forward side of the driver barrier shall be painted in matte non-reflective finish.

A registration holder shall be securely fastened to the forward side of the driver's barrier and shall be visible from the vestibule area. The registration holder shall be fabricated from a clear plastic material that secures a 5-1/2 x 8-1/2-inch piece of paper. The registration document shall be inserted into the holder from the top with the bottom and both sides closed. A sturdy coat hook shall be located in the street side rear corner of the driver's area. Design of the driver’s barrier and driver’s locker and location of the coat hook is subject to AUTHORITY approval during the pre-production design review. 2.2.1.4.3 Modesty Panels: Sturdy divider panels constructed of durable, corrosion-resistant material complementing the interior trim shall be provided at both sides of the rear doors and forward of the forward most seats in the high floor area of the vehicle. A street side modesty panel may not be needed in the low floor area if luggage racks are installed. Modesty panels are not to be installed at the sides of longitudinal seats when the required armrests are integral. Modesty panels shall extend no higher than the lower daylight opening of the side windows. Those panels forward of the seats shall extend to within 1-1/4 + 1/4 inches of the floor. The modesty panel and its mounting shall withstand normal kicking, pushing, and pulling loads of 200-pound passengers without permanent visible deformation. Modesty panels shall require approval of the AUTHORITY at the pre-production meeting. Modesty panels shall be constructed of materials that discourage graffiti or painted with an anti-graffiti paint or compound. 2.2.1.4.4 Rear Bulkhead: The rear bulkhead paneling shall be contoured to fit the ceiling, side walls, and seat backs so that any litter, such as a cigarette package or newspaper, will tend to fall to the floor or seating surface when the vehicle is on a level surface. Any air vents in this area shall be louvered to reduce airflow noise and to reduce the probability of trash or litter being thrown or drawn through the grille. The panel, or sections thereof, shall be easily and quickly removable to service components located on the rear bulkhead. Access for maintenance purposes shall be in accordance with section 2.2.1.9 of this specification.


2.2.1.4.5 Construction: Interior panels may be integral with, or applied to, the basic vehicle structure. They shall be decorated in accordance with the interior specified. Use of moldings and small pieces of trim shall be minimized, and all parts shall be functional. 2.2.1.4.6 Fastening: Interior panels shall be attached so that there are no exposed edges or rough surfaces. Panels and fasteners shall not be easily removable by passengers. Interior trim fasteners, where required, shall be rivets or tamper-proof fasteners requiring the same tool as all other fasteners inside the vehicle.

2.2.1.5 Floor:

2.2.1.5.1 Floor Design: (Amended) The floor may be inclined only along the longitudinal axis of the vehicle, and the incline shall be less than 3-1/2 of the horizontal except locally at the doors where 2 slope toward the door is allowed. All floor measurements shall be with the vehicle at the design running height and on a level surface and with the standard tires. 2.2.1.5.2 Strength: The floor deck may be integral with the basic structure or securely mounted on the structure to prevent chafing or horizontal movement. Corrosion resistant fasteners shall be used to retain the floor and all floor fasteners shall be serviceable from one side only. Tapping plates used for the floor fasteners shall be no less than the same thickness as a standard nut, and all floor fasteners shall be secured and protected from corrosion for the service life of the vehicle. The floor deck shall be reinforced as needed to support passenger loads. At GVWR, the floor shall have an elastic deflection of no more than 0.60 inches from the normal plane. The floor shall withstand the application of 2.5 times gross load weight without permanent detrimental deformation. 2.2.1.5.3 Edges: The floor shall be essentially a continuous flat plane, except at the rear steps, if applicable, and wheel housings. Where the floor meets the walls of the vehicle or heating ducts, the surface edges shall be blended with a circular section of radius not less than 1/4 inch and a molding or cove shall prevent debris accumulation between the floor and wheel housings. If floor level heating ducts are utilized, the top of the duct shall be blended with the wall with a molding or cove to prevent debris accumulation.

2.2.1.5.4 Floor Protection: (Amended) The floor, including flooring in the high floor area, as assembled, including the sealer, attachments, and covering, shall be waterproof, non-hygroscopic, resistant to wet and dry rot, resistant to mold growth, and impervious to insects. Flooring shall be Coosa Composite panel flooring. To the maximum extent possible floor panels shall be comprised of pieces as large as possible, and shall extend the full width of the vehicle with transverse, joints located only


over structural members. No transverse joints shall be used in the entrance and exit ways. All exposed edges of the floor panels, including openings for ducts and conduits, and joints between panels, shall be waterproofed and sealed prior to installation. Before applying the floor covering, all voids, fastener heads, and cracks between floor panels shall be filled with a fire retardant, two-part epoxy, leveling compound, and the floor sanded smooth and true within 1/16-inch in 3 feet in any direction. AUTHORITY shall approve the floor installation and sealing method at pre-production meetings.

2.2.1.6 Steps:

2.2.1.6.1 Boarding Step: (Amended) No steps shall be allowed for passenger ingress and egress from the vehicle. The flooring in each doorway shall be in a fixed location relative to the floor of the vehicle. At the front door, the step up from street level shall not exceed 15 ½ inches with the vehicle at the design height, and the step up from street level at the rear door shall not exceed 16 inches. 2.2.1.6.2 Interior Step Structure: A maximum of two steps, with not more than 10-inch risers of uniform height, may be provided in the aisle rearward of the rear passenger door leading to a high-floor area in the rear of the vehicle. Steps shall be the width of the aisle as determined by the seating in the immediate area of the steps. Step structure shall be corrosion-resistant throughout the life of the vehicle. Each step shall simultaneously support 300-pound loads evenly distributed over any 6-inch wide section of the tread without permanent deformation and with elastic deflection of no more than 0.125 inches. Each step tread shall support a load of 500 pounds evenly distributed over the center half of the tread without permanent deformation. The steps shall be sloped only sufficient to preclude water accumulation on the steps. All corners in the step-area shall have radii no less than 1/4 inch to facilitate cleaning. All step treads shall be of uniform depth, which shall be no less than 11 inches, and the plane of the step treads shall be parallel to the plane of the floor. Treads shall be covered with, nonskid, heavy duty composition material that shall remain effective in all weather conditions. Color of the tread covering shall match the vestibule flooring. The edge of the high floor shall have no overhang at the step riser. The edge of the high floor and the end of the step tread shall have a bright, contrasting yellow band no less than two inches wide on the full width of the step. The color shall be permanently blended into the tread covering material.

2.2.1.7 Wheel Housing:

2.2.1.7.1 Construction: (Amended) Wheel housings shall be constructed of stainless steel material and shall be no less than 14 gauge (0.0125-inch). The wheel housing shall be securely mounted and sealed to the vehicle body structure and they shall be isolated from dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic corrosion. The front wheel housings can be constructed of fiberglass and


installed the same way as the stainless steel type. Both types of wheel housings, as installed, shall withstand impacts of a tire tread dislodging or stone throw at 55 mph, which is simulated by impacts of a 2-inch steel ball with at least 200 foot-pounds of energy without penetration or visual deformation. Location and design of the construction of the wheel housing shall be submitted for AUTHORITY approval at the pre-production meeting. 2.2.1.7.2 Finish: Each of the front wheel housings interior shall be covered with a single FRP panel with a 25% gloss black gel coat finish. The FRP covers in all positions shall be securely mounted to the vehicle structure and shall have a minimum six inch high metal kick-plate designed to protect the cover from damage by kicking and baggage of boarding passengers while carrying the structural loads of the attached passenger assists and electrical locker without visual or sensual deformation. The rear wheel housings interior shall be covered with the same material as the vehicle flooring. Edges shall be trimmed with stainless steel or aluminum. 2.2.1.7.3 Clearance: Sufficient clearance and air circulation shall be provided around the tires, wheels, and brakes to preclude overheating when the vehicle is operating on the design operating profile. Tire chain clearance shall be provided on the outside driven wheels in accordance with SAE Information Report J683. Interface between the tires and any portion of the vehicle shall not be possible in maneuvers up to the limit of tire adhesion with weights from wet to GVWR. 2.2.1.7.4 Fender Skirts: Features to minimize water spray from the vehicle in wet conditions shall be included in wheel housing design. Any fender skirts shall be durable and easily replaceable. They shall be flexible if they extend beyond the allowable body width, and shall be installed without ripples and buckles. Wheels and tires shall be removable without disturbing the fender skirts. 2.2.1.7.5 Splash Aprons: Splash aprons, composed of 1/4-inch minimum composition or rubberized fabric, shall be installed behind each wheel and shall extend downward to within three inches of the road surface. Apron widths shall extend across the width of the vehicle. Splash aprons shall be bolted to the vehicle understructure. Splash aprons and their attachments shall be inherently weaker than the structure to which they are attached. Splash aprons and their attachments shall not be included in the road clearance measurements. Other splash aprons shall be installed where necessary to protect vehicle equipment. One static strap shall be installed and properly fastened to the body.

2.2.1.8 Passenger Doors: (Amended) All passenger door designs shall conform to the minimum clearance requirements of ADA 38.25C. They shall be of the Vapor Parallelogram Plug design or approved equal. The rear


doors shall be equipped with an electronic Vapor CLASS system door control protection system. Front, middle, and rear doors and door equipment shall be common to the maximum extent practicable.

2.2.1.8.1 Materials: Structure of the doors, their attachments, inside and outside trim panels, and any mechanism exposed to the elements shall be durable and constructed of inherently corrosion-resistant materials: stainless steel; aluminum; or FRP. The doors, when fully opened, shall provide a firm support and shall not be damaged if used as an assist by passengers during ingress or egress. 2.2.1.8.2 Dimensions: When open, both the front and rear doors shall leave an opening no less than 76 inches in height and the clear opening width measured inside the grab rails of the front door shall be no less than 32 inches. The middle and rear passenger doors shall be configured to the widest opening commercially offered to support passenger and baggage ingress / egress. Door design shall require review and concurrence of the AUTHORITY at the pre-production meeting. 2.2.1.8.3 Door Glazing: The upper section (1/2 door height) of both front and rear doors shall be glazed for no less than 45 percent of the respective door opening area of each section. The lower section of the front door shall be glazed for no less than 25 percent of the door opening area of the section. The edge of a 6-inch high curb shall be visible to the seated driver through the closed front door when the vehicle is more than 12 inches from the curb. Glazing material and tint shall be the same for both front and rear doors. 2.2.1.8.4 Door Projection: (Amended) Exterior projection of the doors shall be minimized and shall not exceed 13.87 inches during the opening or closing cycles. The doors shall not project inside the vehicle. The closing edge of each door panel shall have no less than two inches of soft weather stripping. The doors, when closed, shall be effectively sealed and the hard surfaces of the door shall be at least four inches apart.

2.2.1.8.5 Door Height Above Pavement: It shall be possible to open and close either passenger door when the vehicle loaded to GVWR is not kneeled and parked with the tires touching an 8-inch-high curb on a street sloping toward the curb so that the street side wheels are five inches higher than the curbside wheels.

2.2.1.9 Service Compartments & Access Doors: 2.2.1.9.1 Interior: Access for maintenance and replacement of equipment shall be provided by panels and doors that appear to be an integral part of the interior. Removal of fixtures or equipment unrelated to the repair task to gain access shall be minimized. Access doors shall be


hinged with positively retained props to hold the doors out of the mechanic's way. Access doors shall have top mounted hinges with positively retained props to ensure doors do not inhibit service personnel’s work. The retaining props shall be safety latched to prevent accidental door closure in the event of a prop failure. Retention of all interior access panels, except on the door actuator compartments, shall be with tamper-proof fasteners. Panel fasteners shall be standardized so that only one tool is required to service all fasteners within the vehicle, which shall be tamper-proof. Access doors for the door actuator compartments shall be secured with hand screws or latches, and shall prevent entry of mechanism lubricant into the vehicle interior. All fasteners that retain access panels shall be captive in the cover. Access openings in the floor shall be sealed to prevent entry of fumes and water into the vehicle interior. Flooring material shall be flush with the floor and shall be edge-bound with stainless steel to prevent the edges from coming loose. Access openings shall be nonsymmetrical so that the flooring shall be properly aligned after reinstallation. Fasteners shall tighten flush with the floor. All interior access doors and related fasteners are subject to approval at the pre-production meeting. 2.2.1.9.2 Exterior: (Amended) Conventional hinged doors shall be used for the engine compartment and for all auxiliary equipment compartments including doors for checking the quantity and adding to the engine coolant, engine lubricant, transmission fluid and the windshield washer reservoir. Exceptions must be submitted to the AUTHORITY for approval in advance of the Pilot Vehicle. Access openings shall be sized for easy performance of tasks within the compartment including tool, operating space. Access doors shall be of steel, aluminum, and or fiberglass construction and shall be capable of withstanding severe service throughout the life of the vehicle. They shall close flush with the body surface. All doors shall be hinged at the top or on the forward edge and shall be prevented from coming loose or opening during transit service or in vehicle washing operations. Doors with top hinges shall have safety props stored behind the door or on the doorframe. All access doors shall be retained in the open position by props or counterbalancing with over-center or gas-filled springs. The retaining props or springs shall be safety latched to prevent accidental door closure in the event of a prop or spring failure. Mechanical springs and hinges shall be corrosion-resistant and shall last for the service life of the vehicle. Latch handles shall be flush with, or recessed behind, the body’s contour and shall be sized to provide an adequate grip for opening. Large access doors shall hinge up and out of the way or fold, flat against the vehicle body and shall be easily opened by one person. These doors, when opened, shall not restrict access for servicing other components or systems. Major access doors shall be equipped with locks requiring a nominal 5/16-inch, square end tool to open. The locks shall be standardized so that only one tool is required to open all major access doors on the vehicle.

The battery compartment shall be designed to prevent the accumulation of snow, ice and debris on the top of the batteries and shall be vented and self-draining. It shall be accessible only from outside the vehicle and require no tool to attain access. No


components, other than the batteries and associated wiring shall be installed within the battery compartment. The battery compartment, support hardware and battery tray shall be constructed of a stainless steel of sufficient grade to preclude damage or corrosion from battery electrolyte. The inside surface of the battery compartment's access door shall be electrically insulated, as required to prevent the battery terminals shorting on the door if the door is damaged in an accident or if the battery comes loose. All batteries shall be locked down to the tray and the tray shall be mechanically secured to the vehicle frame and the battery tray will slide out for access as required. All wiring harness mounted inside of the compartment shall be routed so as not to touch the battery compartments floor or any other component outside the confines of the battery storage envelope, and shall not impede the sliding of the battery tray.

2.2.1.10 Roof: 2.2.1.10.1 Structure: All parts of the roof structure and skin, roof-mounted equipment, equipment covers, roof walkway, screens and other guards shall have sufficient strength to withstand, without permanent deformation, the loads imposed by a mechanical vehicle washer and or mechanic assuming concentrated loads of 300 pounds spaced 30 inches apart (assume a size 14 work boot). The roof shall be reinforced with supports integral to the roof structure to withstand the stresses imposed during normal operating and maintenance conditions. Any mechanical fasteners penetrating the roof skin shall be permanently leak proof. 2.2.1.10.2 Roof Openings: The roof shall be framed and reinforced around openings for air inlets and roof ventilators. Reinforcements on the roof shall be made watertight by welding or by a suitable sealing technique. The sealing technique shall be approved at the pre-production design review. 2.2.1.10.3 Anti-Skid Provisions: An approved Anti-skid surface treatment shall be provided around the escape hatches and installed in areas where access to roof-top equipment is required by service personnel. The Anti-skid surface shall enable passengers and service personnel to walk safely from the escape hatches to the front and rear of the vehicle and rooftop equipment without traversing an area in which Anti-Skid material has not been installed.

2.2.2 OPERATING COMPONENTS

2.2.2.1 Doors: 2.2.2.1.1 Controls: Operation of, and power to, the passenger doors shall be completely controlled by the driver. A five-position roller switch type door control handle shall be provided to allow operator to open/close all doors. The door control handle shall be normal to the operator’s straight ahead alignment and shall operate in accordance with the following:


a) Normal to vehicle axis All doors closed b) One notch forward Front door open c) Two notches forward All doors open d) One notch rearward Rear doors open e) Two notches rearward All doors open

Door control system, mounting, and location of door control handle requires the review and concurrence of the AUTHORITY at the pre-production meeting. Operation of the door control handle shall not require the operator to stretch or lean forward in the seat, and its operation shall be free from interference by other equipment. The setting of the control shall be easily determined by position and touch. A speed switch shall enable the rear door system at road speeds below 2 to 3 mph. Two speed sensors, one at each front wheel, or two other mutually independent measures of velocity, approved by the AUTHORITY, shall agree that the vehicle speed is below 3 mph to enable the speed switch that enables the rear doors. The system shall be fundamentally fail-safe in that loss of power or loss of signal from one wheel sensor shall disable the rear doors. An indicator light on the driver's diagnostic light panel shall illuminate when the rear doors are disabled by the speed switch. A rear door master switch, which is not within reach of the seated driver, shall, at OFF position, allow operation of the vehicle with the rear door locked and power to the rear door system disabled. When the rear door is disabled, the interlocks shall release and the driver’s door control shall be inoperative in the rear door open positions. The master switch shall be permanently labeled. Location and operation of the switch shall require concurrence of the AUTHORITY at the pre-production meeting.

The front door shall be equipped with a switch or valve, to allow manual manipulation of the front door by exhausting all air from the door motors to below the floor. This control shall be installed at a convenient location to the left of the operator and shall not be easily reached by passengers.

2.2.2.1.2 Interlocks: To preclude movement of the vehicle during passenger alighting, an accelerator interlock shall disable or lock the accelerator in the closed position and a brake interlock shall engage a portion of the rear axle service brake system. The interlocks shall be enabled when the rear doors are commanded to open or if the doors are not fully closed. The air pressure applied to the rear axle brakes when the interlock is applied shall be adjustable from outside the vehicle and shall require hand tools. 2.2.2.1.3 Closing Force: The rear doors shall be equipped with pneumatic sensitive edges to cycle doors completely open if an obstruction of one inch or more is caught between door edges. No more than a 10 pound force shall be imposed on a 1-square-inch area of any passenger struck by a closing rear door.


The sensitive edges shall be deactivated after the door has fully closed. A maximum force of 35 pounds shall be required for a passenger to free himself after having either the front or rear door close upon him, even if the sensitive edge or safety device on the rear door is inoperative. 2.2.2.1.4 Actuators and Warning Chime: Doors shall open or close completely in 1.5 to 3.0 seconds from the time of control actuation. Door actuators shall be adjustable so that the speed of door opening and closing can be independently adjusted from 1.5 second up to 3 seconds. Actuators and the door mechanism shall be concealed from passengers but shall be easily accessible for servicing. All elements of the door and actuator system shall operate without a Class 3 failure for 50,000 miles on the design operating profile. The door actuators shall be rebuild-able. Compressed air exhausted from the door system shall be routed under the floor level to the outside. A warning chime and dash light or approved equal shall sound/illuminate when the doors recycle from the sensitive edge obstruction detection system. The chime quality and volume shall be approved at the pre-production meeting. An over the door interior mounted green warning light, visible to passengers, shall be synchronized with the activation of the rear doors. 2.2.2.1.5 Emergency Operation: (Amended) Closed rear door shall be positively locked, requiring a force of more than 100 pounds to open manually. Parallelogram plug type rear doors are considered positively locked when vehicle air pressure is applied on the closing side of the door motor and the actuator is properly adjusted to the supplier's procedure. Required opening forces shall be essentially linear or increasing with distance the doors are ajar to open. Air pressure on the door motors may provide a secondary force holding the doors closed, but shall not be the primary lock. When the locked doors are manually forced open, damage shall be limited to the bending or breaking of door linkage with no resulting damage to the doors, motors, and mechanism. In the event of an emergency, it shall be possible to open the front, or rear doors manually from inside the vehicle using a force of no more than 25 pounds after actuating an unlocking device at each door. The unlocking devices shall be clearly marked as an emergency device and shall require two distinct actions for activation to occur. The door emergency unlocking devices shall be accessible from the door egress area and shall be protected by a clear breakaway plastic cover. The devices shall be encased in a compartment. A decal with operational instructions shall be provided at each emergency door unlocking device. The decal shall have red text stating “To Open Door Manually Break Cover and Turn Handle”. When the rear door emergency device is actuated the interlock system shall be activated.


2.2.2.1.6 Roof Ventilator and Escape Hatches: (Amend) A roof ventilator and emergency escape hatch shall be installed meeting egress requirements in the event of an emergency. The hatch shall be captive to the vehicle roof and reset-able by one person from inside the vehicle when opened or released. When opened with the vehicle in motion the hatch shall provide fresh air to the vehicle. The hatch shall be capable of being positioned as an air scoop with either the front or rear edge open no less than 4 inches, or with all edges raised to a height of 3-½ inches. The hatches must be of an approved type for venting trapped CNG gasses, if the CNG option is used. A decal giving operating instructions shall be affixed to the interior of the hatch and emergency instructions for opening from the exterior shall be affixed to the outside of the hatch. The hatch shall provide a clear open area for egress with a minimum opening of 425 square inches. 2.2.2.1.7 Manual Operator’s Vent: The vehicle shall be equipped with a manually operated, air vent located in the driver's area. The vent shall be opened and closed by a mechanical lever and shall not be operated by a cable mechanism.

2.2.2.2 Windshield Wipers & Washers: 2.2.2.2.1 Windshield Wipers: (Amended) The windshield wiper system shall conform to the applicable sections of SAE Specification J198. The vehicle shall be equipped with a variable speed electrically operated windshield wiper for each half of the windshield. The wiper shall be capable of clearing the street side and curbside windshield to ensure the operators field of view to the outside mirrors is not obstructed. The wipers shall have high and low operating speeds and intermittent wipe settings provided by a single control. No part of the windshield wiper mechanism shall be damaged by manual manipulation of the arms. At 60 mph, no more than ten percent of the wiped area shall be lost due to windshield wiper lift. Electric operated wipers can park towards the bottom of the windshield. Windshield wiper motors and mechanisms shall be easily accessible for repairs or service from inside or outside the vehicle and shall be removable as complete units. All exterior parts shall be of rust proof metal or material and shall not deposit rust residue on exterior surfaces of the vehicle after continued exposure to weather, vehicle washing and the environment.

2.2.2.2.2 Windshield Washers: (Amended) The windshield washer system shall, when used with the wipers, evenly and completely wet the entire wiped area. Spray nozzles shall be mounted on each wiper arm. Hose connections and hose routing shall be approved by the AUTHORITY during the pre-production meeting. The windshield washer system shall have a minimum three gallon reservoir, located for easy refilling from outside the vehicle and protected from freezing by the defroster or vehicle heating system. Reservoir pumps, lines, and fittings shall be corrosion-resistant, and the reservoir itself shall be translucent for easy determination of fluid level if visible


from the fill location, or a fluid level indicator shall be provided. Excess fluids shall drain to the vehicle exterior.

2.2.2.3 Lighting, Controls & Instruments: 2.2.2.3.1 Exterior Lighting: (Amended) All exterior lights shall be sealed to prevent entry and accumulation of moisture or dust, and each lamp shall be replaceable in less than 5 minutes by a 3M mechanic. LED lighting shall be utilized for all applications where applicable. LED lights shall be housed in a weather tight housing. All electrical connections to the light shall be by wire coming directly from the light housing and terminated with a weather proof Weather pack connector. No interim connector shall be allowed on the body of the light. Exterior surfaces of light lenses shall be smooth to prevent dirt accumulation and ease the washing process. Lights mounted on the engine compartment doors shall be protected from the impact shock of door opening and closing. Lights mounted on the roof or upper sections of the vehicle shall have protective shields, armored, or be flush mounted to protect the lens. LED’s shall be protected from chemical and abrasion degradation. Location of all exterior lighting will be approved during the pre-production meeting. 2.2.2.3.2 Clearance Marker and I.D. Lights: All clearance marker and I.D. lights shall be flush mounted LED type with smooth weather tight lenses to prevent the collection of dirt and damage during washing. 2.2.2.3.3 Reverse / Back-up Lights and Alarms: The reverse lights shall be 4” round, white LED lights. Visible and audible warning shall inform following vehicles or pedestrians of reverse operation. Visible reverse operation warning shall conform to SAE Standard J593. Audible reverse operation warning shall conform to SAE Recommended Practice J994-Type C or D. 2.2.2.3.4 Brake Lights: (Amended) Five Brake LED lights shall be mounted at the rear of vehicle. Three of the five brake lights shall be strip light type and shall be mounted on the rear top center of the vehicle; the remaining two lights shall be round 4” lights and mounted near the reverse and turn signal lights. 2.2.2.3.5 Turn Signals: Two rear, and two front amber turn signals shall be mounted on the vehicle. Three amber side turn signals shall be provided on both the curbside and street side of the vehicle. The turn signals shall be guarded for protection, installed rearward of the front and middle axle, and forward of the rear axle and as close to the axles as possible. Side turn signal lamps shall be visible from the front and rear as well as outward. 2.2.2.3.6 Door Lights: Lamps at the front and rear passenger doorways shall comply with ADA requirements and shall activate only when the door open and shall illuminate the street surface to a


level of no less than 1 foot-candle for a distance of 3 feet outward from the floor edge. The LED lighting shall be positioned above the lower daylight opening of the windows. 2.2.2.3.7 Hazard Lights: Hazard lamps at the rear of the vehicle shall be visible from behind when the engine service doors are opened. 2.2.2.3.8 Service Area Lighting: (Amended) Lights shall be provided in all service compartments. The engine compartment will utilize LED lighting which produces a minimum of 300 lumens of light. LED lighting shall be provided in all other exterior and interior compartments and be controlled by a toggle switch located inside of the service compartment. Service lighting shall shut off when the multiplexing system enters into “sleep mode”. The multiplexing shall turn on the sleep mode timer upon the activation of a switch in the engine compartment. 2.2.2.3.9 Passenger Interior Lighting: All interior and overhead lighting shall be LED. Overhead lighting shall provide general illumination in the passenger compartment and shall be controlled by a three position switch convenient to the driver with the following functions:

CENTER OFF—All passenger lights off NORMAL Passenger lights on when the master run switch is in NIGHT RUN

position ON All passenger lights on

The interior LED lighting system shall be extinguished when the transmission is in reverse. The system shall provide no less than 15 foot-candles of illumination on a 1-square-foot plane at an angle of 45 centered 33 inches above the floor and 24 inches in front of the seat back at each seating position except at the rear cross seat where the illumination may be decreased to 7 foot-candles. The two forward most light on the curbside of the vehicle shall be extinguished when the front door is closed to reduce driver windshield glare with lower light intensities permitted for the curbside front aisle facing seats. Floor surface in the aisle shall be illuminated to no less than 10 foot-candles. The floor surface in the vestibule shall be illuminated to no less than 4 foot-candles when the front door is open and to no less than 2 foot-candles when the front door is closed. LED light fixtures shall be located above the side windows at or near the juncture of the vehicle ceiling and the sidewall and may be provided over the rear door. Safety mechanism shall prevent fixtures from falling more than 8 inches upon occurrence of a mounting failure. LED lighting shall not be installed above the driver's side window and the front door.


Lamp fixtures and lenses shall be fire-resistant and compliant to NFPA130 requirement for lighting fixtures and shall not drip flaming material onto seats or interior trim if burned. Advertising media located in this area shall be illuminated by direct lighting. No advertisement frames shall be illuminated from behind the media. The fixtures shall be sealed to prevent accumulation of dust and insects but shall be easily opened on hinges for cleaning and service. The lenses shall be retained in a closed position with fasteners captive in the lens that are tamper-proof consistent with all other fasteners within the vehicle. Power supplies shall be enclosed with fireproof material and shall be located at the individual light fixtures. Power supplies shall be inaudible with an operating frequency above 18,000 Hz. Interchangeability of lamps, lens fixtures, and power supplies shall be maximized to the extent possible. The interior lighting system circuit(s) shall be designed so that the failure, degradation or overheating of one lighting fixture will trip a circuit breaker. A doorway and rear step lighting system shall be illuminated when the master switch is in RUN and NIGHT RUN positions, except the front doorway which shall be extinguished when the front door is closed. Illumination shall be provided by LED lighting at all three locations. The system shall provide no less than 2 foot-candles of illumination on the steps and in the entry and exit areas or on the ramp when deployed. These lights shall be shielded to protect passengers' eyes from glare. Light fixtures shall be totally enclosed, water tight, and manufactured from a non-corrosive material designed to provide ease of cleaning as well as lamp and housing removal, and shall not be easily removable by passengers. Doorway and step lights shall be protected from damage caused by passengers kicking lenses or fixtures and shall not be a hazard to passengers.

2.2.2.3.10 Driver’s Lighting: The driver's area shall have a light to provide general illumination and shall illuminate the half of the steering wheel nearest the driver to a level of 10 to 15 foot-candles. The light shall be controlled by a switch conveniently located on the driver’s switch panel. 2.2.2.3.11 Driver Controls: (Amended) All switches and controls necessary for the operation of the vehicle shall be conveniently located in the driver's area and shall provide for ease of operation. Switches and controls shall be essentially within the hand reach envelope described in SAE Recommended Practice, J287, and Driver Hand Control Reach. Controls shall be located so that boarding passengers may not easily tamper with control settings. Instruments, switches and controls shall be mounted in sturdy and durable panels that are fading, scratch and chip resistant for the life of the vehicle. Switch and control identifiers shall be permanent for the life of the vehicle. All panel-mounted instruments, switches and controls shall be easily accessible for service or replaceable, and the wiring at these controls shall be serviceable from the vestibule or the driver's seat or top of the panel.


Wiring shall have sufficient length and be routed to permit service without stretching or chafing the wires. Accelerator and brake pedals shall be designed for ankle motion and shall meet the requirements of SAE J1516. Foot surfaces of the pedals shall be faced with wear-resistant, nonskid, replaceable material. Pedal travel shall be limited by stops under the pedals. Controls for engine operations shall be closely grouped within the driver's compartment. These controls include master run switch, start switch or button and start enable lock. The master run switch shall be a four-position rotary moisture resistant switch, AUTHORITY approved with the following functions:

STOP ENGINE —All electrical systems off, except power available for the stoplights, hazard lights, radio, horn, fire and gas detection and suppression equipment, auxiliary heater, and electronic equipment that require continuous energizing. If the vehicle is not operated for a period of 30 minutes, the total electric load due to devices that require continuous energizing shall not cause the battery to be discharged below the level necessary to start the engine. Electrical loads resulting from AUTHORITY specified devices such as the fare box, GPS/AVL/VLAN, radio, etc., shall not exceed 1.5 amps with the master run switch in the OFF position. DAY RUN—All electrical systems and engine on, except the headlights, parking lights, and marker lights. NIGHT RUN—All electrical systems and engine on. NIGHT PARK —ALL electrical systems off, except those listed in OFF and power to destination sign, interior lights and marker lights.

The AUTHORITY is willing to consider alternative proposals for switch functions. The labeling and functions for the master run switch shall be reviewed in detail at the pre-production meeting to ensure reliability and that the switch configuration will meet the AUTHORITY's operational needs. A heavy-duty keyed switch to control the engine starting circuit shall be installed adjacent to the master run switch or the start switch. The switch shall be of the locking type, with removable keys: four (4) keys per vehicle. All keys shall be Cole Hearse 9755 or approved equal, and are to be the same for all vehicles furnished. The start enable switch key and the engine start button shall be located so as to preclude any possibility that the key can be removed or the engine started by unauthorized persons reaching in the operator's side window. The door control, kneel control, windshield wiper/washer controls, and master run switch shall be in the most convenient driver locations. They shall be identifiable by shape, touch, and markings. Markings are not required for the door control. Doors shall be


operated by a single control as specified in Section 2.2.2.1.1. Turn signal controls shall be floor-mounted, foot-controlled, waterproof, heavy-duty, momentary contact switches. The hazard-warning switch shall be a toggle switch with a yellow colored handle and a minimum of 1 7/8” inches long. All switches and controls shall be heavy-duty, premium toggle, rotary or foot operated, marked, where required, with easily read permanent identifiers. The AUTHORITY may accept devices other than toggle switches for driver controls at their sole discretion. If such alternatives are not approved during Design Review, toggle switches will be used. Configuration of switches and controls shall be consistent with function with no superfluous, unused or dual functions. Switches, controls, and instruments shall be shock-, dust- and water-resistant consistent with the vehicle washing practice described in Section 2.2.3.1. Required switches and controls are:

SWITCHES: Master run (four-position rotary) Start button or switch (waterproof, rubber cap required) Kneel (guarded) Turn signal (foot operated, no identifier required) Interior lighting switch (NORMAL-OFF-ON) Climate Control (2 – position toggle switch) Driver's heater and defroster fan speed Driver's blower Instrument panel lighting intensity Driver's area light Hazard warning (toggle with extended yellow colored handle) Horn button in steering wheel hub, (no identifier required) Headlight dimmer (foot operated, waterproof, no identifier required) Fast idle Transmission retarder (guarded, NORMAL-OFF) Diagnostic light panel test (if not automatic) Engine/Transmission diagnostic code Engine shut-down over-ride (guarded) Rear door master (not within reach of driver) Passenger exit signal (Not used, spare position) Start disable (key operated) Mirror control (four-way or joy stick) Mobility ramp master (guarded) Mobility ramp deploy/store Fire extinguisher deploy Emergency release valve (green handle)

CONTROLS:

Accelerator pedal (no identifier required) Brake pedal (no identifier required) Door control (no identifier required)


Windshield wipers Windshield washers (may be common with wiper control) Driver's heater & defroster controls Parking/Emergency parking /Emergency brake (actuation of brake, not control, shall be indicated to the driver) Transmission control Front door dump valve (no identifier required) Public address system foot switch Destination sign Mobile Radio Driver's fresh air vent A/C control (On-Off)

2.2.2.3.12 Instrumentation: (Amended) The speedometer, 12 & 24 volt meter, air pressure gauge(s), and certain indicator lights shall be located on the front panel immediately ahead of the steering wheel. The steering wheel spokes or rim shall not obstruct the driver's vision of the instruments when the steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position. Illumination of the instruments shall be simultaneous with the marker lamps. Glare or reflection in the windshield, side window, or front door windows from the instruments, indicators, or other controls shall be minimized. Instruments and indicators shall be easily readable in direct sunlight. Indicator lights immediately in front of the driver shall include:

a) High beam b) Right turn c) Left turn d) Hazard warning (may be common with turn signal indicators). e) Exit door open f) Kneel g) Parking brake applied h) Service brakes applied (may be common with parking brake indicator).

The instrument panel shall include a speedometer indicating no less than 80 mph and calibrated in maximum increments of 5 mph. The speedometer shall be a rotating pointer type, with a dial deflection of 220º to 270º degrees and 40 mph near the top of the dial. It shall be equipped with an odometer. The speedometer shall be sized and accurate in accordance with SAE Recommended Practice J678. Included in the instrument panel shall be air brake reservoir pressure gauge(s) with indicators for primary and secondary air tanks, and 12 and 24 volt gauge. 2.2.2.3.13 Onboard Diagnostics Indicators: Critical systems or components shall be monitored with a built-in diagnostic system. This diagnostic system shall have visual and audible indicators. The diagnostic indicator lamp panel shall be located in clear sight of the driver, but need not be immediately in front of the driver. The intensity of indicator lamps shall permit easy determination of on/off status in bright sunlight but shall not cause a distraction or visibility problem at


night. All indicators shall have a method of momentarily testing the operation of the lamp. Whenever possible, sensors shall be of the closed circuit type, so that failure of the circuit and/or sensor shall activate the malfunction indicator. An audible alarm shall sound when certain malfunctions are detected by the diagnostic system. The audible alarm shall be loud enough for the driver to be aware of its operation and to be inclined to discontinue operation of the vehicle. The following malfunction and other indicators listed shall be supplied on all vehicles:

Visible Indicator Audible Alarm

Function

Fire Yes Over temperature in engine compartment

Check Engine Yes Any engine code including high Backpressure

Transmission No Any Transmission Code Hot Engine Yes Engine coolant temperature high Low Coolant Yes Radiator water level low Low Oil Yes Engine oil pressure low Low Fuel No Indicates low fuel level Brake Retarder No Brake retarder on Anti-skid Braking No Not operating Air Conditioning No Air conditioning fault

Low air pressure Yes Air system pressure low in primary or secondary reservoirs

Generator Stop No Alternator not charging Hydraulic No Hydraulic system malfunction Headlight Hi-beam No Headlight hi-beam action Stop Lamp No Stop light action Directional Signal–left Click Turn indicator Directional Signal–right Click Turn indicator Kneel Yes Kneeling system activated Spare Spare Exit Door No Exit door open Door Interlock Bypass No Door interlock disabled Speed Switch No Speed above 3mph, rear doors disabled Sensitive Edge, Rear Door

Bell Passenger or object lodged in rear door

DPF Warning No Engine Backpressure has reached a level requiring maintenance

J1939 Communication Failure

No Indicates communication failure occurred between the Multiplex systems Main Vehicle Controller and control module


2.2.2.3.14 Engine Compartment: (Amended) Controls and instruments shall be provided inside the engine compartment that allow for and aid in the servicing of the vehicle. Toggle-type, rear control, rear start and compartment lighting switches shall be installed on the rear electrical junction box. A toggle or a momentary switch shall be installed to wake up the Multiplex system when in sleep mode. Switches shall be sealed marine grade and protected in accordance with the requirements for junction boxes cited in the above referenced in section 2.2.2.3.12. The rear control switch shall have three positions as follows:

NORMAL FRONT—All vehicle control from driver’s area through master run switch, rear start switch disabled. OFF—Engine off, master run switch disabled, front and rear start switches disabled. REAR—Master run switch disabled, engine run enabled, rear start switch enabled.

The rear start switch shall be a momentary contact, normally off switch that engages the starter when enabled by the rear control switch. The engine compartment shall also contain certified marine grade mechanical gauges for engine oil pressure, temperature, engine hour meter and data link connection for engine and transmission diagnostics. Gauges shall be easily read during service and mounted in an area where they shall not be damaged during minor and major repair. All gauges shall be approved by the AUTHORITY during the pre-production meeting.

2.2.3 INTERIOR TRIM: 2.2.3.1 General Requirement: (Amended) The interior shall be generally pleasing—simple, modern, and free from superficial design motifs. It shall have no sharp depressions or inaccessible areas and shall be easy to clean and maintain. To the extent practical, all interior surfaces more than 10 inches below the lower edge of the side windows or windshield shall be shaped so that objects placed on them fall to the floor when the vehicle is parked on a level surface. The entire interior shall allow cleaning with a hose, using a liquid soap attachment. Water and soap should not normally be sprayed directly on the instrument and switch panels. There shall be no sharp, abrasive edges and surfaces and no unnecessary hazardous protuberances. All plastic and synthetic materials used inside the vehicle shall be fire-resistant, except vinyl seat coverings which shall meet the requirements of Federal Specification CCC-A-680 (a) Class II Treatment “A1” and seating upholstery textiles which shall meet the requirements for textiles in Federal Aviation Regulations 25.853(b), as tested in accordance with Appendix F of that part. Materials shall be selected on the basis of maintenance, durability, appearance, safety, flammability, and tactile qualities. Trim and attachment details shall be kept simple and unobtrusive. Materials shall be strong enough to resist everyday service and vandalism; they shall be resistant to scratches and markings and shall be capable of withstanding the effects of graffiti-removal solvents. Interior trim shall be secured to avoid resonant vibrations under normal operational conditions.


Interior trim shall be applied and mechanically fastened to supporting surfaces. The mounting shall be designed to accommodate the dynamics of vehicle movement without transmitting stress to trim panels. Interior trim shall be designed to have a minimum 1/4-inch radius cove at intersecting adjacent surfaces. “Anti-squeak” tape shall be used between interior trim panels and any structure. Where trim panels cover apparatus requiring replacement, or even infrequent maintenance, they shall be fastened with captive, tamperproof fasteners requiring the same tool as all other interior fasteners, designed to allow ready access for removal and replacement of apparatus. The design and layout of the interior trim shall minimize the size and number of seams and moldings. Panels and fasteners shall not be easily removable by passengers. The walls shall have a graffiti resistance rating of 1 as per Section 21 of the APTA Transit Security Guidelines Manual or by other appropriate materials as approved by the AUTHORITY. The ceiling shall have a rating of 2 or better. All other interior surfaces shall have a low-glare finish with a glossometer reading between 4 and 14, per ASTM D 523, machine direction, using a 60° glossometer. Side and rear end trim panels shall be 1/10-inch thick, minimum.

2.2.3.1.1 Trim Panels: Interior side trim panels and driver's barrier shall be melamine or other approved composite plastic trim panel material that meet Docket 90 requirements and are graffiti resistant. It shall permit easy removal of paint, greasy fingerprints, and ink from felt tip pens. Panels shall be easily replaceable and tamper-resistant. They shall be reinforced, as necessary, to resist vandalism and other rigors of transit vehicle service. Interior mullion trim, moldings, and trim strips shall be stainless steel, or anodized aluminum. Individual trim panels and parts shall be interchangeable to the extent practical. Untrimmed areas shall be painted and finished to the quality described in Section 2.2.1.1.3. Samples and color chips shall be supplied by the Contractor at the pre-production meeting, for selection by the AUTHORITY. 2.2.3.1.2 Headlining: Ceiling panels shall be melamine type material. Headlining shall be supported to prevent buckling, drumming, or flexing and shall be secured without loose edges. Headlining materials shall be treated or insulated to prevent marks due to condensation where panels are in contact with metal body members. Moldings and trim strips, as required to make the edges tamperproof, shall be stainless steel or aluminum. Headlining panels covering operational equipment that is mounted above the ceiling shall be on hinges for ease of service but retained to prevent inadvertent opening. Samples and color chips shall be supplied by the Contractor at the pre-production meeting for selection by the AUTHORITY. 2.2.3.1.3 Front End: The entire front end of the vehicle shall be sealed to prevent debris accumulation behind the dash and to prevent the driver from kicking or fouling wiring and other equipment with his feet. The front end shall be free of protrusions that are hazardous to passengers


standing or walking in the front of the vehicle during rapid decelerations. Paneling across the front of the vehicle and any trim around the driver's compartment shall be formed metal or plastic material. Formed metal dash panels shall be painted and finished to exterior quality. Plastic dash panels shall be reinforced, as necessary, vandal-resistant, and replaceable. All colored, painted, and plated parts forward of the driver's barrier shall be finished with a dull matte surface. Colors shall match or coordinate with the balance of the vehicle interior. Color chips shall be supplied by the Contractor for approval by the AUTHORITY at the pre-production meeting. 2.2.3.1.4 Rear End: The rear bulkhead and rear interior surfaces shall be material suitable for exterior skin, painted and finished to exterior quality, or paneled with melamine type material, plastic, and trimmed with stainless steel or aluminum. Colors shall match or coordinate with the balance of the vehicle interior. 2.2.3.1.5 Passenger Information & Advertising: Provisions shall be made for two information boxes on the rear of the Driver's Barrier/Electronics Cabinet, and at the third rear exit door opening for a box which shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor. The box to retain information shall be sized 3 inches wide and 9 inches high. This box will hold items posted by the AUTHORITY, such as brochures and comment cards. The retainers may be concave and shall support the media without adhesives. The media shall be illuminated by the ambient interior LED lighting system and shall not be illuminated from behind the frame. Final approval of the brochure rack locations shall be approved during the design review. 2.2.3.1.6 Luggage Racks: (Amended) The Contractor shall provide and mount luggage racks in which passengers can store their luggage during trips to and from the airport subway station and car rental locations. The luggage racks and hardware shall be affixed to the floor, side wall, and ceiling structure of the vehicle. The Luggage racks shall consist of stainless steel tubing material and joints shall be mechanically jointed or welded.

The Luggage rack size and, location shall be as follows One 50 inch luggage rack on the street side across from the exit door, and one 41.25 inch luggage rack on the curbside front wheelhouse.

2.2.3.2 Passenger Seats: (Amended) Passenger Seating shall be “American Seating, Metropolitan” that meet the requirements of this specification.

2.2.3.2.1 Arrangements: (Amended) The configuration shall be with two luggage racks with the remaining available space allotted to passenger perimeter seating for 32. The number of flip-up seats; number and location of mobility aid and priority seating; number of standees; estimated curb weight of vehicle; the gross load and resultant gross


vehicle weight rated. This section, notwithstanding, the current design criteria shall be as follows. Perimeter seats at the wheel wells shall have the area between the seat backs and the attachment to the side wall of the vehicle designed to prevent debris accumulation. The center three rear bench seats shall be hinged at the top of the seat back allowing the entire assembly to lift out of the way for servicing the engine compartment if access is required through the passenger compartment. The two remaining rear bench seats shall be fixed in position. Hinged seat assembly shall be equipped with locks requiring a nominal 5/16 inch square end tool to open, and prop rod to hold the seat assembly in an open position. The two most forward seating positions on both sides shall be designated as priority seating for elderly and persons with disabilities and appropriately labeled with a priority seating decal approved by the AUTHORITY. Seat placements will be arranged so as to prevent any possibly pinch points (places where a persons hands or other body parts can be pinched if there is seat movement). 2.2.3.2.2 Dimensions: Seats for the various seating arrangements shall be in accordance with SAE Standard J826 and have the dimensions as follows:

Width: 17 inches-minimum Length: 17 to 18 inches Back Height: 15 inches-minimum Seat Height: 17 to 18 inches Seat Cushion Slope: 5 to 11 degrees Seat Back Slope 8 to 17 degrees

2.2.3.2.3 Structure & Design: The passenger seat frame and its supporting structure shall be constructed and mounted so that space under the seat is maximized to increase mobility aid maneuvering room and is completely free of obstructions to facilitate cleaning. To the maximum extent possible seat structures shall be of sufficient strength for the intended service. The lowest part of the seat assembly that is within 12 inches of the aisle shall be at least 10 inches above the floor. The underside of the seat and the side wall shall be configured to prevent debris accumulation and the transition from the seat underside to the vehicle side wall to the floor cove radius shall be smooth. All transverse objects including: seat backs; modesty panels; and longitudinal seats that are in front of forward facing seats shall not impart a compressive load in excess of 1,000 pounds onto the femur of passengers ranging in size from a 5th-percentile female to a 95th-percentile male during a 10g deceleration of the vehicle. This deceleration shall peak at .05 +/- .015 seconds from initiation. Permanent deformation of the seat resulting


from two 95th-percentile males striking the seat back during this 10g deceleration shall not exceed 2 inches, measured at the aisle side of the seat. Structural failure of any part of the seat or side, wall shall not introduce a laceration hazard. The seat assembly shall withstand static vertical forces of 500 pounds applied to the top of the seat cushion on each seating position with less than 1/4-inch permanent deformation in the seat or its mounting. The seat assembly shall withstand static horizontal forces of 500 pounds evenly distributed along the top of the seat back with less than 1/4-inch permanent deformation in the seat or its mountings. The seat backs at the aisle position and at the window position shall withstand repeated impacts of two 40-pound sandbags without visible deterioration. One sandbag shall strike the front 40,000 times and the other sandbag shall strike the rear 40,000 times. Each sandbag shall be suspended on a 36-inch pendulum and shall strike the seat back 10,000 times each from distances of 6, 8, 10, and 12 inches. Seats at both seating positions shall withstand 4,000 vertical drops of a 40-pound sandbag without visible deterioration. The sandbag shall be dropped 1,000 times each from heights of 6, 8, 10, and 12 inches. Seat cushions shall withstand 100,000 randomly positioned 3-1/2-inch drops of a squirming, 150-pound, smooth-surfaced, buttocks- shaped striker with only minimal wear on the seat covering. Longitudinal seats shall be of the same general design as transverse seats but without seat back handholds. Longitudinal seats may be mounted on the wheelhouses in the rear of the vehicle. Armrests shall be included on the ends of each set of longitudinal seats and shall be located from 7 to 9 inches above the seat cushion surface. The area between the armrest and the seat cushion shall be closed by a barrier or panel and shall be constructed and trimmed to complement the modesty panels. The top and sides of the armrests shall have a minimum width of 2 inches and shall be free from sharp protrusions that form a safety hazard. Seat back handholds and armrests shall withstand static horizontal and vertical forces of 250 pounds applied anywhere along their length with less than 1/4-inch permanent deformation. Seat back handholds and armrests shall withstand 25,000 impacts in each direction of a horizontal force of 125 pounds with less than 1/4-inch permanent deformation and without visible deterioration. 2.2.3.2.4 Construction & Materials: (Amended) The seat material shall be fiber reinforced plastics, polycarbonate, or nylon and shall be attached to the frame with tamperproof fasteners. Coloring shall be consistent throughout the seat material. All visually exposed metal of the standard seat structure including mounting brackets and other components shall be aluminum or stainless steel. The seat shall be contoured for individuality, lateral support, and maximum comfort and shall fit the framework to reduce exposed edges. The seat back thickness shall not exceed 3/4-inch in the knee room area. The seat forward of the seated passenger shall absorb energy in a severe crash by allowing the passenger's knees to deform the seat back in accordance with the requirements of Subsection 2.2.3.2.3. Complete seat assemblies shall be interchangeable to the extent practical. Color of the seat material shall be AUTHORITY approved at the pre-production meeting.


The shell shall be recessed in the seat and back areas to accept padded, fiber reinforced plastic vinyl inserts. The inserts shall be vandal resistant. Color of the material shall be consistent throughout the material. Seat and back inserts shall be securely attached and be detachable by means of a simple release mechanism employing a special tool so that they are easily removable by maintenance personnel. All seat and back inserts shall be interchangeable throughout. Materials shall have a high resistance to tearing, flexing, and wetting and shall comply with safety standards of FTA Docket 90A, or FMVSS 302 Standards. The entire seating design and color selection shall be approved during the pre-production meetings.

2.2.3.3 Driver’s Seat: 2.2.3.3.1 Dimensions: The driver's seat shall be a Recaro Ergo Metro or approved equal equipped with a pneumatic suspension, high back seat that is comfortable and adjustable so that persons ranging in size from the 95th-percentile male to the 5th-percentile female may operate the vehicle. While seated, the driver shall be able to independently adjust all seat functions without looking, complexity, excessive effort or being pinched. Adjustment mechanisms shall not be subject to inadvertent changes. Graphical symbols on the adjustment controls shall conform to SAE Recommended Practice J1458 Universal Symbols for Seat and Suspension Adjustment. Driver's seat design, installation and supplier shall be approved by the AUTHORITY during design review process. 2.2.3.3.2 Seat Pan Cushion Length: Adjustment of the seat pan length shall range from 16.5 to 20.5 inches measured from the front edge of the seat pan to the rear at the intersection of the seat back. 2.2.3.3.3 Seat Pan Cushion Height: The seat shall adjust in height from 14 to 20 inches measured from the floor of the driver's area to the top of the level seat at its midpoint. 2.2.3.3.4 Seat Pan Cushion Slope: The seat cushion slope shall adjust from +10 to –5 degrees, with plus being sloped downward from front to rear. Slope shall be measured by connecting the high points of the seat, one at the front and the other at the rear of the seat at its intersection with the seat back. 2.2.3.3.5 Seat Base Fore/Aft Adjustment: (Amended) Horizontal adjustment of the seat shall be not less than 9 inches. The horizontal distance from the heel point to the forward edge of the seat cushion, set to the minimum 16.5 inch length, shall be no more than 6 inches with the seat adjusted fully forward. Seat tracks shall lock on both sides and be of steel construction and coated with an e-coat to prevent corrosion. The seat tracks shall be located below the seat cushion and above the pneumatic suspension.


2.2.3.3.6 Seat Pan Width: Seat cushion width shall be no less than 21 inches across the front edge and no less than 23 inches across the side bolster. 2.2.3.3.7 Seat Back Width: The seat back width shall be no less than 19 inches measured at or near its midpoint height. 2.2.3.3.8 Seat Suspension: The driver's seat shall be appropriately dampened to support a maximum weight of 380 pounds and supported by a dual shock absorber arrangement that dampens varying frequencies that are transmitted through the vehicle. One shock shall be adjustable to allow the driver to control ride settings. A rubber bumper shall be provided at the lower limit of seat travel. 2.2.3.3.9 Seat Back Lumbar Support: Lumbar support in the seat back shall be provided by 3 cells with a minimum range of adjustment from 7 to 11 inches. Measurements shall be from the bottom of the seat back at its intersection with the seat pan, to the top of the lumbar cushioning. 2.2.3.3.10 Seat Back Angle Adjustment: Seat back angle adjustment shall range from 90 degrees (upright) to 124.5 degrees (reclined), with infinite adjustments in between. 2.2.3.3.11 Structure & Materials: (Amended) The driver's seat shall be contoured to provide maximum comfort for extended periods of time. Cushions shall be fully padded with FR foam, CR Safeguard TR (Firm), or material with equal properties, in the seating areas at the bottom and back. The seat cushion foam thickness shall be a minimum 2 inches in the middle and 3.5 inches on the side. The seat back foam thickness shall be a minimum of 1.5 inches in the middle and 3 inches on the side. The seat covering shall be upholstered with transit quality fabric, Firth or approved equal in the seating area and on the seatback. Color of the material shall complement the balance of the interior and shall be consistent throughout the vehicle. All other areas, including seat backing and boxing, shall be transportation grade vinyl, naugahyde, doe skin of a color that shall complement the balance of the interior and shall be consistent throughout the vehicle. The seam joining the two fabrics shall be welted for strength and the welt shall be on the side of the cushion, not on the cushion seat or back, where it can be subject to wear by the seated operator. All visually exposed metal on the driver's seat, including the pedestal, shall be painted cold rolled steel, unpainted aluminum or stainless steel. Required black colored seat belts shall be a 3-point system fastened to the seat so that the seat may be adjusted, by the driver, without resetting the seat belt. Seat and shoulder belts shall be stored in automatic retractors. The color of seating fabric and material shall be approved by the AUTHORITY at the pre-production meetings.


The seat shall withstand 10,000 impacts of a 40-pound sandbag dropped from a height of 12 inches without visible deterioration. The seat shall be tested in the lowest vertical position and repeated with the seat in the top vertical position. A 40-pound sandbag shall be suspended on a 36-inch pendulum and shall strike the seat back 10,000 times from distances of 6, 8, 10 and 12 inches. Seat cushion shall withstand 100,000 randomly positioned 1-1/2-inch drops of a squirming, 150 pound, smooth-surfaced buttocks-shape striker with only minimal wear on the seat covering.

2.2.3.4 Floor Covering: Floor covering throughout the vehicle shall be non-skid, ribbed, heavy-duty RCA rubber material that remains effective in all weather conditions. Floor and step treads if applicable with coverings applied, shall withstand a static load of at least 150 pounds applied through the flat end of a 1/2-inch diameter rod, with 1/32-inch radius, without permanent visible deformation. Color shall be consistent throughout the thickness of the floor covering. Color of the floor covering will be approved by the AUTHORITY at the pre-production meetings. The methodology and the type of adhesive used to bond the floor covering to the vehicle floor shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the floor covering. All seams and edges of the floor covering shall be sealed to prevent water from entering between floor and covering. The floor covering seams shall be a minimum of 8 inches from seams in the sub-floor material.

2.2.3.4.1 Vestibule: The floor in the vestibule shall be covered with nonskid, composition material that remains effective in all weather conditions. During the pre-production meetings, the AUTHORITY will review with the contractor the need to reduce the flooring material thickness in this area to reduce tripping hazards. The floor covering, as well as transitions of flooring material to the main floor and to the step-well area, shall be smooth and present no tripping hazards. The standee line shall be at least 2 inches wide and shall extend across the vehicle aisle in line with the driver's barrier. This line shall be the same contrasting yellow color as the edge at the doorway. Color shall be consistent throughout the floor covering. 2.2.3.4.2 Driver's Compartment: The floor in the driver's compartment shall be easily cleaned and shall be arranged to prevent debris accumulation. Floor coverings shall be heavy-duty composition, material. Color of the driver's floor covering shall be coordinated with the vestibule. The floor covering shall extend to the sidewalls, up to the top of a cove arrangement, and be secured at the edges, similar to the passenger compartment. 2.2.3.4.3 Passenger Area: The floor in the passenger area shall be covered with nonskid RCA rubber material that remains effective in all weather conditions. To the maximum extent practical flooring shall be installed with a center strip that extends between the aisle sides of seats from the rear seat or rear steps to the standee line. The covering between the center strip and the


wheel housings may be separate pieces. At the rear door, however, a separate strip as wide as the doors may extend from the center strip to the edge at the door opening. The floor covering shall closely fit the side wall cove or extend to the top of the cove. Floor covering material shall cover the rear bench seat riser. Color of the floor covering in the passenger compartment shall be the same as that in the vestibule.

2.2.4 WINDOWS: The windows, including frames, sashes, seals, handles, glazing, and other window hardware shall be designed to last the service life of the vehicle.

2.2.4.1 Driver's Windows: 2.2.4.1.1 Windshield: The windshield shall permit a driver's field of view as referenced in SAE Recommended Practice J1050. The vertically upward view shall be a minimum of 15, measured above the horizontal and excluding any shaded band. The vertically downward view shall permit any size driver to detect an object 3-1/2 feet high no more than 2 feet in front of the vehicle. The horizontal view shall be a minimum of 90 about the line of sight. Any binocular obscuration due to a center divider may be ignored when determining the 90 requirement if the divider does not exceed a 3 angle in the driver's field of view. Windshield pillars shall not exceed 10 of binocular obscuration. The windshield shall be designed and installed to minimize external glare as well as reflections from inside the vehicle. When the vehicle is operated at night with the passenger interior lighting on, essentially no reflections shall be visible in the windshield immediately forward of the driver's barrier. Reflections in the remainder of the windshield shall be minimized. The windshield shall be easily replaceable by removing zip-locks from the windshield retaining moldings. Bonded-in-place windshields shall not be used. The glazing material shall have single density tint. The upper portion of the windshield above the driver's field of view shall have a dark, shaded band with a minimum luminous transmittance of 6 percent when tested in accordance to ASTM D-1003. The windshield, shade band will not be required, subject to the review and approval of the AUTHORITY at the pre-production meeting, if: the windshield is sloped to the aft and this places the upper edge of the glazing under the destination sign assembly; or if the curbside windshield utilizes a sloped and horizontal configuration that would induce glare. 2.2.4.1.2 Driver's Side Window: The driver's side window shall have two vertical sections, each horizontally sliding, with suitable stops. The forward section shall be provided with an external handle. Windows shall be designed to preclude opening or closing caused by acceleration or braking of the vehicle. The sash frame lower rail shall be designed to drain water, due to condensation, to the exterior Vehicle. The driver's side window shall not be bonded in place and shall be easily replaceable. The glazing material shall be nominal 1/4-inch, laminated, safety glass with single density tint.


2.2.4.2 Side Windows: 2.2.4.2.1 Dimensions: Side windows shall extend from the shoulder height of the 5th-percentile, seated, female passenger to the eye level of the 95th-percentile, standing male passenger. Vertical mullions between windows including the trim shall not exceed 13 inches in width. The side windows shall be fixed with the top portion of the “tip in” style to allow adequate ventilation of the vehicle, and meet the emergency escape requirements of FMVSS-217. The side window assemblies shall be identical, as far as practical, throughout the vehicle. Window assemblies that open must be aligned to preclude water leakage and excessive wind noise into the vehicle. Latch shall have the capability to allow ventilation windows to be retained in a closed position by the deployment of a single square key fastener. The “tip in” windows shall be hinged with positively retained props or restraints to prevent accidental opening or opening beyond design limit. All side windows shall be easily replaceable without disturbing adjacent windows and shall be mounted so that flexing or vibration from engine operation or normal road excitation is not apparent. 2.2.4.2.2 Materials: (Amended) Side-glazing material shall be a gray, ¼ inch tempered safety glass with 42 percent light transmittance. Window over the side destination sign shall have essentially clear glazing. Glazing materials shall be in accordance with ANSI Z26.1, latest revision. Sash to be black anodized aluminum. All glazing that is rearward of the yellow standee line shall be equipped with six mil laminated Vandal Shield, or approved equal, polyester film. The windowsill, seal rubber and/or any sash, or sash frame mounting rubber must be installed so that passengers cannot remove it, and shall be approved at the pre-production meeting by the AUTHORITY. The body sash construction shall be such that the sash drain will prevent the entrance or back up of water into the vehicle. Drains shall be incorporated at the bottom of the sash, which will drain interior condensation of the sash to the exterior of the vehicle. Emergency escape windows shall be top hinged and captive and shall not fall out on the street after being pushed open. The sash frame shall be installed to prevent the sash frame from being released unless it is intentionally pushed out in an emergency. It shall also be equipped with a positive lock device that must be manually released before the window can be pushed out. This device shall be of a sturdy design, not prone to breakage by mishandling and shall require concurrence of the AUTHORITY at the pre-production meeting. An "Emergency Push Out" instruction plate shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor in accordance with the requirements of FMVSS 217. The instruction plate shall be a permanent metal label riveted to the wall of the vehicle and shall not be a decal or of paint on metal design.


2.2.5 INSULATION: 2.2.5.1 Material: Any insulation material used between the inner and outer panels shall be fire-resistant and sealed to minimize entry of moisture and to prevent its retention in sufficient quantities to impair insulation properties. Insulation properties shall be unimpaired by vibration compacting or settling during the life of the vehicle. The insulation material shall be non-asbestos, non-hygroscopic and resistant to fungus and breeding of insects. Any insulation material used inside the engine compartment shall be fire-resistant and shall not absorb or retain oils or water. 2.2.5.2 Performance:

2.2.5.2.1 Thermal Insulation: The combination of inner and outer panels on the sides, roof, and ends of the vehicle, and any material used between these panels shall provide a thermal insulation sufficient to meet the interior temperature requirements of Section 2: Technical Specifications. The vehicle body shall be thoroughly sealed so that drafts cannot be felt by the driver or passengers during normal operations with the passenger doors closed. 2.2.5.2.2 Sound Insulation: (Amended) The combination of inner and outer panels and any material used between them shall provide sufficient sound insulation so that a sound source with a level of 80 dba measured at the outside skin of the vehicle shall have a sound level of 65 dba or less at any point inside the vehicle. These conditions shall prevail with all openings, including doors and windows, closed and with the engine and accessories switched off. The vehicle-generated noise level experienced by a passenger at any seat location in the vehicle shall not exceed 83 dba and the driver shall not experience a noise level of more than 76 dba under the following test conditions. The vehicle shall be empty except for test personnel, not to exceed 4 persons, and the test equipment. All openings shall be closed and all accessories shall be operating during the test. The vehicle shall accelerate at full throttle from a standstill to 35 mph on level commercial asphalt or concrete pavement in an area free of large reflecting surfaces within 50 feet of the vehicle path. During the test, the ambient noise level in the test area shall be at least 10 dba lower than the vehicle under test. Instrumentation and other general requirements shall conform to SAE Standard J366. If the noise contains an audible discrete frequency, a penalty of 5 dba shall be added to the sound level measured.

2.2.6 ANCILLARY FEATURES

2.2.6.1 Driver's Area: The driver’s area shall contain all apparatus and controls necessary for operation of the vehicle. The layout shall maximize the use of available space and shall employ sound human factors and industrial design principles. The operator's area and equipment shall be designed to ensure safe and optimal performance for operators in the range of the 5th percentile female


to the 95th percentile male. The operator’s area shall be free of sharp edges, protruding objects, safety hazards and floor obstructions. Each requirement of this section is subject to AUTHORITY approval at the pre-production meetings.

2.2.6.1.1 Dash Panels: To the extent practical, areas that are visible from outside the vehicle in the vicinity of the dash panel and cowl shall be configured to preclude use of storage of items. The dash panel shall be designed so that liquid spilled on the surface will not damage or interfere with the operation of components or back panel wiring. The dash panel face shall be constructed of painted flat black metal, colored flat black composite material or black acrylic plastic designed to last the life of the vehicle and that shall not degrade due to weathering or exposure to sunlight. The dash panel face shall be arranged to facilitate replacing switches or repairing wiring. The dash panel cabinet shall match adjacent lining materials. 2.2.6.1.2 Sun Shade: (Amended) A sun shade shall be provided for the driver’s window and the driver’s side of the windshield respectively. The shade shall be shaped to minimize light leakage between the shade and windshield pillars. The shade shall store out of the way and shall not obstruct airflow from the climate control system or foul other equipment such as the radio handset or the destination sign control. Deployment of the shades shall not restrict vision of the rearview mirrors. Shade adjustments shall be made easily by hand with positive locking and releasing devices and shall not be subject to damage by over tightening. Sun shade construction and materials shall be strong enough to resist breakage during adjustments. Vibration and normal vehicle motion shall not cause the shades’ position to change. Shades, when deployed, shall be effective in the driver's field of view at angles more than 5 above the horizontal. 2.2.6.1.3 Driver’s Accessories: (Amended) A 10 lbs. fire extinguisher must be rechargeable and have a minimum rating of 4A, 60 BC. The extinguisher shall be silk screen printed with “Property of MASSPORT” in letters approximately 1-inch in height. Fire extinguisher shall be tagged with initial inspection date with supplier information. Size and location of the safety equipment box shall require AUTHORITY concurrence at the pre-production meeting.

2.2.6.2 Mirrors: All specific details regarding the mounting, location, size and type of mirror shall be reviewed and approved at the pre-production meeting.

2.2.6.2.1 Outside Mirrors: (Amended) The vehicle shall be equipped with a B&R CR-22-D913HRFHRCX-TS for right side, and a B&R RS-16-D913HRFHRCX-TS for left side. The exterior mirrors shall be corrosion-resistant, electrically-heated outside rearview mirrors on each side of the vehicle. The mirrors shall have a turn signal built into the mirror surface or mounted to the mirror head. The mirrors shall be electrically heated whenever the defroster fan is ON. The multiplex electrical control system shall cycle the heater on/off to assure


maximum durability of the heating elements and effective defrosting. Mirrors shall permit the driver to view the street along both sides of the vehicle, including the rear wheels. Field of view of the curbside and street side mirrors will be approved during the First Article Inspection and Pilot Vehicle program. The mirrors shall be glass. The mirror brackets shall be bolted to the vehicle structure to prevent vibration and loss of adjustment with the bolts being the weakest part of the mirror assembly. The curbside rearview mirror shall be mounted so that its lower edge is no less than 76 inches above the street surface. Mirrors shall retract or fold sufficiently to allow automated washing of the vehicle. Suitable stops shall be provided to prevent outside mirrors from contacting the vehicle when fully retracted during the washing operation. Mirrors shall be configured with an electric, remotely controllable, conventional flat mirror glass, approximately 9.5 by 9.5 inches square located above a remotely controllable convex mirror, approximately 4 by 7 inches. A weatherproof Deutsch electrical connector, or approved equal shall be provided on the exterior of the vehicle, which enables the quick replacement of a damaged mirror. Final approval of the connector’s location will be provided during the pre-production meetings.

2.2.6.2.2 Inside Mirrors: Mirrors shall be provided for the driver to observe most passengers throughout the vehicle without leaving his seat and without shoulder movement. With a full standee-load, the driver shall be able to observe passengers in the front and rear door areas. Mirrors, doors, and door glazing arrangements shall allow a seated operator to view passengers attempting to board or alight through the rear door. Inside mirrors shall not be in the line of sight to the curbside outside mirror. All specific details regarding the mounting, location, size and type of mirror shall be reviewed and approved at the pre-production meeting.

2.2.6.3 Passenger Assists: 2.2.6.3.1 General Requirements: Passenger assists in the form of full grip, vertical stanchions or handholds shall be provided for the safety of standees and for ingress/egress. Passenger assists shall be convenient in location, shape, and size for both the 95th-percentile male and the 5th-percentile female standee. Starting from the entrance door, moving anywhere in the vehicle and out the exit door, a vertical assist shall be provided either as the vertical portion of seat back assist or as a separate item. They shall be designed so that a 5th-percentile female passenger may easily move from one assist to another using one hand and the other without losing support. The assists shall be between 1-1/4 and 1-1/2 inches in diameter or width with radii no less than 1/4 inch and shall permit a full hand grip with no less than 1-1/2 inches of knuckle clearance around the assist. A crash resulting in a 1-foot intrusion shall not produce sharp edges, loose rails, or other potentially dangerous conditions associated with a lack of structural integrity of the assist. Any joints in the assist structure shall be underneath supporting brackets and securely clamped to prevent passengers from moving or twisting the assists. All areas of the passenger assists that are


handled by passengers including functional components used as passenger assists, shall be stainless steel. Assists shall withstand a force of 300 pounds applied over a 12-inch lineal dimension in any direction normal to the assist without permanent visible deformation. All passenger assist components, including brackets, clamps, screw heads, and other fasteners used on the passenger assists shall be designed to be vandal-proof and designed to eliminate any pinch points, snagging and cutting hazards and free from burrs or rough edges. Allen headed fasteners are considered to meet this requirement. All passenger assists, this section notwithstanding, shall comply with ADA, Part 38.29. 2.2.6.3.2 Front and Rear Doors: Front and rear door assists shall be as far outward as practical, but shall be no further than 6 inches inward from the outside edge of doorway tread and shall be easily grasped by a 5th-percentile female boarding from street level. Door assists shall include a vertical section at the outboard door edge and an upward slope across the door panel that is functionally continuous with the horizontal front passenger assist and the vertical assists on the modesty panels. Door entry assists shall be no less than ¾-inch in width and provide a minimum knuckle clearance of 1-½-inch. 2.2.6.3.3 Vestibule: (Amended) The aisle side of the driver's barrier shall be fitted with a vertical passenger assist that is functionally continuous with the overhead assist and that extends to within 36 inches of the floor. The assist shall have sufficient clearance from the barrier to prevent inadvertent wedging of a passenger's arm. A horizontal passenger assist shall be located across the front of the vehicle and shall prevent passengers from sustaining injuries on the windshield in the event of a sudden deceleration. Without restricting the vestibule space, the assist shall provide support for the boarding passenger from the front door. Passengers may be able to lean against the assist for security. The assist shall be no less than 36 inches above the floor.

2.2.6.3.4 Front Wheel Housings: The front wheel housings shall have vertical assists at the rearmost aisle side corners that are continuous with the overhead horizontal assists. The curbside front wheel housing shall have a vertical assist at the forward most aisle side corner that is continuous with the overhead horizontal assist. A horizontal assist approximately 36 inches above the floor and on top of the wheel housing shall be installed along the aisle side of the curbside wheel housing. A similar assist shall be provided on the street side wheel housing if it does not preclude opening the doors of the electronics locker. 2.2.6.3.5 Overhead: Except forward of the standee line and at the rear door, a continuous, full grip, overhead assist shall be provided on both sides of the aisle. This assist shall be convenient to standees anywhere in the vehicle and shall be located over the center of the aisle seating position of the transverse seats. The assist shall be no less than 70 inches above the floor except over the curbside front wheel housings where the height shall be no less than 60 inches. A similar assist shall be provided over the street side wheel housing if it does not preclude opening the doors of the electronics locker. Overhead assists shall


simultaneously support 150 pounds on a 12-inch length. No more than 5 percent of the full grip feature shall be lost due to assist supports. 2.2.6.3.6 Seats: Longitudinal seats, if used, shall have vertical assists located between every other designated seating position except the two most rearward seats on each side shall have vertical assists at the rearward edge. Assists shall extend from near the leading edge of the seat and shall be functionally continuous with the overhead assist. If transverse seating is used due to interior design and maximum seating requirements, every other transverse seat shall have a vertical assist attached to the seat back assist extending to the overhead assist. In addition, both seats rearward of the mobility aid parking area and seats in the vicinity of the rear door shall have vertical assists. Assists shall be staggered across the aisle from each other where practical and shall be no more than 52 inches apart. 2.2.6.3.7 Rear Doorway: Vertical assists that are functionally continuous with the overhead assist and the door mounted assists shall be provided at the aisle side of the transverse or perimeter seat immediately forward of the rear doors and on the aisle side of the rear door modesty panels. 2.2.6.3.8 Rear Step Area: Assists shall be provided on both sides of the aisle steps in the rear of the vehicle. Assists shall be no less than 36 inches above the floor and step tread surface and shall be functionally continuous with vertical assists in the low floor area and on the modesty panels in the high floor area.

2.2.6.4 Destination Signs:

2.2.6.4.1 General System Requirements: (Amended) An electronic all LED Twin Vision, Smart Series destination sign system of the most advanced design shall be supplied for the vehicle with destination signs for the front, side, and rear of the vehicle. The electronic destination information system shall be ADA compliant. The display areas of the destination signs shall be clearly visible in direct sunlight, at night and in all lighting conditions between these lighting extremes with evenly distributed illumination appearance. Each destination sign shall have equal readability at points 65 degrees on either side of a line perpendicular to the center of the mean plane of the sign’s display. The Contractor shall comply with the destination sign manufacturers’ recommended mounting configuration and installation procedures to assure optimum visibility of the sign display. Easy access shall be provided to clean the inside of the destination sign glass or to repair, remove or replace the sign mechanism. Self-retained, quarter-turn fasteners or four-turn speed-thread screws shall be provided to aid in quick removal of components. The sign


enclosure shall inhibit entry of dirt, dust, insects, or driven rain under normal operating conditions. Laminated safety glass shall be used for the front destination sign window. The glass shall be electrically heated whenever the defroster fan is ON. The multiplex electrical control system shall cycle the heater on/off to assure maximum durability of the heating element and effective defrosting. The front sign cavity shall also be heated by the vehicle main HVAC system. The system shall be microprocessor based and utilize EIA RS-485, SAE J1708, SAE J1939, or CAN communications protocols between system components, and shall utilize error detection techniques within the communication protocol. The system shall generally be capable of communicating with and/or controlling, additional information devices, such as interior information signs or visual and voice annunciation devices. The system shall provide for destination and public relations message entry and display. The system shall have the ability to sequentially display multi-line destination messages, with the route number portion remaining in a visible constant “ON” mode at all times, if so programmed. It shall provide the means of adjusting, from one-tenth second to twenty-five seconds duration, the length of time messages are displayed. 2.2.6.4.2 Front Destination Sign: (Amended) The front destination sign shall have a minimum of 16 rows by 160 columns in a display 62.5 inches wide by 7.5 inches high. The destination message shall be readable by a person with 20/20 vision from a distance, not less than 275 feet. 2.2.6.4.3 Side Destination Sign: The side destination sign shall be located at the top of the forward most curbside window and shall have a minimum of 14 rows by 108 columns in a display 42 inches wide by 4.2 inches high. The side destination message shall be readable by a person with 20/20 vision from a distance of not less than 110 feet. 2.2.6.4.4 Rear Destination Sign: The rear destination sign shall have a minimum of 16 rows by 48 columns in a display 17 inches wide by 6.1 inches high. The rear sign shall be capable of independently displaying alphanumeric characters. The rear destination sign message shall be readable by a person with 20/20 vision from a distance of not less than 225 feet. 2.2.6.4.5 Driver Control Console: The driver’s control console (DCC) shall be recess mounted in the front destination compartment door within reach of the driver. The DCC shall contain a display of at least two-lines of 20 character capability, to monitor the status of the destination sign system and shall incorporate an audio, enunciator that beeps to alert the driver to view the display for a message, or beeps indicating that a key is depressed. The DCC shall utilize a multi-key keyboard designed for transit use. The DCC shall continuously display the message that the front signs are displaying except the emergency message when initiated.


2.2.6.4.6 Interconnection Cables: The system shall include all required signal interconnect cables. Signal connectors shall be polarized and cables shall have strain relief. 2.2.6.4.7 Message Programming Capability: (Amended) The destination sign system on the vehicle shall be re-programmable with the use of an industry standard USB flash drive. A hardware/software package necessary for wireless message transfer shall be provided to generate message lists for the destination sign system. If using the USB flash drive, a software package necessary to program USB flash drives shall be provided with three (3) USB flash drives included. Software package shall run on AUTHORITY approved version of Microsoft Windows. The programming software shall be “user friendly” in that the user interface is designed to have the following features:

a) Rational prompts for user input b) A tree or menu structure c) Require minimal printed documentation d) Facilitates ease of training e) Incorporates context-sensitive help features

It shall provide the capability of custom message writing by selection of preprogrammed standard variable width fonts and by creation of custom fonts by varying spacing between characters, words, or other message elements. It shall allow creation of graphic displays, with or without text; by selecting preprogrammed graphic sign images and by the use of multiple fonts within the same message allowing graphic symbols to be placed anywhere within the display area.

Vehicles shall be delivered with a pre-programmed list of destination sign messages, supplied by the AUTHORITY. The various signs on a Vehicle shall be programmable to display independent messages or the same messages. The destination sign system shall allow two destination messages and one public relations message to be pre-selected and the operator shall be able to change between the pre-selected destination messages without entering a new message code. Public relations messages shall be capable of being displayed alternately with the regular text and route messages or displayed separately. 2.2.6.4.8 Memory Capacity: A two line memory capacity of 27,000 to 40,000 message units of information is required. 2.2.6.4.9 Auto-Blanking: When the vehicle master run switch is in the “OFF” position, the entire display area of all destination signs shall automatically blank within ten minutes.


2.2.6.4.10 Destination Display Design: Sign displays shall be complete amber colored LED dot pixels. The LED’s shall be the only means of illumination of the sign message display area. The display elements shall operate in the static electricity environment generated during normal vehicle operation and satisfy a useful life of a minimum of 100,000 hours. 2.2.6.4.11 Vibration and Shock: The system shall be capable of withstanding a continuous 60-minute 1g-minimum vibration over a frequency range of 5 to 50 Hz without degradation. It shall also be capable of withstanding repeated 10g half sine pulse shocks for 10 milliseconds without degradation. 2.2.6.4.12 Power Input and Regulation: The system shall operate properly over a voltage range of 11 to 32 VDC. 2.2.6.4.13 FCC Compliance: The system shall comply with FCC Regulation Docket 20780 covering EMI and RFI emissions, and shall operate properly under the following conditions:

a) With signal and power cables routed as close as six inches from any receiver/transmitter cables.

b) With system hardware, including power and signal cables, mounted as close as

three feet from any antennas. 2.2.6.5 Accessibility Provisions: The design and construction of the vehicle shall be in accordance with all requirements defined in 49 CFR, Part 38, Subpart B: ADA Accessibility Specifications for Transportation Vehicles—Vehicles, Vans and Systems. Space and body structural provisions shall be provided at the front door of the vehicle to accommodate the mobility aid, loading ramp. The ramp and mechanism shall be protected from collision damage, damage from curbing the vehicle, corrosion, the entrance of water, sand and salt and objects deflected from the right of way. The mobility aid ramp shall provide safe, comfortable and rapid ingress and egress for passengers using mobility aid devices either from the street level or curb. The system shall be designed to operate in an urban environment service area where curb heights may reach 14 inches and varying degrees of road crown. The ramp shall be designed to protect the device from damage and persons on the sidewalk from injury during the extension and lowering phases of operation. The mobility aid ramp system shall not present a hazard, nor inconvenience to any passenger. The Contractor shall supply a mobility aid clearance drawing for AUTHORITY approval.

2.2.6.5.1 Design Requirements: The ramp shall support a load of 600 pounds, placed at the center of the ramp distributed over an area of 26 inches by 26 inches, with a safety factor of at least 3 based on the


ultimate strength of material. The transition from roadway or sidewalk and the transition from the vehicle floor to the ramp may be vertical without edge treatment up to ¼ inch. Changes in level greater than ¼-inch, but no more than ½-inch, shall be beveled with a slope no greater than 1:2. The loading platform shall be covered with a replaceable or renewable, non-skid material and shall be fitted with barriers at least 2 inches high to prevent the mobility aid devices from rolling off the ends or sides during loading or unloading. The ramp shall be firmly attached to the vehicle and no gap between the ramp and its sections or the vehicle shall exceed 5/8-inch. The ramp shall be furnished with anti-skid tape which has an adhesive backed laminate. The ramp shall not have protrusions from the surface greater than ¼-inch high; shall have a clear width of 30 inches. 2.2.6.5.2 Ramp Operation: The loading operation shall be under the surveillance and complete control of the operator. Stowing or deploying the ramp shall require two separate and distinct actions by the operator. A guarded master switch in the operator’s console shall disable ramp operation. The controls shall be simple to operate with no complex phasing operation required and should be integrated with the vehicle kneeling system to insure minimum ramp slope to street level. The four-way hazard warning lights shall be automatically activated when the ramp master switch is in the enabled or on position at the operator’s console. The ramp shall be incapable of stowing when a passenger is on the ramp. The safeguards incorporated into the ramps operation to prevent accidental stowing of the ramp with a passenger on the ramp shall not cause damage to the ramp or mechanism. The vehicle shall be prevented from moving during ramp system operation by a throttle and brake interlock. The device shall function without failure or adjustment other than normal maintenance for 500 cycles or 30,000 miles in all weather conditions encountered in the Boston climate. In the event of a ramp malfunction, the ramp shall be able to be manually deployed or stowed by the operator without the need for tools or equipment. 2.2.6.5.3 Mobility Aid Accommodations: (Amended) Two forward facing mobility aid, securement positions, as close to the front door ramp system as practical, shall be provided. Passenger seats in these positions may be replaced or modified to provide parking space and secure tie-downs for passengers with disabilities. AmSeCo Advanced Restraint System with Q-Straint Belt securement devices and optional seatbelts shall be of sufficient length to accommodate electrically powered mobility aids. Maneuvering room inside the vehicle shall accommodate easy travel for the passenger using a mobility aid device from the loading device through the vehicle to the designated parking area, and back out. No portion of the mobility aid device or its occupant shall protrude into the normal aisle of the vehicle when parked in the designated parking spaces. As a guide, no width dimension should be less than 34 inches. Areas requiring 90 degree turns of mobility aid devices should have a clearance arc dimension of no less than 45 inches and in the parking area where 180 degree turns are expected, space should be clear in a full 60-inch diameter circle. A vertical clearance of 12 inches above the floor surface should be provided on the outside of turning areas for the mobility aid device footrest clearance. It shall have a seatbelt able to secure around the mobility aid device and its occupant. The seatbelts shall include a retracting


device positioned to keep belts off the floor and allow for maneuvering of mobility aid device into position.

2.3.0 CHASSIS 2.3.1 PROPULSION SYSTEM

2.3.1.1 Vehicle Performance:

2.3.1.1.1 Power Requirements: The Emissions Control Diesel propulsion system and drive train shall provide power to enable the vehicle to meet the defined acceleration, top speed, and gradeability requirements. Engine, Diesel Particulate Filter and transmission shall be equipped with electronic controls. Sufficient excess power shall be available to operate all accessories. Power requirements shall be met using ULSD. 2.3.1.1.2 Top Speed: The vehicle shall be capable of a top speed of 65 mph on a straight, level road at GVWR with all accessories operating. 2.3.1.1.3 Gradeability: Gradeability requirements shall be met on grades with a surface friction coefficient of 0.3 and above at GVWR with all accessories operating. The power plant shall enable the vehicle to maintain a speed of 40 mph on a 2-1/2-percent grade and 7 mph on a 16-percent grade. 2.3.1.1.4 Acceleration: An average acceleration rate of at least 0.06g shall be achieved at GVWR between 0 and 15 mph. Acceleration measurement shall commence when the accelerator is depressed. The minimum acceleration rates are as follows:

Speed Time Elapsed (MPH) (Seconds) 10 5.0 20 10.8 30 20.0 40 31.0 50 62.0

2.3.1.1.5 Jerk Rate: Jerk, the rate of change of acceleration, shall be minimized throughout the acceleration/deceleration range and shall be no greater than 0.3g/second for a duration of a quarter-second or more. This requirement shall be achieved regardless of driver actions.


2.3.1.1.6 Operating Range: (Amended) The operating range of the vehicle run on the design operating profile shall be at least 350 miles utilizing CNG as a fuel.

2.3.1.2 Power Plant Mounting & Accessories: 2.3.1.2.1 Mounting: The power plant shall be mounted in a compartment in the rear of the vehicle. All engine and transmission mounting points shall be mechanically isolated with resilient mounts that resist oils and other engine compartment fluids, to minimize transfer of vibration to the body structure. 2.3.1.2.2 Service: (Amended) The power plant shall be arranged so that accessibility for all routine maintenance is assured. Access may be provided from under three passenger rear seats to service power plant. No special tools, other than dollies and hoists, shall be required to remove the power plant. Two 4M mechanics shall be able to remove, replace, and prepare the engine and transmission assembly for service in less than 20 total combined man-hours. The muffler, exhaust system, air cleaner, air compressor, starter, alternator, radiator, all accessories and any other component requiring service or replacement shall be easily removable and independent of the engine and transmission removal. For the CNG, all applicable safety placards for compressed gasses shall be applied to the appropriate areas that can affect service personnel while servicing. Contractor shall supply safety placard placement location information to the AUTHORITY during the pre-production meeting. Engine oil and the radiator filler caps shall be hinged to the filler neck and closed with spring pressure or positive locks. All fluid fill locations shall be clearly and permanently labeled to help ensure correct fluid is added and all fillers shall be easily accessible with standard funnels, pour spouts, and automatic dispensing equipment. The engine and transmission shall be equipped with self-locking dip sticks and permanent identification tags. Color-coded tags shall be applied on all fluid lines, within the engine compartment at the fittings, to identify all the different fluids carried in lines. The tags shall be made of heavy duty plastic, that are impervious to all fluids found in the engine compartment, and shall withstand steam cleaning. The contractors proposed tag and coding system shall be presented for review at the pre-production meeting. The engine and transmission shall be equipped with sufficient heavy-duty fuel and oil filters for efficient operation and to protect the engine and transmission between scheduled filter changes. Where possible, filters shall be of the spin-on, disposable type. A by-pass engine oil filter with a spin-on filter shall be installed. All filters shall be easily accessible and the filter bases shall be plumbed to assure correct reinstallation. Fuel and oil lines within the engine compartment shall be rigidly supported and shall be composed of steel tubing where practical except in locations where flexible lines are necessary. Flexible fluid lines shall be kept at a minimum and shall be as short as


practical. They shall be routed or shielded so that failure of a line shall not allow fuel or oil to spray or drain onto any component operable above the auto-ignition temperature of the fluid. Premium Flexible lines with standard crimped ends can be used with ratings as follows: GH100 / GH195 / FC355 / FC510 / 2807 PTFE. Hoses shall be individually supported and shall not touch one another or any part of the vehicle. 2.3.1.2.3 Accessories: (Amended) Engine-driven accessories shall be unit mounted for quick removal and repair and shall be mechanically driven by the engine to the maximum extent practicable. Accessory drive systems including belts shall operate without failure or unscheduled adjustment for 50,000 miles on the design operating profile. These accessories shall be driven at speeds sufficient to assure adequate system performance during extended periods of idle operation and low route speed portion of the design operating profile. The engine Belt guards shall be hinged at the bottom and removable at the bottom by removal of bolts/nuts. The fastening method at the top two securement points will be accomplished by and eyelet bolt which will be tethered to avoid loss and matching knurled nut/knob which can be removed by hand. By removal of the top two securement eyelet/knurled knobs the beltguard may be lowered down at the hinge point to allow access to the belts and other components. 2.3.1.2.4 Hydraulic Drive: Any accessory may be driven hydraulically. The hydraulic system shall demonstrate a mean time between repairs in excess of 50,000 miles. Hydraulic system service tasks shall be minimized and scheduled no more frequently than those of other major vehicle systems. All elements of the hydraulic system shall be easily accessible for service or unit replacement. Sensors in the hydraulic system shall indicate on the driver's diagnostic panel conditions of low hydraulic fluid level and low system operation pressure. Critical points in the hydraulic system shall be fitted with service ports so that portable diagnostic equipment may be connected or sensors for an off-board diagnostic system permanently attached to monitor system operation. All lines shall be compatible with the hydraulic fluid and be rated at a working pressure limit that is safely above the maximum pressures encountered by the system. Flexible lines shall be minimized in quantity and length. Lines of the same size and with the same fittings as those on other piping systems of the vehicle, but not interchangeable, shall be tagged or marked for use on the hydraulic system only. Hydraulic lines shall be individually and rigidly supported to prevent chafing damage, fatigue failures, and tension strain on the lines and fittings. The hydraulic system shall be configured and/or shielded so that failure of any flexible line shall not allow hydraulic fluid to spray or drain onto any component operable above the auto-ignition temperature of the fluid. A priority system shall prevent the loss of power steering during operation of the vehicle if other devices are also powered by the hydraulic system. The Contractor shall provide, during pre-production meetings, a design analysis with system calculations and temperature test reports to insure the fluid temperature are within the range of the fluid.


2.3.1.3 Power Plant: 2.3.1.3.1 Engine: (Amended) The heavy duty CNG fueled engine (shall be of a 6 cylinder Cummins, ISL-G, 280 HP 2010 with replaceable wet sleeve cylinders. The diesel engine shall be designed to operate for not less than 300,000 miles without major failure or significant deterioration. Components of the fuel injection and/or control system shall be designed to operate for not less than 150,000 miles without replacement or major service. Mileage intervals are based on the design operating profile. The engine shall be compliant with the year 2010 EPA Engine Certification emission standards for urban vehicle engines under the so-called "Pull Ahead" provisions effective October 1, 2002. The diesel engine shall also be compliant with the Urban Vehicle PM emission standard of 0.05 g/bhp-hr. The heavy duty CNG fueled engine shall meet all requirements of these technical specifications, when operating on transit fuel in the Boston area known as Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) specified and certified by the engine manufacturer and consistent with the vehicle CNG specification used by the AUTHORITY. The heavy duty CNG fueled engine shall be equipped with a microprocessor based electronic control system that complies with SAE J1708 and SAE J1939, Recommended Practice for Serial Data Communications Between Microcomputer Systems in Heavy Duty Vehicle Applications. The engine's electronic management system shall monitor operating conditions and provide instantaneous adjustments to optimize both engine and vehicle performance. The engine shall have onboard diagnostic capabilities, able to monitor vital function, store out of parameter conditions in memory, and communicate faults and vital conditions to service personnel. Trouble codes logged by the ECM shall be permanently retained in the ECM memory until removed with proper service equipment. The system must be equipped with two data link connections. One located in the engine compartment and the second located in the driver’s area. The system shall be reprogrammable to allow optimization of engine performance. In order to avoid potential warranty disputes during engine warranty period, initial performance settings shall only be changed with the authorization from vehicle and engine manufacturers. Data stored by said system shall be easily extractable via hard wire link and capable of transmission via the communications system. Conversely, the system shall be capable of similar modes of communications to upload various engine control settings inherent to the engine control system software architecture. Furthermore, the manufacturer shall provide the AUTHORITY with samples of pre-formatted engine performance/management reports (e.g. Fuel Management, Idle & RPM trip performance, etc.) featured in the proposed engine control system software architecture. The engine control system shall protect the engine against progressive damage. The system shall monitor conditions critical for safe operation and automatically derate power and/or speed and initiate engine shutdown as needed. The on-board diagnostic system shall trigger a visual and audible alarm to the operator when the engine control unit or the


fire suppression system detects a malfunction and the engine protection system is activated. Automatic shutdown shall occur within 10 seconds only when parameters established for the following functions are exceeded:

a) Coolant temperature b) Oil pressure c) Engine exhaust back pressure d) DPF temperature e) Engine compartment fire

An override switch, requiring constant depression, available to the operator shall allow an additional 30 seconds of engine operation before final engine shutdown. An engine fast idle device shall be controlled by a switch mounted on the dash accessible to the operator. The fast idle device shall operate only when the transmission is in neutral and the parking brake applied. The fast idle device shall have a setting of 900 RPM + 100/-50 RPM. To prevent the engine idling periods greater than five minutes when not be utilized in service an automatic engine idle shutdown shall be incorporated into the vehicle design. The feature shall be adjustable and controlled through the multiplexing system and only be disabled when the engine is started in the rear run configuration. Brass hexagon head plugs, with standard pipe threads, for vacuum and pressure gauge connections shall be installed in, or as near as possible to, the air intake and exhaust manifolds. The engine shall be equipped with dry-type air cleaner and serviceable element, of American manufacture and of correct capacity as recommended by the filter manufacturer to match the engine supplied. Air cleaner shall be furnished with a graduated filter restriction service indicator. The filter element shall be serviceable through an access panel. Air cleaner housing shall be clamped together or secured with a single wing nut, not clamped with multiple nuts. The air intake location shall be chosen to minimize the intake of dirt and dust. The starter circuit shall consist of a 24volt 120kJ asymmetrical electrochemical capacitor, and a high current carrying relay. High current cabling shall be 4/0 with a length not to exceed 6ft. Controls shall bring the capacitor in parallel with the batteries just prior to a start attempt and shall isolate the capacitor from the batteries three minutes after the vehicle has been running, insuring the capacitor is fully charged. The engine starter shall be protected by an interlock that prevents its engagement when the engine is running.


2.3.1.3.2 Auxiliary Heater: (Amended) A Wabasto NGW 300 auxiliary CNG fuel fired heater shall be provided to preheat the engine coolant and to supplement the heat supplied by the engine. The auxiliary heater shall function as a preheater capable of raising engine coolant, and coolant in the Vehicle heating system from –100F to 1000F within 30 minutes. The heating requirements of Section 2.3.10, Interior Climate Control Capacity & Performance, may be attained with the auxiliary heating operating in conjunction with the engine. Operation of the heater shall be thermostatically protected and the heater shall be equipped with safety devices to prevent: over fueling, overheating due to loss of coolant or water pump failure, and operation during low battery voltage conditions. An air cleaner shall be fitted to the burner air inlet. The heater will be electronically started by a remote mounted switch, and equipped with a green on/off LED mounted by or above the driver. All motors used in the heater system must be provided with fully sealed bearings. The heater shall be programmed for 24-Volt power. All electrical connectors shall be water tight and corrosion resistant. The heater shall be plumbed to circulate coolant directly to and from the engine. This coolant loop shall allow for rapid engine preheating and optimum coolant flow at all times. The auxiliary heater shall be electronically controlled with appropriate diagnostics for troubleshooting. Operational and fault data shall be retrievable through and IBM compatible PC that attaches to the controller at the heater. A green LED light, approximately 1-inch diameter, shall be mounted on the outside of the auxiliary heater compartment door to indicate when the auxiliary heater is operating. This light shall blink error codes if the auxiliary heating system malfunctions. 2.3.1.3.3 Cooling System: (Amended) Temperature of operating fluids on the vehicle shall be controlled by a cooling system(s). The cooling system shall be sized to maintain fluids at safe, continuous operating temperatures during the most severe operations possible with the vehicle loaded to GVWR and with ambient temperatures up to 115F. The engine shall be cooled by a water-based, pressure-type, cooling system that does not permit boiling or coolant loss during the operations described above. Engine thermostats shall be easily accessible for replacement. The engine cooling system shall be equipped with a properly sized water filter with a spin-on, disposable, non-chromate element filter. Lever operated ¼ turn valves shall allow filter replacement without coolant loss. The coolant shall be protected from freezing with ethylene glycol anti-freeze to a minimum of -20 F. Lever operated ¼ turn valves shall permit complete shutoff of both lines for the HVAC system and the driver's heating and defroster units. All low points in the water-based cooling system shall be equipped with drain cocks. Air vent valves shall be fitted at high points in the cooling system unless it can be demonstrated that the system is self-purging. A sight glass to determine satisfactory engine coolant level shall be provided and shall be accessible by opening one of the engine compartment's access doors. A spring-loaded, or lever type valve to safely release pressure or vacuum in the cooling system shall be


provided. The safety release valve and the water filler shall be no more than 60 inches above the ground and both shall be accessible through the same door. The radiator shall be of durable corrosion-resistant construction with bolted-on removable tanks. The radiator shall be a Young Touchstone 10 fins per inch & Tube/Bar & Plate designed so as a 2M mechanic can gain access to a substantial portion of both the outside and the side facing the engine for the purpose of cleaning the radiator in five minutes or less. The design of the radiator shall be such that it tends to prevent or shed dirt buildup from the fin area. Radiator shall be appropriately sized and designed to withstand the thermal fatigue and vibration associated with the installation. No heat producing components or climate control system components shall be mounted between the engine cooling air intake aperture and the radiator. Radiator piping and fittings shall be stainless steel or brass tubing and if practical, rubber hoses shall be eliminated. Necessary hoses shall be premium, silicone rubber type with 4-ply polyester fabric reinforcement that are impervious to all vehicle fluids. All hoses shall be secured with doubled premium, stainless steel, and constant-torque type clamps with a collared screwdriver head. The cooling fan speed shall be regulated in direct proportion to coolant temperature to minimize fan noise and allow rapid engine warm-up. A comprehensive cooling system performance analysis that demonstrates compliance with these requirements shall be delivered during design review for approval by the AUTHORITY. A brushless, seal-less marine pump shall provide water circulation to the driver's heater/defroster and HVAC unit. The pump may be a either submerged rotor or magnetic drive type. It shall be activated whenever heat is called for or when the auxiliary heater is operating. Isolation of the pump for service shall be with ¼ turn valves. 2.3.1.3.4 Transmission: The transmission shall be Allison B400R or an approved equal multiple speed, automatic electronically controlled shift with torque converter and integral hydraulic retarder. A 3M mechanic, with optional assistance, shall be able to remove, replace, and prepare the transmission assembly for service in less than 16 total combined man-hours. The transmission shall operate for 300,000 miles on the design operating profile without replacement or major repairs. The transmission shall be equipped with a rebuildable and cleanable oil cooler. The transmission shall be shifted from the operator's left side area by means of electronic push button control. The electronic controls shall be capable of receiving inputs from the throttle, shift selector, engine, and transmission. Communication between the transmission and other electronic controlled vehicle systems shall be made using the SAE J1939 Recommended Practice communication link. Electronic controls shall be compatible with either 12 or 24 volt systems, provide consistent shift quality, and compensate for changing conditions such as variations in vehicle weight and engine power. The electronically controlled transmission shall have on-board diagnostic capabilities, able to monitor functions, store out-of-parameter conditions in memory, and


communicate faults and vital conditions to service personnel. Trouble codes logged by the transmission Electronic Control Unit shall be permanently retained in the memory until removed by the proper service equipment. The system shall be equipped with two data link connections suitably protected against dirt and moisture, one located in the engine compartment and the second in the operator’s area. The retarder braking effort shall be minimal when the throttle peddle is released. The remaining effort of the retarder braking shall be activated in two stages when the service brake pedal is depressed. The retarder shall be fully activated before the friction brakes apply. Brake lights shall illuminate when the retarder is activated by the brake pedal. The retarder shall be enabled by a driver-controlled switch. When the retarder is ON, the anti-lock system shall control retarder activation to control wheel slip. Vehicle shall be equipped with a system that prevents the transmission from shifting from neutral into reverse or any forward gear unless the foot brake is applied and sufficient air pressure is available to prevent movement of the vehicle. A decal describing the operation shall be affixed to the operators console in the area of the transmission control. The transmission shall have an auto neutral feature that shall cause it to automatically and immediately shift into "Neutral" whenever the transmission is left in gear and the parking brake is applied. This system shall also automatically shift the transmission to "Neutral," after 5-minutes, whenever the exit door brake interlock is applied. The transmission shall be fitted with the filters, and the transmission and cooler system shall be filled with the Transynd transmission fluid.

2.3.1.4 Fuel System: (Amended) (See Attachment #2) 2.3.1.5 Emissions:

2.3.1.5.1 Gas & Smoke: (Amended) The heavy duty CNG engine shall be in compliance with the Urban Vehicle emissions standards as promulgated by the EPA. The engine shall have a certified exhaust emissions profile. The engine must meet or exceed the Federal Aviation Administration Voluntary Airport Low Emissions Standards for new vehicles. 2.3.1.5.2 Exhaust System: (Amended) Exhaust gases and waste heat shall be discharged on the street side rear corner of the roof straight to the rear. The exhaust pipe shall be of sufficient height to prevent exhaust gases and waste heat from discoloring or causing heat deformation to the vehicle. The entire exhaust system shall be adequately shielded to prevent heat damage to any vehicle component. The exhaust outlet shall be designed to minimize rain, snow or water generated from high-pressure washing systems from entering into the exhaust pipe and causing damage to the Catalytic Converter.


The Catalytic Converter shall be installed with the appropriate engine mounted electronic monitoring device, which shall provide visual warning and failure indication lights. The Catalytic Converter shall be fully compatible with the engine and vehicle to provide unimpeded operation as a critical component of the exhaust system. The exhaust pipe from the turbo to the Catalytic Converter inlet shall be insulated to provide the highest possible exhaust gas temperature. The Contractor shall provide the AUTHORITY appropriate documentation that the Catalytic Converter is installed and integrated in accordance with the engine manufacturer requirements. The Catalytic Converter shall be designed and constructed to minimize maintenance and repair tasks. The Catalytic Converter shall be a cleanable canister design and shall require no longer than 2 hours to be removed and replaced by a 4M mechanic. The engine control shall be programmed to include related alarm settings coordinated with the electronic monitoring device to relay appropriate engine commands relative to backpressure and exhaust temperature. Alarm settings shall be reflective of two sets of conditions regarding "Check Engine" light and engine de-rating to support maximum protection of the engine. 2.3.1.5.3 Exterior Noise: Airborne noise generated by the vehicle and measured from either side shall not exceed 83 dba under full power acceleration when operated at or below 35 mph at curb weight and just prior to transmission up shift. The maximum noise level generated by the vehicle pulling away from a stop at full power shall not exceed 83 dba. The vehicle-generated noise at curb idle shall not exceed 65 dba. If the noise contains an audible discrete frequency, a penalty of 5 dba shall be added to the sound level measured. All noise readings shall be taken 50 feet from, and perpendicular to, the centerline of the vehicle with all accessories operating. Instrumentation, test sites, and other general requirements shall be in accordance with SAE Standard J366. The pull-away test shall begin with the front bumper even with the microphone. The curb idle test shall be conducted with the rear bumper even with the microphone.

2.3.2. FINAL DRIVE

2.3.2.1 General Requirements: (Amended) The vehicle shall be driven by a single heavy-duty Arvin Meritor, single reduction drive, full floating rear axle. The rear axle shall be of separate carrier housing construction with a load rating sufficient for the vehicle loaded to GVWR. Transfer of gear noise to the vehicle interior shall be minimized. The driven axle shall operate for 200,000 miles on the design operating profile without repairs. All sealed surfaces shall be replaceable. The drive shaft shall be guarded to prevent it striking the floor of the vehicle or the ground in the event of a tube or universal joint failure. 2.3.2.2 Hubodometer: The Contractor shall furnish and install one Stemco (less tenths) drive-less type hubodometer on the curbside rear axle flange. The Hubodometer shall have the following minimum


requirements: six digits, 3/16- high by 1/8-inch wide numerals, Lexan cover with steel base, tamperproof and lifetime lubrication.

2.3.3 SUSPENSION

2.3.3.1 General Requirements: The front axle shall be a non-driving solid beam with a load rating sufficient for the vehicle loaded to GVWR. The center axle shall be non-drive rigid, with a hollow center axle with a load rating sufficient for the vehicle loaded to GVWR. Both the front, center, and rear axle suspensions shall be pneumatic type. The basic suspension system shall last the life of the vehicle without major overhaul or replacement. Items such as shock absorbers, radius rods, Lateral rods, leveling valves and air springs shall be easily and quickly replaceable by a 2M mechanic. Adjustment points shall be minimized and shall not be subject to a loss of adjustment in service. A maximum of one of the four radius rod on each axle shall be of adjustable length. Necessary adjustments shall be easily accomplished without removing or disconnecting the components. If radius rods and or radius rod ends are exposed to road hazards / obstructions, appropriate provisions must be made to ensure a radius rod or rod eyelet failure do not result in a loss of steering control. 2.3.3.2 Springs & Shock Absorbers:

2.3.3.2.1 Travel: (Amended) The suspension system shall permit a minimum wheel travel of 3 inches in jounce and 3 inches in rebound. Elastomeric bumpers shall be provided at the limit of jounce travel. Rebound travel may be limited by elastomeric bumpers or hydraulically within the shock absorbers. Suspensions shall incorporate appropriate devices for automatic height control so that regardless of load the vehicle height relative to the centerline of the wheels does not change more than +/- 1/2 inch at any point. 2.3.3.2.2 Kneeling: (Amended) A driver-actuated kneeling device shall lower the curbside front of the vehicle during loading or unloading operations regardless of load to a step up from street level not to exceed 12 inches measured at the longitudinal centerline of the front door. Brake and throttle interlock shall prevent movement when the vehicle is kneeled. The vehicle shall kneel and rise at a maximum rate of 1.25 inches per second at essentially a constant rate. After kneeling, the vehicle shall rise within 5 seconds to a height permitting the vehicle to resume service, when the interlocks release and shall rise to the correct operating height within 7 seconds. During the lowering and raising operation, the maximum acceleration shall not exceed 0.2g and the jerk shall not exceed 0.3g/second measured on the front door step tread. An indicator visible to the driver shall be illuminated during the kneeling operation and shall remain illuminated until the vehicle is raised to a height adequate for safe street travel. The time to kneel and rise shall be adjustable from outside the vehicle, and shall require hand tools. The adjustment shall allow cycle times up to 5 seconds. Visual and audible warning devices that operate with the kneeling system shall be included. One amber LED light shall be installed near the


entrance door and flash instantaneously upon activation of kneeling system and remain operational until system is deactivated. The audible alarm shall activate instantaneously upon activation of the kneeling system and remain on only during the lowering portion of the kneeling cycle. 2.3.3.2.3 Damping: Vertical damping of the suspension system shall be accomplished by adjustable Koni heavy duty hydraulic shock absorbers mounted to the suspension arms or axles and attached to an appropriate location on the chassis. Damping shall be sufficient to control vehicle motion to 2 cycles or less after hitting road perturbations. Shock absorbers shall maintain their effectiveness for at least 50,000 miles in normal service, and each unit shall be replaceable by a 2M mechanic in less than 15 minutes. The attachment points of the shock absorbers shall maintain their effectiveness for the life of the vehicle. 2.3.3.2.4 Lubrication: All elements of steering, suspension, and drive systems requiring scheduled lubrication shall be provided with grease fittings conforming to SAE standard J534, (Zerk Fitting). Zerk fittings shall be located for ease of inspection and shall be accessible with a standard grease gun without flexible hose end from a pit or with the vehicle on a hoist. Each element requiring lubrication shall have its own grease fitting with a relief path. Lubricant specified shall be standard for all elements on the vehicle serviced by standard fittings.

2.3.4 STEERING 2.3.4.1 Strength: (Amended) Fatigue life of all steering components shall, as a design objective, exceed 1,000,000 miles. No element of the steering system shall fail before suspension system components when one of the tires strikes a severe road hazard. Inadvertent alterations of steering as a result of striking road hazards are steering failures. 2.3.4.2 Turning Radius: (Amended) Outside body corner turning radius shall not exceed 44.5 feet. 2.3.4.3 Turning Effort: (Amended) The steering wheel shall be no less than 19.5 inches in diameter and shall be shaped for firm grip with comfort for long periods of time. The steering wheel shall be removable with a standard or universal puller. The steering wheel shall be the color black. The steering column shall be provided with a Douglas or approved equal tilt-type design and telescoping, with four positions, for maximum adaptability to individual operators. When steering column location is selected a positive lock shall engage to prevent inadvertent movement of column. Hydraulically assisted power steering shall be provided. The steering gear shall be a ZF integral type steering box with flexible lines minimized. Steering effort applied by the driver shall not exceed 10-pounds with the front wheels straight ahead to 10º right or left turn.


Steering torque may increase to 30-pounds when the wheels are approaching the steering stops. Steering effort shall be measured with the vehicle at SLW, stopped with the brakes released and the engine at normal idling speed on clean, dry, level, commercial asphalt pavement and the tires inflated to recommended pressure, with a full complement of fuel, oil, and coolant. Power steering failure shall not result in loss of steering control. With the vehicle in operation, the steering effort shall not exceed 70 pounds at the steering wheel rim and perceived free play in the steering system shall not materially increase as a result of power assist failure. Gearing shall require no more than seven turns of the steering wheel lock-to-lock. Caster angle shall be selected to provide a tendency for the return of the front wheels to the straight position with minimal assistance from the driver.

2.3.5 BRAKES

2.3.5.1 Service Brakes:

2.3.5.1.1 Actuation: (Amended) Service brakes shall be controlled and actuated by an air system. Force to activate the brake pedal control shall be an essentially linear function of the vehicle deceleration rate and shall not exceed 70 pounds at a point 7 inches above the heel point of the pedal to achieve maximum emergency braking. All brakes are to be fully self-automatic, self- adjusting Arvin Meritor disc brakes. 2.3.5.1.2 Friction Material: (Amended) The entire service brake system, excluding friction material, shall have design overhaul or replacement life of at least 30,000 miles when running on the design operating profile with the transmission retarder activated. Friction material shall be non-asbestos type. 2.3.5.1.3 Hubs & Drums: Wheel bearing seals shall run on replaceable, wear surfaces. Wheel bearing and hub seals shall not leak or weep lubricant for 100,000 miles when running on the design operating profile. Oil filled hubs are not acceptable. 2.3.5.1.4 Air System: (Amended) The vehicle air system shall operate all accessories and the braking system with reserve capacity in accordance with FMVSS 121. The engine-driven WABCO air compressor shall be sized to charge the air system from 40 psi to the governor cutoff pressure in less than 3 minutes while not exceeding the engine's fast idle speed. Regardless of the system's air pressure, idle up to the rated engine speed shall be available to the driver with the transmission in neutral and the parking brake applied. Air lines, except necessary flexible lines, shall conform to the installation and material requirements of SAE Standard J844-Type 1 for copper tubing with standard, brass, flared or ball sleeve fittings, or SAE Standard J844-Type 3B for nylon tubing if not subject to temperatures over 200º F. Accessory and other non-critical lines may use Type 3A


tubing. Nylon tubing shall be installed in accordance with the following color-coding standards:

a) Green Indicates primary brakes and supply b) Red: Indicates secondary brakes c) Brown: Indicates parking brake d) Yellow: Indicates compressor governor signal e) Grey: Indicates accelerator, (if used) f) Black: Indicates accessories g) Orange: Indicates fuel.

Line supports shall prevent movement, flexing, tension strain, and vibration. Copper, lines shall be supported by looms, or “P” clamps to prevent the lines from touching one another or any component of the vehicle. To the extent practical and before installation, the lines shall be pre-bent on a fixture that prevents tube flattening or excessive local strain. Copper lines shall be bent only once at any point, including pre-bending and installation. Rigid lines shall be supported at no more than 5-foot intervals. Nylon lines may be grouped and shall be supported at no more than 2-foot intervals. The compressor discharge line between power plant and body-mounted equipment shall be flexible convoluted copper or stainless steel line, or may be flexible Teflon hose with a braided stainless steel jacket. Other lines necessary to maintain system reliability shall be flexible Teflon hose with a braided stainless steel jacket. End fittings shall be standard SAE or JIC brass or steel, flanged, reusable, swivel type fittings. Premium hoses of alternative construction may be used with specific approval of the AUTHORITY. Flexible hoses shall be as short as practical and individually supported at no more than 2-foot intervals and shall not touch one another or any part of the vehicle. Flexible lines shall be supported at 2-foot intervals or less. Air, lines shall be cleaned and blown out before installation and shall be installed to minimize air leaks. All air, lines shall be sloped toward a reservoir and routed to prevent water traps. Air lines routed through the understructure shall be protected via an environmentally sealed cover plate. Grommets shall protect the air lines at all points where they pass through understructure components. The bus air system shall operate the air-powered accessories and the braking system with reserve capacity. New buses shall not leak down more than 5 psi over a 15-minute period of time as indicated on the dash gauge. Provision shall be made to apply shop air to the vehicle air systems using a standard tire inflation type valve. These valves shall be conveniently located in the engine compartment and in the front of the vehicle, and shall include a 3/8 FIP fitting ahead of the tire inflation valve. All air reservoirs shall meet the requirements of SAE Standard J10 and shall be equipped with clean-out plugs and guarded or flush type drain valves. These valves and any automatic moisture ejector valves shall be protected from road hazards by major structural members. Reservoirs shall be sloped toward the drain valve. The air system shall be protected by a pressure relief valve set at 175 psi and shall be equipped with check valves and pressure protection valves to assure partial operation in


case of line failures. Tee fitting shall be installed in all airlines regulated by an air pressure regulator for testing for proper pressure. The vehicle shall be equipped with a spin-on cartridge type air dryer, Brake Master Turbo-2000. The air dryer shall prevent accumulation of moisture in the air system, rated for transit vehicle applications, and sized to meet all the requirements of the air system. Dryer purge time shall be compatible with the air compressor unload time to guarantee elimination of moisture and all contaminants from the air system. The Contractor shall provide test data indicating that the performance of the air system conforms to the requirements at the pre-production meeting. The air-dryer, mounting, location shall be protected by a dust shield. With the exception of the aforementioned dust shield no other vehicle equipment shall require removal to service the air dryer. Dryer installation shall conform to the original manufacturer’s recommendations. The air dryer shall be desiccant type, with electrically heated drain. Heater device shall be thermostatically controlled. The air dryer system shall require approval of the AUTHORITY at the pre-production meeting.

2.3.5.2 Parking Brake: The parking/emergency brake shall comply to FMVSS-121 and shall hold a vehicle stationary headed up or down with a full load on a 20 percent grade.

The parking brake shall be capable of stopping a vehicle within a distance of 60 feet while the vehicle is moving at a speed of 20 miles per hour on a dry, level road. It shall employ a suitable locking device designed to insure that the vehicle is held stationary. The vehicle shall be equipped with an emergency parking brake release device in order to permit the moving of a vehicle from a hazardous position. This device shall be readily operated by a person seated in the driver's seat and its emergency position and its method of operation shall be clearly indicated. The device shall be operable only while the control is held down. 2.3.5.3 Anti-Skid Braking System (ABS): (Amended) The vehicles shall be equipped with the Wabco or AUTHORITY approved ABS system. ABS shall control all wheels with dual controllers, (2 wheels at a time). A warning light that would indicate to the operator that the ABS system malfunctioned shall be provided.

2.3.6 GENERAL CHASSIS 2.3.6.1 Wheels & Tires:

2.3.6.1.1 Wheels: (Amended) Wheels and rims shall be ten hole, aluminum Dura-Bright, ventilated tubeless hub piloted with shouldered studs. All wheels shall be interchangeable and shall be removable without a puller. Wheels shall be compatible with tires in size and load-carrying capacity. Front wheels and tires shall be balanced as an assembly. Rear wheels must have sufficient spacing between dual tires to permit the use of skid chains. Wheel nuts shall be torque to the manufacturer’s specification with Taletell tabs of an inch size on all lug nuts.


2.3.6.1.2 Tires: Tires shall be suitable low profile radial tires for the conditions of transit service and sustained operation at the maximum speed capability of the vehicle. Load on any tire at GVWR shall not exceed the tire supplier's rating. The Contractor shall apply an approved lubricant to each rim prior to mounting the tire assembly. The tires shall be so mounted that the position of the valve stem will locate the tire brand number inward, except the outside rear which shall be outward. The valve stems shall be those recommended by the tire manufacture or approved equal, approximately 3" long with 31º bend. The rear wheel tire stems shall be aligned opposite each other at the rim opening to permit ease of service and fitted with extensions as needed to ensure ease of inside tire inflation. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to or loss of tires while they are under the Contractor's control.

2.3.6.1.3. Spare Tires: The Contractor shall supply one spare wheel with a mounted tire for each vehicle. The spare tires and wheels shall be shipped directly to the AUTHORITY’s Central Stockroom in Boston, Massachusetts.

2.3.6.2 Bumper System:

2.3.6.2.1 Location: (Amended) Bumpers shall provide impact protection for the front and rear of the vehicle with the top of the rear bumper not to exceed 31.7 inches above the ground and the front bumper not to exceed 15.1 inches above the ground. The bumpers shall wrap around the vehicle to the extent practical without exceeding allowable vehicle width. 2.3.6.2.2 Front Bumper: No part of the vehicle, including the bumper, shall be damaged as a result of a 5-mph impact of the vehicle at curb weight with a fixed, flat barrier perpendicular to the vehicle's longitudinal centerline. The bumper shall return to its pre-impact shape within 10 minutes of the impact. The bumper shall protect the vehicle from damage, as a result of a: 6.5 mph impact at any point by the striker defined in FMVSS #581 loaded to 4,000 pounds parallel to the longitudinal centerline of the vehicle; and a, 5.5 mph impact into the corners at a 30º angle to the longitudinal centerline of the vehicle. The energy absorption system of the bumper shall be independent of every power system of the vehicle and shall not require service or maintenance in normal operation during the service life of the vehicle. The flexible portion of the bumper may increase the overall vehicle length specified in Subsection 2.1.9.1.1 by no more than 6 inches. The bumper material shall not discolor when exposed to normal road grit, exhaust, cleaning agents, vehicle fluids, and other material contacted during normal vehicle operation.


2.3.6.2.3 Rear Bumper: The rear bumper and its solid mounting shall provide impact protection to the vehicle at curb weight from a 2-mph impact with a fixed, flat barrier perpendicular to the longitudinal centerline of the vehicle. The bumper shall return to its pre-impact shape within 10 minutes of the impact. When using a yard tug with a smooth, flat plate bumper two feet wide contacting the horizontal centerline of the rear bumper, the bumper shall provide protection at speeds up to 5 mph, over pavement discontinuities up to one (1) inch high, and at accelerations up to 2 mph/second. The rear bumper shall protect the vehicle, when impacted by the striker defined in FMVSS #581 loaded to 4000 pounds, at 4 mph parallel to, or up to a 30 angle to the longitudinal centerline of the vehicle. The rear bumper shall be shaped to preclude unauthorized riders standing on the bumper. The bumper shall be independent of all power systems of the vehicle and shall not require service or maintenance in normal operation during the service life of the vehicle. Any flexible portion of the bumper may increase the overall vehicle length specified in Subsection 2.1.9.1.1 by no more than 6 inches. The Contractor shall design the bumper to provide maximum protection to the vehicles engine in addition to the above requirements. 2.3.6.2.4 Bumper Material: (Amended) Bumper material shall be corrosion-resistant. Visible surfaces shall be bright, black. These qualities shall be sustained throughout the service life of the vehicle.

2.3.7 Electrical System:

2.3.7.1 General Requirements: (Amended) The electrical system shall provide and distribute power to ensure satisfactory performance of all electrical components. The Contractor shall provide, as part of the Pilot testing in Anniston, for AUTHORITY approval a comprehensive analysis of the electrical system load and performance relative to the battery and charging systems. The system shall supply a nominal 12 and/or 24 volts of direct current, and may employ alternating current up to 220 volts (or more as required by the system) provided that it does not present an electrical shock hazard. Electrical power provided for the radio compartment shall be 12 and 24 volts, DC. The power generating system shall be rated sufficiently higher than the total possible electrical load to maintain the charge on the batteries at all operating conditions including the engine at idle. All circuits and circuit branches, except starter solenoid, headlamp and battery 12 & 24-volt feeds to the operator’s apparatus panel, shall be protected by manual reset circuit breakers. Manual reset circuit breakers that are critical to the operation of the vehicle shall be mounted with visible indication of open circuits. The exceptions shall be protected by automatic reset circuit breakers. Fuses shall be used only where it can be demonstrated that circuit breakers are not practical and inline type fuses shall not be used. Fuses which are utilized shall be mounted inside of fuse blocks, have protective covers, be easily accessible for replacement and there designation clearly identified. Circuit breakers shall be sufficiently rated to protect the associated wiring from burning due to excess current.

Redundant grounds shall be used for all electrical equipment, except where it can be demonstrated that redundant grounds are not feasible or practical. One ground may be the


vehicle body and framing. Grounds shall not be carried through hinges, bolted joints (except those specifically designed as electrical connectors), or power plant mountings. Electrical equipment shall not be located in an environment that will reduce the performance or shorten the life of the component or electrical system. Major wiring harnesses shall not be located under the vehicle floor, and under floor wiring shall be eliminated to the extent practical. Wiring and electrical equipment necessarily located under the vehicle shall be insulated from water, heat, corrosion, and mechanical damage via an environmentally protective cover.

2.3.7.1.1 Modular Design: Design of the electrical system shall be modular so that each major component, apparatus panel, or wiring bundle is easily separable with standard hand tools or by means of connectors. Each module, except the main body wiring harness, shall be removable and replaceable in less than 30 minutes by a 3M mechanic. Power plant wiring shall be an independent wiring module. Replacement of the engine compartment wiring module(s) shall not require pulling wires through any bulkhead or removing any terminals from the wires. 2.3.7.1.2 Wiring & Terminals: (Amended) All power and ground wiring shall have double electrical insulation, shall be waterproof, and shall conform to specification requirements of SAE Recommended Practice J1127, J1128 and J1292. Double insulation shall be maintained as close to the junction box, electrical compartment, or terminals as possible. Chassis grounds shall be made on a non painted surface and covered with dielectric grease. Wiring shall be grouped, number stamped every two feet, and color-coded. Wiring harnesses shall not contain wires of different voltages unless all wires within the harness are insulated for the highest voltage present in the harness. Kinking, grounding at multiple points, stretching, and exceeding minimum bend radius shall be prevented. Strain-relief fittings shall be provided at points where wiring enters all electrical compartments. Grommets or other protective material shall be installed at points where wiring penetrates metal structures outside of electrical enclosures. Wiring supports shall be protective and non-conductive at areas of wire contact and shall not be damaged by heat, water, solvents, or chafing. All wiring harnesses over five feet long and containing at least five wires shall include 10 percent (minimum two) excess wires for spares. This requirement for spare wires does not apply to data links and/or communication cables. Wiring length shall allow end terminals to be replaced twice without pulling, stretching, or replacing the wire. Large wires such as battery cables and terminals shall be crimped according to connector manufacturer’s recommendations. The manufacturer may also provide techniques for soldering wires only if the wire is not stiffened above the terminal and no flux residue remains on the terminal. Battery cable connectors shall be crimped and soldered. All wiring connectors outside of junction boxes shall be Deutsch and Weather-pack connectors. All other exposed terminals will be coated with dielectric grease. Terminals


shall be crimped, corrosion-resistant and full ring type or interlocking lugs, protected with glue type heat shrink. When using pressure type screw terminal strips, stranded wire only shall be used. Insulation clearance shall ensure wires have a minimum of “visible clearance” and a maximum of two times the conductor diameter or 1/16-inch, whichever is less. When using shielded or coaxial cable, upon stripping of the insulation, the metallic braid shall be free from frayed strands that can penetrate the insulation of the inner wires. All wiring that requires shielding shall meet the following minimum requirements. A shield shall be generated by connecting to a ground, which is sourced from a power distribution vehicle bar or chassis. A shield shall be connected at one location only, typically at one end of the cable. However, certain standards or special requirements, such as SAE J1939 or RF applications, have separate shielding techniques that shall also be used as applicable. Note: A shield grounded at both end forms a ground loop, which can cause intermittent control or faults. When using shielded or coaxial cable, upon stripping of the insulation, the metallic braid shall be free from frayed strands, which can penetrate the insulation of the inner wires. To prevent the introduction of noise, the shield shall not be connected to the common side of a logic circuit. Ultra-sonic and T-splices may be used with 7 AWG or smaller wire. When a T-splice is used it shall meet these additional requirements: include a mechanical clamp in addition to solder on the splice; the wire supports no mechanical load in the area of the splice; and the wire is supported to prevent flexing. All splicing shall be staggered in the harness so that no two splices are positioned in the same location within the harness. For wiring harness connectors, pins shall be removable, crimp contact type of the correct size, and rated for the wire being terminated. All supply-side terminations shall end in a socket, not a pin. Unused pin positions shall be sealed with sealing plugs. Adjacent connectors shall either use opposing pin genders, different insert orientations, or different connectors to prevent incorrect connections. All cable connectors shall be placed to provide adequate space for ease of removal and disconnection. All electrical connectors subjected to environmental exposure outside the passenger compartment shall be corrosion resistant and splash proof.

2.3.7.1.3 Junction Boxes: All relays, controllers, flashers, manual and automatic resetting circuit breakers, and other electrical components should be mounted in easily accessible junction boxes. The boxes shall be sealed to prevent moisture from normal sources, including engine compartment cleaning. Boxes shall prevent fire that may occur inside the box from propagating outside the box. The components and circuits in each box shall be identified and their locations recorded on a schematic drawing permanently glued to or printed on the inside of the box cover or door. The drawing shall be protected from oil, grease, fuel, and abrasion. The front junction box shall be completely serviceable from the driver's seat, vestibule, or from outside.


2.3.7.2 Electrical Components: 2.3.7.2.1 General Requirements: All electrical components, including switches, relays, flashers, and circuit breakers, shall be heavy-duty designs. These components shall be longest lasting, commercially available, designed to last the service life of the vehicle and shall be replaceable in less than 5 minutes by a 4M mechanic. Sockets of plug-in components shall be polarized where required for proper function and the components shall be positively retained. Any manual reset circuit breakers critical to the operation of the vehicle shall be mounted in a location convenient to the operator and shall be visible that the circuit breaker has tripped and needs to be reset. All electric motors, except cranking motors, shall be heavy-duty brushless, type, with a constant duty rating of no less than 40,000 hours. Electric motors shall be located in areas for easy replacement and except for the cranking motor, shall be replaceable in less than 15 minutes by a 4M mechanic. Electronic circuit protection for the cranking motor shall be provided to prevent engaging of the motor for more than 30 seconds at a time. To the extent of practicality electrical components shall be installed in centralized areas, with protective covers installed on all components excluding circuit breakers. All components shall be clearly identified by permanent identification tags attached to the vehicle. 2.3.7.2.2 Multiplex, Programmable Logic Control System: (Amended) The vehicle shall be equipped with an intelligent network system that will have the ability to communicate with various modules located throughout the vehicle. The power supply to the intelligent network system shall be isolated to prevent avoiding any ground noise. The communication network shall utilize the SAE J1939 communication protocol. The system shall be capable of interfacing with the communication protocols utilized by the entire vehicle’ systems (e.g. engine, transmission, HVAC and brakes). Interruption of the communication signal shall cause the Main Vehicle Controller (MVC) to direct communications and annunciate the failure to the driver via the tell tale LED warning lamp. The system shall be so designed to significantly reduce the connectors, circuit breakers and wiring harnesses of the vehicle. It shall have the capability to quickly trouble-shoot electrical failures for the mechanic and notify maintenance personnel when an electrical component has failed. The components of the multiplex system shall be of modular design, providing ease of replacement by maintenance personnel. The modules shall be easily accessible for trouble-shooting electrical failures and performing system maintenance. Each module shall be shielded to prevent interference by EMI and RFI; and shall utilize LED’s to indicate circuit integrity and assist in rapid circuit diagnostics and verification of the load and wiring integrity. All individual loads that require a maximum current of 10 amperes continuous or shall be driven directly form a multiplex module without the use of relays. Selected individual multiplex system outputs should be capable of driving loads up to 30 Amperes continuously with the use of relays. Output of MPX modules shall be protected against over current and short circuits.


Wiring for data vehicle and node module power shall consist of three, 22 gauge or larger, UL approved, shielded, twisted pairs. A schematic drawing identifying all circuitry controlled at that location shall be permanently mounted or printed on the inside of each compartment containing a Multiplex module. The drawing shall be protected from oil, grease, fuel and abrasion. Ten percent (10%) spare input and output shall be provided at each I/O location. Wiring used for multiplexing shall be stamped with the address of the corresponding I/O location. The systems shall be equipped with a 32K byte diagnostic logger which will collect system anomalies. The logger shall provide monitoring capability of all information broadcast to the multiplex system via the J1939 compunction data loop and pertinent information of input/output failures. The control system shall be equipped to accommodate a wireless diagnostic system. The operating system shall be a Palm OS based system. An RF Host Network Controller with integrated palm size PDA shall be able to communicate in real-time with the vehicles Multiplex system. The RF diagnostic tool shall be capable of troubleshooting and testing the communication loop and all inputs and outputs of the Multiplex system in real-time and provide pass/fail feedback to the operator. To further assist in troubleshooting an optional ladder logic format shall be incorporated into the design.

2.3.7.3 Batteries: (Amended) Batteries shall be easily accessible for inspection and serviceable only from outside the vehicle and shall be securely mounted on a stainless steel tray that can accommodate the size and weight of the batteries. The battery tray shall easily slide out and shall properly support the batteries while they are being serviced. The tray shall allow each battery cell to be serviced and filled with either manual or automatic equipment. A positive lock shall retain the battery tray in the stowed position. Four type 31 maintenance free, sealed battery units conforming to SAE Standard J537 shall be provided. Each battery shall be of premium construction and shall be fitted with threaded stud terminals and lifting handles. Batteries shall have a minimum of 1150 cold cranking amps. Each battery shall have a purchase date of no more than 60 days from the date of release for shipment to the AUTHORITY. Positive and negative terminals shall have different size studs, or the battery terminals and cables shall be arranged to prevent incorrect installation. Battery terminals shall be located for access in less than 30 seconds with jumper cables. Battery cables shall be flexible and sufficiently long to reach the batteries in extended positions without stretching or pulling on any connection and shall not lie on top of the batteries. The battery terminals and cables shall be color-coded with red for the primary positive, black for negative, and another color for any intermediate voltage cables. A Whitaker plug, equipped with a dust cap and adequately protected from moisture, dirt and debris shall be provided in the engine


compartment to jump-start the vehicle. All battery compartment cable ends and ground cable ends in the engine compartment shall be coated with dielectric grease. No battery shall be installed in any vehicle or subjected to an electrical load until it has been charged in accordance with the battery manufacturer’s recommendations and is in a full state of charge. Immediately prior to the time that the vehicle is delivered to the AUTHORITY's property the batteries shall be load tested to assure that they are fully charged. Batteries that fail this test shall be considered defective, removed from the vehicle and replaced. Replaced batteries shall be marked to indicate defect and shall not be used on these vehicles again. 2.3.7.4 Master Battery Switch: A Master Battery Switch on the battery positive (+) shall be provided next to the battery compartment. The master switch shall completely disconnect all vehicle electrical systems except for safety devices such as fire suppression system and other systems as specified. The Master Battery Switch shall be accessible by its own designated piano hinged door. The location of the master battery switch shall be clearly identified on the access panel and be accessible in less than 10 seconds for activation. The master switch shall be explosion proof and capable of carrying and interrupting the total circuit load. Opening the master switch with the power plant operating shall shutdown the engine and not damage any component of the electrical system. Location of the master battery switch shall prevent corrosion from fumes and battery acid when the batteries are washed off.

2.3.7.5 Radio Noise Attenuation: Proper suppression equipment shall be provided in the electrical system to eliminate interference with radio and television transmission and reception. This equipment shall not cause interference with any electronic system on the vehicle. 2.3.7.6 Fire Detection and Suppression System: (Amended) The vehicle shall be equipped with an Amerex fire detection/suppression system. A fire control panel with audio/visual warning shall be provided to the operator’s dash panel. A fire sensing and suppression system shall be provided to monitor the engine compartment with no less than 3 temperature sensors and sufficient monitoring of other areas where fire hazard exists. An optical infra-red flame detector shall be provided to monitor the engines turbo charger and surrounding area. The system shall meet or exceed the environmental requirements of SAE J1211. Upon detection, the system will alert the operator with visual and audible signals and initiate automatic engine shutdown and trigger the discharge of the fire suppression agent. Approval of the fire detection layout shall be approved during the pre production meeting. Three detectors will be located in the engine compartment area and one in the auxiliary heater area if it is located in an enclosed in a compartment. Detection of a fire may be by means of infrared/heat or rate of rise/heat. Detectors must be capable of operating in a range of -400F to 2500F without false detection from any source of light or steam cleaning.


A control panel shall electrically supervise the automatic fire suppression system following the wiring circuits for Power Supply, Fire/Heat Detected and System Actuation. Indication of Normal, Fault and fire conditions shall be displayed on the control monitor. The system control panel will shut down the engine within 16 seconds of a fire being detected through the engine protection shut down and over ride system. Integration of the fire suppression system warning lights with the vehicle warning light system is preferred with design considerations given to the convenience of the operator. A minimum 25 pound capacity agent cylinder of the stored pressure type shall be furnished and be constructed of welded steel and must conform to DOT specification 4BW, and be rated for 12 years minimum hydrostatic retest. The cylinder shall be outfitted with a gauge that can be easily viewed and a forged brass valve assembly. A sufficient number of Brass nozzles shall be located in the engine compartment, the auxiliary heater compartment, and the fuel storage compartment area fitted with dust caps that, upon actuation, are displaced to allow full flow of the fire suppression agent. Fire suppression agent shall be Type ABC dry chemical. Visual inspection of the agent cylinder gauge shall be provided through one of the vehicle engine compartment service doors. The Contractor shall provide written certification from the fire suppression manufacture that all installation requirements have been met and sufficient testing was made on the first vehicle system to ensure reliable fire fighting operation. 2.3.7.7 Gas Detection System (GDS) (CNG Option): GDS Amerex system shall be provided to monitor the engine compartment and each separate fuel storage area(s) and shall automatically activate audible and visible alarms in the operators’ area at levels of the lower explosive limit (LEL), of natural gas (methane).

2.3.7.7.1 GDS Operation: (Amended) The system shall be capable of detecting gas in concentrations from 10 percent to 100 percent of LEL and shall continue to indicate the presence of gas at concentrations above 100 percent LEL. A control button shall be provided to silence the GDS audible alarm. The GDS shall provide an engine shut down signal after activation of the GDS. The GDS initiated engine shut-down shall be integrated with the Engine Stop Over-Ride to permit the operator more time, if required, to slow and stop the vehicle. The GDS shall be powered through the battery isolation switch(es) and be in full time sampling mode at all times. When the master switch is in the "off" position the GDS shall continue to operate as designed. 2.3.7.7.2 GDS Monitor Panel: The system shall have a supervision monitoring panel located in the operators’ side console area subject to AUTHORITY approval. Monitor panel shall indicate operational status of the sensors, harness, and calibration with visual indicators provided on the operators’ indicator panel. Visual indicators shall include a) System OK (power on and calibrated), b) Gas Alarm, and c) Service Required.


2.3.7.7.3 GDS Calibration: System shall not require calibration. System diagnostics shall not require more than ten minutes.

2.3.8 INTERIOR CLIMATE CONTROL

2.3.8.1 Capacity & Performance: (Amended) The heating, ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC) climate control system shall be Thermo King or approved equal and capable of maintaining the interior of the vehicle at the temperature and humidity levels defined in the following paragraphs. The HVAC system shall be a unitized Thermo-King or AUTHORITY approved equivalent system mounted on the rooftop or in the rear attic area of the vehicle. A complete HVAC capacity and performance analysis shall demonstrate compliance with all performance requirements. The AC system can utilize 134A or R407c refrigerant as a means to cool the vehicle interior to the proscribed temperature set point. All other types of refrigerant can be submitted to the AUTHORITY for approval. With the vehicle running on the design operating profile with corresponding door opening cycles, and carrying a number of passengers equal to 150 percent of the seated load, the HVAC system shall maintain a passenger compartment temperature within a range between 65ºF and 80ºF, while controlling the relative humidity to a value of 50 percent or less. The cooling requirement shall be based on each passenger generating 270 Btu per hour of sensible heat and 270 Btu per hour of latent heat. The system shall maintain these conditions while subjected to any outside ambient temperatures within a range of 10ºF and 95ºF and at any ambient relative humidity levels between 5 and 50 percent. When the vehicle is run in outside ambient temperatures of 95ºF and 115ºF, the interior temperature of the vehicle shall be permitted to rise one degree for each degree of exterior temperature in excess of 95ºF. When the vehicle is operated in outside ambient temperatures of -10F to +10F, the interior temperature shall not fall below 55ºF while the vehicle is running on the design operating profile with no passengers. The air conditioning portion of the HVAC system shall be capable of reducing the passenger compartment temperature from 110oF to 75oF +/- 3F in less than 45 minutes after the start-up of the A/C system. Engine temperature shall be within the normal range at the time of start-up of the cool-down test and the engine speed shall be limited to fast idle that may be activated by an operator controlled device. During the cool-down period the refrigerant pressure shall not exceed 400 psi and the condenser discharge air shall not exceed 45ºF above the condenser inlet air temperature, measured 6 inches from the surface of the coil. The vehicle shall be parked in direct sunlight with the ambient temperature at 100ºF and humidity less than 20 percent. There shall be no passengers on board, and the doors shall be closed. Durable gauges displaying the suction and discharge pressures of the refrigerant system shall be permanently installed in the HVAC compartment and shall be visible when the rear


HVAC door is open. Manually controlled shutoff valves in the refrigerant lines shall allow isolation of the compressor and receiver for service. To the extent practical, self-sealing couplings shall be used to break and seal the refrigerant lines during removal of major components, such as the refrigerant compressor condenser. The condenser shall be located to efficiently transfer heat to the atmosphere, and shall not ingest air warmed above the ambient temperature by the vehicle mechanical equipment, or to discharge air into any other system of the vehicle. The location of the condenser shall preclude its obstruction by wheel splash, road dirt or debris. The heating portion of the HVAC system shall be capable of raising the passenger compartment temperature from an outside ambient temperature of -20 ºF and the vehicle cold soaked at that temperature to 70ºF in less than 70 minutes. 2.3.8.2 Controls and Temperature Uniformity: The operational modes of the interior climate control system shall be controlled by a four position, rotary, switch conveniently located to the operator. The functions of the switch shall be as follow:

OFF No power to the climate control system. HEAT Power to heater fans and interior temperature controlled automatically

within specified range. AC Power to air conditioning system and interior temperature controlled

automatically within specified range. VENT Power to evaporator fans only with no heat or air conditioning.

The interior climate control system shall switch automatically to the ventilating mode if the refrigerant compressor or condenser fan fails. The temperatures measured from a height of 6 inches below the ceiling shall be within +/- 5ºF of the average temperature 6 inches above the top surface of the seat cushions. Temperatures measured 6 inches above the floor shall be within +/- 10ºF of the average temperature at the top surface of the seat cushions. The interior temperature, from front to rear of the vehicle, shall not vary more than +/- 5ºF from the average. 2.3.8.3 Air-Flow, Passenger Area: The cooling mode of the interior climate control system shall introduce air into the vehicle at or near the ceiling height at a minimum rate of 25 cfm, per passenger based on the vehicle configuration carrying a number of passengers equal to 150 percent of the seated load. The air shall be composed of no less than 10 percent outside air. Airflow shall be evenly distributed throughout the vehicle with air velocity not exceeding 100 feet per minute on any passenger. The ventilating mode shall provide outside air at a minimum flow rate of 20 cfm per passenger.


Airflow may be reduced to 15 cfm per passenger (150 percent of seated load) when operating in the heating mode. Heated air introduced into the vehicle shall contain no less than 20 percent outside air. The fans shall not activate until the heating element has warmed sufficiently to assure at least 70ºF air outlet temperature. The heating air shall not cause any outlet or defuser, or any component that can be touched by a passenger to exceed 100ºF under any normal operating conditions. Outside airflow may be cut off during initial warm-up, provided no manual manipulation is required. 2.3.8.4 Air-Flow, Operators Area: The vehicle interior climate control system shall deliver at least 100 cfm of air to the operator’s area when operating in the ventilating and cooling modes. Adjustable nozzles shall permit variable distribution or shutdown of the airflow. Airflow in the heating mode shall reduce proportionally to the reduction of airflow into the passenger area. The windshield defroster unit shall meet the requirements of SAE Recommended Practice J382, Windshield Defrosting Systems Performance Requirements, and shall have the capability of diverting heated air to the operator’s feet and legs. The defroster or interior climate control system shall maintain visibility through the operator’s side window. The operator shall be provided independent control of the defroster and operators heater. The controls shall include:

MODE Heat or defrost. TEMP Air outlet temperature. FAN Airflow fan speed control.

2.3.8.5 Air Intakes: Outside openings for air intake shall be located to ensure cleanliness of air entering the climate control system, particularly with respect to exhaust emissions from the vehicle and adjacent traffic. All intake openings shall be baffled to prevent entry of snow, sleet, or water. Outside air shall be filtered before discharge into the passenger compartment. The filter shall meet the ASHRAE requirements for 5 percent or better atmospheric dust spot efficiency, 50 percent weight arrestance, and a minimum dust holding capacity of 120 gram per 1,000 cfm cell. More efficient air filtration may be provided to maintain efficient heater and/or evaporator operation. Air filters shall be replaceable and easily removable for service. Moisture drains from air intake openings shall be located to prevent clogging from road dirt. 2.3.8.6 Step-well Defrosters: An insulated duct from the front defroster unit will be provided to carry warm air to the front step-well. The duct must be of sufficient size to allow for the carrying of enough air to remove ice and snow from the step-well. A damper will be provided to allow the driver to divert a maximum of 80 percent of the warm air generated by the front defroster to the step-well. The rear door shall be equipped with a ducting system to deliver heated air for the


purpose of removing snow and ice from the step area. The step-well defroster system shall have its own control switch located in the driver’s dash area.

2.3.9 VEHICLE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM:

2.3.9.1 Make Ready Provisions, Intelligent Transportation System (ITS): While the AUTHORITY will be responsible for installation of radios and related equipment, the Contractor shall provide certain “Make Ready Provisions” that will accommodate post delivery installation of this equipment. Make Ready Provisions may include installing specified equipment (such as antennas, wiring harnesses), and providing power supplies, conduit, structural mounting provisions, and space for ITS equipment. Make Ready Provisions shall be approved by the AUTHORITY prior to start of production, subject to AUTHORITY approval. Exception to the Make Ready Provision is the installation of a functioning APC system mentioned in sec. 2.3.9.13. The following devices are likely to be included in the AUTHORITY’s ITS system:

a) Voice Radio b) Data Radio c) AVA System Processor and Internal Signs d) Passenger stop and enunciator system e) Automatic Passenger Counting (APC) Processor f) Automatic Passenger Counting (APC) Door Sensors g) Door Sensors h) Vehicle Area Network Controller (VAN) i) Operator Control Panel j) Wireless LAN Modem k) Automatic Vehicle Locator (AVL) Processor

2.3.9.2 ITS Equipment Enclosure: An equipment enclosure shall be provided to accommodate installation of the AUTHORITY’s radio system and related ITS equipment such as Security Camera system, PA system amplifier, etc. This equipment will require a clear space above the slide out tray of a minimum of 11 inches high, 27 inches wide and 21 inches deep. Unless otherwise specified, additional ITS equipment provided and installed by the Contractor may also be installed within the ITS enclosure. The preferred location for the enclosure is located in the passenger compartment as far from the engine as possible. The ITS enclosure shall be as large as practical to facilitate future expansion of ITS equipment, and shall be splash-proof and properly ventilated when the service door is secured. The ITS enclosure shall include a minimum of three modular slide out trays which are easily removable and can be repositioned to accommodate changes in equipment position as needed. Slide out trays shall incorporate heavy duty slide or roller mechanism to support a minimum of 150 lbs. of loading each and shall be able to withstand the normal shock and vibration, (under full load) experienced in AUTHORITY service, without damage to the slide or roller mechanisms. Slide out trays shall have locking mechanisms that hold the tray in both the open and closed


positions. Service light(s) that illuminate each tray with suitable switch shall be provided within the enclosure, subject to AUTHORITY approval.

2.3.9.3 ITS Provisions, Power Supply: The ITS enclosure shall be provided with protected power circuits for the ITS equipment. These power requirements are in addition to Contractor provided equipment power requirements. Connections in the ITS enclosure shall be subject to AUTHORITY approval.

Circuit Source Volt Circuit

Through Master Disconnect Switches

12 50-amp, DC

24 50-amp, DC

Ignition 12 2-amp, DC switched circuit

24 2-amp, DC switched

circuit Programmable 12 3 individual circuits that

are programmable functions provided by

the vehicle control system for

future AUTHORITY use.

Ground gnd 50-amp

2.3.9.4 ITS Provisions, Conduits: (Amended) A system of preinstalled “ITS conduits” will be provided to assist with future installation and replacement of wiring and cabling associated with the AUTHORITY’s ITS equipment listed in Section 2.3.9.1, Make Ready Provisions, Intelligent Transportation System (ITS). ITS conduits, in conjunction with existing vehicle wire ways, will be required where future AUTHORITY installation and replacement of cabling is not practical such as removing interior paneling or dash assembly. In general, conduits exposed to the interior of the vehicle shall be water tight and have a minimum ¾” outside diameter and be routed to permit pulling cables, less connectors, through the conduits using a preinstalled “pull wire”. Conduits will be terminated at the ITS enclosure using suitable reusable water tight fittings. Conduit installation shall follow best commercial practices with regard to drip loops and routing to avoid moisture problems. Conduits, in conjunction with existing vehicle wire ways, shall permit interconnection of ITS subsystems and devices as follows:


From TerminationAntenna Wireless LAN ITS Enclosure (Not needed) Antenna GPS Receiver ITS Enclosure (Not needed) Antenna Voice Radio Transceiver ITS Enclosure (Not needed) Antenna Data Radio Transceiver ITS Enclosure (Not needed) Antenna, Cellular Modem ITS Enclosure (Not needed) Security System Processor ITS Enclosure (Not needed) Operator Control Unit, Operator Dash ITS Enclosure (Not needed) Headsign Compartment ITS Enclosure TBD Front Dash ITS Enclosure TBD Engine Control Processor ITS Enclosure (Not needed) PLC Compartment ITS Enclosure (Not needed) Transmission Control Processor ITS Enclosure (Not needed) Interior Information Sign, Front ITS Enclosure (Not needed) Radio Control Head ITS Enclosure TBD Interior Speakers ITS Enclosure (Not needed) Exterior Speaker(s) ITS Enclosure (Not needed) APC Door Sensors, Front Doors ITS Enclosure (Not needed) APC Door Sensors, Rear Doors ITS Enclosure (Not needed)

2.3.9.5 ITS Provisions, Operator Control Module (OCM): Space and mounting provisions shall be provided for an 8-inch ITS Operator Control Module. The OCM installation provisions shall appear as an integral part of the operator area design. The location of the DCM shall provide the operator with a free and unobstructed view of the DCM controls/display and be within easy reach of the operator. The OCM shall be positioned to minimize glare and maximize readability in all lighting conditions and operator seat positions. Provisions for the DCM shall accommodate the following specifications:

Maximum height: 8 inches Maximum width: 8.7 inches Maximum depth: 3.1 inches Shock tolerance: 18g for 3 ms Housing: Splash proof and UV resistant Housing: Splash proof and UV resistant Vibration tolerance: 4g peak rms @ 5 to 150 Hz

2.3.9.6 ITS Provisions, Mounting Provisions Global Positioning Satellite Receiver Antenna: A Tri-band Mobile Mark 301/UMB (CELL, GPS, WLAN) antenna will be installed that will be able to be utilized in the future. 2.3.9.7 ITS Provisions, Automated Vehicle Announcement (AVA) System: Structural provisions shall be provided in the ceiling to install two AVA signs constructed to withstand the heavy duty environmental and service conditions found in transit operations. The mounting locations for signs shall be subject to AUTHORITY approval. Speaker wires from each individual speaker (inside and outside) shall terminate in the ITS enclosure.


2.3.9.8 Speaker Requirements. (Amended) Six (6) interior speakers shall be provided and installed by the vehicle builder, evenly spaced along the vehicle. One (1) loudspeaker shall be provided and mounted outside the vehicle near the front door to allow communications to passengers outside the vehicle. A weatherproof, non-corrosive, cone type exterior speaker shall be used. Speakers shall have a minimum flat response of 100-15,000Hz. The speaker wires shall be run to a terminal block in the ITS Enclosure. The speaker installation locations and materials shall be approved by the AUTHORITY, in advance of actual installation. The speakers shall interface with the Public Address System (P.A.) controlled by the driver. The PA system shall include a hands free microphone which, when activated, shall override any ongoing automated announcement. A foot switch (Cole Hearse part # 7792) shall be supplied and installed by the Contractor to permit the vehicle operator to trigger individual announcement whenever needed using a hands free microphone. The location of the foot switch shall be approved by the AUTHORITY. A three position switch shall be installed in the driver’s side control panel with the following functions:

Interior speakers Exterior speaker Both Interior and Exterior speaker

2.3.9.9 ITS Provisions, Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN): A Tri-band Mobile Mark 301/UMB (CELL, GPS, WLAN) antenna will be installed that will be able to be utilized in the future. 2.3.9.10 ITS Provisions, Radio System: (Amended) A location convenient to the operator shall be provided for the AUTHORITY’s installation of a radio MOTOROLA XTL2500 radio with all appropriate connections and fittings to make it full functional. 2.3.9.11 ITS Provisions, Radio Antennas: (Amended) Contractor shall provide one MOTOROLA HAF4016 1/4 wave 764-870 MHz. radio antenna. The cable feed lines shall be of sufficient length to allow for a radio to be located in the drivers area and allow for at least two connectors to be changed on the feed lines, if needed. The antenna mountings and lead terminations shall be accessible from the bus interior. The antennas shall not be painted, and shall be installed after all painting and finish work, allowing for a proper seal to be made to manufacturer’s specifications.

2.3.9.12 ITS Provisions, Cell Modem Antenna: (Amended) The antenna for the Cell Modem is addressed under 2.3.9.9 above.. 2.3.9.13 ITS Provisions, Automatic Passenger Counting (APC) System (Amended) This vehicle shall be equipped with a fully functioning, programmable UTA, APC system that will be compatible and connectable with future communications systems. The APC system shall be capable of capturing passenger data and storing the data for retrieval by means of laptop or bus WiFi system. The APC system shall be presented to the AUTHORITY for approval.


The Contractor shall supply all the necessary software for the AUTHORITY to download and process the retrieved data for its business use. Mounting and installation shall be provided for APC System sensors at each door of the bus. The APC sensors shall be heat sensing infrared type. The APC System sensor mounting shall establish positions for the sensors to accurately count passenger boardings and alightings in all expected revenue situations. This shall include, but not be limited to, the following scenarios:

a) If two passengers board or alight side-by-side simultaneously at the same door, both

shall be counted. b) If one passenger boards simultaneously while another one alights at the same door,

the APC System sensor shall register one boarding and one alighting. 2.4.0 SECURITY CAMERA SYSTEM: The Authority has elected to purchase a camera system for installation at a later date . NABI shall be providing CAT6 stranded/shielded cabling for six (6) cameras to be located in the interior and exterior of the bus. Special instructions for the camera cabling is as follows:

a. Cable to be terminated at each end with RJ45 connector.

b. At the camera end, cable should have 3' slack.

c. No pre‐drilled holes are required at camera locations, but use a marker on the ceiling.

d. At the ITS cabinet end, cable should have 3' service loop.

e. NABI to provide drilling specifications.

f. Cable coupler on 60' bus is not required by MPA unless NABI opts to do so.

The locations for the cabling for the ten (10) camera locations can be found in Attachment 5 to this document

2.4.1 REAR WHEEL DEFLECTOR SYSTEM: A rear wheel deflector device, such as the S1-Gard or an approved equivalent, designed to deflect persons and objects away from the curbside rear wheels while the vehicle is in motion shall be incorporated into the vehicle design. A rear wheel deflector shall be installed at the passenger exit door opening that is located in front of the rear axle. This deflector device shall be designed to last the life of the vehicle and be easily replaced, made of reinforced polyurethane material which is highly resistant to abrasion. The unpainted deflector surfaces shall be black and not show wear from scraps or impacts. No part of the vehicle, including the deflector, shall be damaged as a result of a 5 mph impact at any point parallel, and up to a 30 degree angle, to the longitudinal center line of the vehicle by the pendulum striker defined in FMVSS 581 loaded to 4,000 pounds.

2.4.1.1 Interchangeability: Such a deflector device must be interchangeable between all vehicles built within the same lot and procured under the same Contract. Deflector devices shall also be interchangeable to the extent practical between all vehicles in the Properties entire fleet using the same deflector system.


2.4.1.2 Operating Environment: The deflector system shall operate without degradation under all environmental conditions usually occurring in the Properties service area for a minimum of 12 years. Specific conditions include ambient temperatures which range from 0°F to 120°F, relative humidity between 5 percent and 100 percent.

2.4.3.3 Maintainability Requirements: Such a deflector system shall be readily accessible for service and inspection. Maintenance requirements stated in mean time to replace (MTTR) shall be less than one hour by one mechanic using standard hand tools. The MTTR figure does not include time required to prepare the vehicle such as bringing the vehicle to the hoist, raising it, etc. The Contractor shall be required to demonstrate this MTTR procedure using the information contained in the provided service manual. The demonstration shall be conducted on the Pilot Vehicle and may occur at the Properties facilities.


SECTION 3.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROVISIONS

3.1.0 CONTRACTOR’S IN-PLANT QUALITY ASSURANCE REQUIREMENTS 3.1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE ORGANIZATION: The Contractor shall establish and maintain an effective in-plant, quality assurance organization. It shall be a specifically defined organization and should be directly responsible to the Contractor's top management.

3.1.1.1 Control: The quality assurance organization shall exercise quality control over all phases of production from initiation of design through manufacture and preparation for delivery. The organization shall also control the quality of supplied articles. 3.1.1.2 Authority and Responsibility: The quality assurance organization shall have the authority and responsibility for reliability, quality control, inspection planning, establishment of the quality control system, and acceptance/rejection of materials and manufactured articles in the production of the transit vehicles.

3.1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE ORGANIZATION FUNCTIONS: The quality assurance organization shall include the following minimum functions.

3.1.2.1 Work Instructions: The quality assurance organization shall verify inspection operation instructions to ascertain that the manufactured product meets all prescribed requirements. 3.1.2.2 Records Maintenance: The quality assurance organization shall maintain and use records and data essential to the effective operation of its program. These records and data shall be available for review by the Resident Inspectors. Inspection and test records for this procurement shall be available for a minimum of three (3) years after inspections and tests are completed. 3.1.2.3 Corrective Action: The quality assurance organization shall detect and promptly assure correction of any conditions that may result in the production of defective transit vehicle. These conditions may occur in designs, purchases, manufacture, tests, or operations that culminate in defective supplies, services, facilities, technical data, or standards.

3.1.3 STANDARDS AND FACILITIES: The following standards and facilities shall be basic in the quality assurance process.

3.1.3.1 Configuration Control: The Contractor shall maintain drawings, assembly procedures, and other documentation that completely describe a qualified vehicle that meets all of the options and special requirements


of this procurement. The quality assurance organization shall verify that each transit vehicle is manufactured in accordance with these controlled drawings, procedures, and documentation. 3.1.3.2 Measuring and Testing Facilities: The Contractor shall provide and maintain the necessary gauges and other measuring and testing devices for use by the quality assurance organization to verify that the vehicles conform to all specification requirements. These devices shall be calibrated at established periods against certified measurement standards that have known valid relationships to national standards. 3.1.3.3 Production Tooling As Media Of Inspection: When production jigs, fixtures, tooling masters, templates, patterns, and other devices are used as media of inspection, they shall be proved for accuracy at formally established intervals and adjusted, replaced, or repaired as required to maintain quality. 3.1.3.4 Equipment Use By Resident Inspectors: The Contractor’s gauges and other measuring and testing devices shall be made available for use by the Resident Inspectors to verify that the vehicles conform to all specification requirements. If necessary, the Contractor's personnel shall be made available to operate the devices and to verify their condition and accuracy.

3.1.4 CONTROL OF PURCHASES: The Contractor shall maintain quality control of purchases.

3.1.4.1 Supplier Control: The Contractor shall require that each supplier maintains a quality control program for the services and supplies that it provides. The Contractor's quality assurance organization shall inspect and test materials provided by suppliers for conformance to specification requirements. Materials that have been inspected, tested, and approved shall be identified as acceptable to the point of use in the manufacturing or assembly processes. Controls shall be established to prevent inadvertent use of nonconforming materials. 3.1.4.2 Purchasing Data: The Contractor shall verify that all applicable specification requirements are properly included or referenced in purchase orders of articles to be used on transit vehicles.

3.1.5 MANUFACTURING CONTROL: The Contractor shall ensure that all basic production operations, as well as all other processing and fabricating, are performed under controlled conditions. Establishment of these controlled conditions shall be based on the documented work instructions, adequate production equipment, and special working environments if necessary.


3.1.5.1 Completed Items: A system for final inspection and test of completed transit vehicles shall be provided by the quality assurance organization. It shall measure the overall quality of each completed vehicle. 3.1.5.2 Nonconforming Materials: The quality assurance organization shall monitor the Contractor’s system for controlling nonconforming materials. The system shall include procedures for identification, segregation, and disposition. 3.1.5.3 Statistical Techniques: Statistical analysis, tests, and other quality control procedures may be used when appropriate in the quality assurance processes. 3.1.5.4 Inspection Status: A system shall be maintained by the quality assurance organization for identifying the inspection status of components and completed transit vehicles. Identification may include cards, tags, or other normal quality control devices.

3.1.6 INSPECTION SYSTEM: The quality assurance organization shall establish, maintain, and periodically audit a fully-documented inspection system. The system shall prescribe inspection and test of materials, work in process, and completed articles. As a minimum, it shall include the following controls.

3.1.6.1 Inspection Personnel: Sufficient trained inspectors shall be used to ensure that all materials, components, and assemblies are inspected for conformance with the qualified vehicle design. 3.1.6.2 Inspection Records: Acceptance, rework, or rejection identification shall be attached to inspected articles. Articles that have been accepted as a result of approved materials review actions shall be identified. Articles that have been reworked to specified drawing configurations shall not require special identification. Articles rejected as unsuitable or scrap shall be plainly marked and controlled to prevent installation on the vehicle. Articles that become obsolete as a result of engineering changes or other actions shall be controlled to prevent unauthorized assembly or installation. Unusable articles shall be isolated and then scrapped. Discrepancies noted by the Contractor or Resident Inspectors during assembly shall be entered by the inspection personnel on a record that accompanies the major component, subassembly, assembly, or vehicle from start of assembly through final inspection. Actions shall be taken to correct discrepancies or deficiencies in the manufacturing processes, procedures, or other conditions that cause articles to be in nonconformity with the requirements of the contract specifications. The inspection personnel shall verify the corrective actions and mark the discrepancy record. If discrepancies cannot be corrected by replacing the nonconforming materials, the AUTHORITY shall approve the modification, repair, or method of correction to the extent that the contract specifications are affected.


3.1.6.3 Quality Assurance Audits: The quality assurance organization shall establish and maintain a quality control audit program. Records of this program shall be subject to review by the AUTHORITY.

3.1.7 INSPECTIONS:

3.1.7.1 Inspection Stations: Inspection stations shall be at the best locations to provide for the work content and characteristics to be inspected. Stations shall provide the facilities and equipment to inspect structural, electrical, hydraulic, and other components and assemblies for compliance with the design requirements. Stations shall also be at the best locations to inspect or test characteristics before they are concealed by subsequent fabrication or assembly operations. These locations shall minimally include underbody structure completion, body framing completion, body prior to paint preparation, water test before interior trim and insulation installation, engine installation completion, underbody dress-up and completion, vehicle prior to final paint touchup, vehicle prior to road test, and vehicle final road test completion. 3.1.7.2 Resident Inspector: The AUTHORITY shall be represented at the Contractor's plant by AUTHORITY or Contracted Resident Inspectors. They shall monitor, in the Contractor's plant, the manufacture of transit vehicles built under the procurement throughout the entire bus build process. The Resident Inspectors shall be authorized to approve the pre-delivery acceptance tests and release the vehicle for delivery. The presence of these resident inspectors in the plant shall not relieve the Contractor of its responsibility to meet all of the requirements of this procurement. Upon request to the quality assurance supervisors, the Resident Inspectors shall have access to the Contractor's quality assurance files related to this procurement. These files shall include drawings, assembly procedures, material standards, parts lists, inspection processing and reports, and records of defects. Prior to the beginning of vehicle manufacture, the Resident Inspector shall meet with the Contractor's quality assurance manager. They shall review the inspection procedures and finalize inspection checklists. The Resident Inspectors may begin monitoring vehicle construction activities two weeks prior to the start of vehicle assembly. Prior to the beginning of the vehicle manufacture and continuing throughout the scheduled production, the Contractor shall assist the Resident Inspector in verifying the 60% Buy America domestic content requirement as specified in 49 CFR Part 661. At minimum, the Resident Inspector shall:

a) Review actual component content to ensure that the vehicle meets the 60% “Buy

America” domestic content requirement; and, b) Check that the final assembly location is in the United States and the manufacturer’s

final assembly activities meet the requirements as outlined in the FTA’s Pre-Award


review, as specified in Section 2.1.5.1, Buy America Certification, and as approved by the AUTHORITY prior to award.

c) The Resident Inspector must verify that the actual manufacturing processes are

consistent with the information provided by the manufacturer and approved by the AUTHORITY.

The Contractor shall provide office space for the resident inspectors in close proximity to the final assembly area. This office space shall be equipped with desks, outside and interplant telephones, internet access, file cabinet, chairs, and clothing lockers sufficient to accommodate the resident staff.

3.2.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS: 3.2.1 RESPONSIBILITY: Fully documented, tests shall be conducted on each production vehicle following manufacture to determine its acceptance to the AUTHORITY. These acceptance tests shall include pre-delivery inspections and testing by the Contractor and inspections and testing by the AUTHORITY after the vehicles have been delivered. 3.2.2 PRE-DELIVERY TESTS: The Contractor shall conduct acceptance tests at its plant on each vehicle following completion of manufacture and before delivery to the AUTHORITY. These pre-delivery tests shall include visual and measured inspections, as well as testing the total vehicle operation. The tests shall be conducted and documented in accordance with written test plans, approved by the AUTHORITY. Additional tests may be conducted at the Contractor's discretion to ensure that the completed vehicles have attained the desired quality and have met the requirements in Section 2.0, Technical Specifications. The pre-delivery tests shall be scheduled and conducted with sufficient, notice so that they may be witnessed by the Resident Inspectors, who may accept or reject the results of the tests. The results of pre-delivery tests, and any other tests, shall be filed with the assembly inspection records for each vehicle. The under floor equipment shall be available for inspection by the resident inspectors, using a pit or vehicle hoist provided by the Contractor. Personal fall protection equipment in addition to a hoist, scaffold, or elevated platform shall be provided by the Contractor to easily and safely inspect vehicle roofs and components. Delivery of each vehicle shall require written authorization of the resident inspector. Authorization forms for the release of each vehicle for delivery shall be provided by the Contractor. An executed copy of the authorization shall accompany the delivery of each vehicle.

3.2.2.1 Inspection – Visual and Measured: Visual and measured inspections shall be conducted with the vehicle in a static condition. The purpose of the inspection testing is to verify overall dimensional and weight requirements, to verify that required components are included and are ready for operation, and to verify that components and subsystems that are designed to operate with the vehicle in a static condition do function as designed.


3.2.2.2 Total Vehicle Operation: Total vehicle operation shall be evaluated during road tests. The purpose of the road tests is to observe and verify the operation of the vehicle as a system and to verify the functional operation of the subsystems that can be operated only while the vehicle is in motion. Each vehicle shall be driven for a minimum of 15 (fifteen) miles during the road tests. Observed Defects shall be recorded on the test forms. The vehicle shall be retested when Defects are corrected and adjustments are made. This process shall continue until Defects or required adjustments are no longer detected. Results shall be pass/fail for these vehicle operation tests.

3.2.3 POST-DELIVERY TESTS: The AUTHORITY may conduct acceptance tests on each delivered vehicle. These tests shall be completed within 15 (fifteen) days after vehicle delivery and shall be conducted in accordance with written test plans. The purpose of these tests is to identify Defects that have become apparent between the time of vehicle release and delivery to the AUTHORITY. The post-delivery tests shall include visual inspection and vehicle operations. Vehicles that fail to pass the post-delivery tests are subject to non-acceptance. The AUTHORITY or its designee shall record details of all Defects on the appropriate test forms and shall notify the Contractor of non-acceptance of each vehicle within five days after completion of the tests. The Defects detected during these tests shall be repaired according to procedures defined in Section 1, Solicitation Offer and Award/ Contractual Provisions.

3.2.3.1 Visual Inspection: The post-delivery inspection is similar to the inspection at the Contractor's plant and shall be conducted with the vehicle in a static condition. Any visual delivery damage shall be identified and recorded during the visual inspection of each vehicle. 3.2.3.2 Vehicle Operation: Road tests will be used for total vehicle operation similar to those conducted at the Contractor's plant. The Authority will conduct and document a brake performance test at the time of the road test in accordance with Federal Motor carrier safety regulations, 393.52. In addition, the AUTHORITY may elect to perform chassis dynamometer tests. Operational deficiencies of each vehicle shall be identified and recorded.


SECTION 4.0 WARRANTY PROVISIONS

4.1.0 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS: 4.1.1 CONTRACTOR WARRANTY: (Amended) Warranties in this document are in addition to any statutory remedies or warranties imposed on the Contractor. Consistent with this requirement, the Contractor warrants and guarantees to the AUTHORITY each complete vehicle, and specific subsystems and components as follows. Warranties specified herein shall not be prorated with the exception of extended or superior warranty’s that are passed on to the AUTHORITY. The Contractor shall pass on to the AUTHORITY any warranty, offered by a component supplier, that is superior to that required herein. All major subsystems/component suppliers’ warrantees, as outlined below, must be purchased from the supplier by the contractor. At the acceptance of each Vehicle, the contractor shall submit to the AUTHORITY written confirmation that all contractual extended warrantees (as outline in section 4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2, 4.1.1.3 and 4.1.1.4) are in place with all major subsystem / component suppliers. During the respective period of the warranty, all vehicle parts or material caused to be damaged as a result of a failure, malfunction, defect in design, material, or workmanship in other parts or material, shall be repaired or replaced at the expense of the Contractor.

4.1.1.1 Complete Vehicle: The complete vehicle, propulsion system, components, major subsystems, and body and chassis structure, are warranted to be free from Defects and Related Defects for one year or 50,000 miles, whichever comes first, beginning on the date of acceptance, or conditional acceptance of each vehicle. The warranty is based on regular operation of the vehicle under the operating condition prevailing in the AUTHORITY's locale. 4.1.1.2 Body and Chassis Structure: Body, body structure, and structural elements of the suspension are warranted to be free from Defects, Related Defects, and to maintain structural integrity for three years or 150,000 miles, whichever comes first. Primary load carrying members of the vehicle structure, including structural elements of the suspension, are warranted against corrosion failure and/or fatigue failure sufficient to cause a Class 1 or Class 2 failure for a period of twelve (12) years or 500,000 miles, whichever comes first. 4.1.1.3 Propulsion System: (Amended) Propulsion system components, specifically the engine, Diesel Particulate Filter, transmission and drive and non-drive axles shall be warranted to be free from Defects and Related Defects for two years unlimited miles. The Diesel Particulate Filter shall be further warranted for emissions performance consistent with, at a minimum, such conditions as promulgated by the EPA.


4.1.1.4 Major Subsystems: (Amended) Major subsystems shall be warranted to be free from Defects and Related Defects. Major Subsystems items include, but are not limited to those listed in Attachment 6.

4.1.1.5 Extension of Warranty: (Amended) If, during the warranty period, repairs or modifications on any vehicle, made necessary by defective design, materials or workmanship are not completed due to lack of material or inability to provide the proper repair for 30 calendar days, the applicable warranty period shall be extended by the number of days equal to the days out of service to the day repairs are complete and put back into service.

4.1.2 VOIDING OF WARRANTY: The warranties shall not apply to the failure of any part or component of the vehicle that directly results from misuse, negligence, accident, or that has been repaired or altered in any way so as to affect adversely its performance or reliability. Exceptions include repairs which were not conducted in accordance with the Contractor provided maintenance manuals, and were not performed with the level of workmanship in accordance with recognized standards of the industry. The warranty shall also be void if the AUTHORITY fails to conduct normal inspections and scheduled preventive maintenance procedures as recommended in the Contractor's maintenance manuals and that omission caused the part or component failure. The AUTHORITY shall maintain documentation, auditable by the Contractor, verifying service activities in conformance with the Contractor's maintenance manuals. 4.1.3 EXCEPTIONS AND ADDITIONS TO WARRANTY: The warranty shall not apply to scheduled maintenance items, and normal wear-out items such as light bulbs, belts, tires and tubes. The warranty shall not apply to items furnished by the AUTHORITY except insofar as such equipment may be damaged by the failure of a part or component for which the Contractor is responsible. 4.1.4 DETECTION OF DEFECTS: If the AUTHORITY detects a defect within the warranty periods defined in “Warranty Requirements” (Section 4.1.1), it shall within 20 working days, notify the Contractor’s representative. Within 5 working days after receipt of notification, the Contractor’s representative shall either agree that the Defect is in fact covered by warranty, or reserve judgment until the subsystem or component is inspected by the Contractor’s representative, or is removed and examined at the AUTHORITY’ property or at the Contractor’s plant. At that time, the status of warranty coverage on the subsystem or component shall be mutually resolved between the AUTHORITY and the Contractor. Work shall commence to correct the Defect within 10 working days after receipt of notification and shall be conducted in accordance with “Repairs by Contractor” (Section 4.2.2). 4.1.5 SCOPE OF WARRANTY REPAIRS: When warranty repairs are required, the AUTHORITY and the Contractor's representative shall agree within 5 working days after notification on the most appropriate course for the repairs and the exact scope of the repairs to be performed under the warranty. If no agreement is obtained


within the 5-day period, the AUTHORITY reserves the right to commence the repairs in accordance with “Repairs by AUTHORITY” (Section 4.2.3). 4.1.6 FLEET DEFECTS – OCCURRENCE AND REMEDY: (Amended) A fleet defect is defined as cumulative failures of any kind in the same components in the same or similar application where such items covered by the warranty and such failures occur in the warranty period in the specified proportion of the vehicles delivered under this contract. The proportion shall be 25percent. The Contractor shall correct a fleet defect under the warranty provisions defined in “Repair Procedures” (Section 4.2). After correcting the Defect, the AUTHORITY and the Contractor shall mutually agree to and the Contractor shall promptly undertake and complete a work program reasonably designed to prevent the occurrence of the same Defect in all other vehicles and spare parts purchased under this contract. Where the specific Defect can be solely attributed to particular identifiable part(s), the work program shall include redesign and/or replacement of the defectively designed and/or manufactured part(s) in the entire fleet. In all other cases, the work program shall include inspection and/or correction of all of the vehicles in the fleet via a mutually agreed to arrangement. 4.2.0 REPAIR PROCEDURES: 4.2.1 REPAIR PERFORMANCE: The Contractor is responsible for all warranty-covered repair work. To the extent practicable, the AUTHORITY will allow the Contractor or its designated representative to perform such work. At its discretion, the AUTHORITY may perform such work if the AUTHORITY determines it needs to do so based on service or other requirements. Such work shall be reimbursed by the Contractor. 4.2.2 REPAIRS BY CONTRACTOR: The Contractor or its designated representative shall begin work on warranty-covered repairs, within 5 calendar days after receiving notification of a Defect from the AUTHORITY. The AUTHORITY shall make the vehicle available to complete repairs timely with the Contractor repair schedule. The Contractor shall provide at its own expense all spare parts, tools, and space required to complete repairs. At the AUTHORITY's option, the Contractor may be required to remove the vehicle from the AUTHORITY' property while repairs are being affected. If the vehicle is removed from the AUTHORITY' property, repair procedures must be diligently pursued by the Contractor's representative. All costs incurred by the removal of the AUTHORITY’ vehicles to and from the Contractor’s repair facility are to be borne by the Contractor and reimbursable under warranty if the AUTHORITY's personnel are utilized to shift the vehicles.


4.2.3 REPAIRS BY AUTHORITY: 4.2.3.1 Parts Used: If the AUTHORITY performs the warranty-covered repairs, it shall correct or repair the Defect and any Related Defects utilizing parts supplied by the Contractor specifically for this repair. At its discretion, the AUTHORITY may use Contractor-specified parts available from its own stock if deemed in its best interest. Monthly, or at a period to be mutually agreed upon, reports of all repairs covered by this warranty shall be submitted by the AUTHORITY to the Contractor for reimbursement or replacement of parts. The Contractor shall provide forms for these reports. The AUTHORITY will approve the warranty forms to be utilized on this contract at the pre-production meeting. Efforts shall be made by both the Contractor and the AUTHORITY to automate warranty claims processing and record keeping 4.2.3.2 Contractor Supplied Parts: The AUTHORITY may require that the Contractor supply new parts for warranty-covered repairs being performed by the AUTHORITY. These parts shall be shipped prepaid to the AUTHORITY from any source selected by the Contractor within 10 working days of receipt of the request for said parts. Parts supplied by the Contractor shall be Original Equipment Supplier (OEM) equivalent or superior to that used in the vehicle original manufacture. All parts shall include hardware, bolts, nuts, washers and associated accessories that are normally supplied when replacement parts or kits are purchased. 4.2.3.3 Defective Components Return: The Contractor may request that parts covered by the warranty be returned to the manufacturing plant. The total cost for this action shall be paid by the Contractor. Materials should be returned in accordance with Contractor's instructions. 4.2.3.4 Failure Analysis: The Contractor shall, upon specific request of the AUTHORITY, provide a failure analysis of fleet defect- or safety-related parts, or major components, removed from vehicles under the terms of the warranty, that could affect fleet operation. Such reports shall be delivered within 60 days of the receipt of failed parts. 4.2.3.5 Reimbursement for Labor: (Amended) The AUTHORITY shall be reimbursed, by the Contractor, for labor. The amount shall be determined by multiplying the number of man-hours actually required to correct the Defect by a per hour, 4M mechanic, straight wage rate of $45 per hour, plus 65.95% percent fringe benefits and 25.82% percent overhead (Rates as of July 2010), plus the cost of towing in the vehicle if such action was necessary and if the vehicle was in the normal service area. Note: As of July 1, 2010, the hourly straight wage rate for 4M mechanic is to be determined. Subsequent rates are subject to future negotiations between the applicable Contractor and the AUTHORITY. Percentage stated for fringe benefits and overhead are subject to annual adjustments.


These wage and fringe benefit rates shall not exceed the rates in effect in the AUTHORITY' service garage at the time the Defect correction is made.

4.2.3.6 Reimbursement for Parts: The AUTHORITY shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for defective parts and for parts that must be replaced to correct the Defect. The reimbursement shall be at the current price at the time of repair and shall include taxes where applicable and 15 percent handling costs. 4.2.3.7 Reimbursement Requirements: (Amended) The Contractor shall reimburse the AUTHORITY for warranty labor and/or parts within 60 days of receipt of approved warranty claim.

4.2.4 WARRANTY AFTER REPAIR/REPLACEMENT: (Amended) If any component, unit, or subsystem is repaired, rebuilt or replaced by the Contractor, or by the AUTHORITY, with the concurrence of the Contractor, the component, unit, or subsystem shall have the un-expired warranty period of the original. Repairs shall not be warranted if Contractor-provided or authorized parts are not used for the repair; unless the Contractor has failed to respond within 5 days, in accordance with Section 4.1.5, Scope of Warranty Repairs. The warranty on items determined to be fleet defects shall be guaranteed for the remainder of the unexpired warranty period of the original part or component. The warranty shall begin on the repair/replacement date for corrected items on each vehicle.

MASSPORT 42’ Technical Specification PB Revised 011912

ATTACHMENT No. 2 CNG Option #3

2.3.1.4 Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) Fuel System (Option #3) (Amended) A compressed natural gas fuel system consisting of fuel cylinders, filler provisions, fuel lines, pressure reduction, and auxiliary equipment necessary to safely operate under all operating conditions shall be provided. The Contractor shall provide sufficient fuel capacity to meet the specified range contained in Section 2.3.1.1.6, Vehicle Performance Requirements, while operating per Section 2.2.1, Duty Cycle, before the low fuel warning light comes on. The Contractor shall provide MASSPORT a technical analysis which supports the proposed CNG fuel system design compliance to the AUTHORITIES range of operation requirement including the proposed fuel capacity. The analysis shall contain at a minimum:

Source of fuel economy information (pounds per mile or standard cubic feet per mile) Summary of the gas quality used in the calculations Vehicle condition including weight The analysis shall use the natural gas data supplied below based on 70 degrees F ambient temperature: Lower Heating Value Btu/lb

Molecular Weight

Density @ 3,614.7 psia

Density @ 14.7 psia

Specific Gravity

21904 16.734 12.49 lb/cu ft 0.044 lb/cu ft 0.580

The analysis shall be provided with the Proposal. The bus system shall be capable of refueling from an empty state to a complete full state within seven minutes.

2.3.1.4.1 CNG Fuel Line Installation Fuel lines shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 52, Title 13 and NGV2 requirements. Fuel lines shall be mounted using anchor blocks and routed to permit replacement of individual lines and fittings. Fittings used in the fuel system shall be approved for use in high pressure natural gas applications. To the extent practical and before installation, the lines shall be pre-bent on a fixture that prevents tube flattening or excessive local strain. Lines shall be bent only once at any point, including pre-bending and installation.


2.3.1.4.2 CNG Pressure Regulators A primary fuel pressure regulator shall be supplied and mounted in an accessible location for servicing. Coolant lines shall be routed in a manner to prevent trapping air or draining coolant when the regulator is removed for service.

2.3.1.4.3 Pressure Relief Device (PRD) PRDs shall be vented to the roof area toward the rear of the Vehicle with minimum protrusion above the roof line and shall be protected with a suitable rain cap or cover which shall withstand daily Vehicle wash activity.

2.3.1.4.4 CNG Fuel Cylinders (Amended) The fuel cylinders shall have a 3,600 psi working pressure. The fuel cylinders shall be mounted with piping and valving on the roof in such a manner that replacement of one cylinder shall not require the removal of additional cylinders. The fuel cylinders shall also be clearly marked with serial numbers which shall be easily visible to mechanics when installed on the Vehicle.

Fuel cylinder construction shall be in accordance with DOT Standard 304, ANSI NGV2, latest revision, design and test criteria. Cylinders shall be certified for refueling pressures to 125 percent of working pressure during temperature compensated fueling. One solenoid operated shut off valve shall be installed on each individual fuel cylinder. A control override system shall be provided to operate (open or close) solenoid valves to tanks when maintenance is needed.

2.3.1.4.5 CNG Fuel Cylinder Access Roof top access cover(s), to shield the cylinders from the weather and impacts from road debris, shall be attached to the Vehicle structure hinged in a manner that permits one mechanic standing on the roof to unlatch and swing the cover(s) open for routine inspections. The cylinder cover shall integrate into the contour of the bus. The cover(s) shall be hinged along the axis of the Vehicle and open to either side providing complete access to the cylinders with mechanic(s) positioned standing on the roof. A safety latch system shall be provided so that the doors when opened cannot inadvertently close during servicing. The latching method shall utilize quick release captive hardware that can be demonstrated to last the life of the Vehicle. Failure of the latch (es) shall not result in the cover opening while the Vehicle is in operation. The Vehicle roof shall be coated with “anti-slip” epoxy paint applied to areas that will accommodate safe access for routine inspections of the fuel cylinders. Attachment points for attaching safety belts hooks shall be provided at various locations needed to perform roof-top fuel cylinder inspections and replacements.


2.3.1.4.6 CNG Service Valves (Amended) A quarter turn valve, easily accessible through the fuel door shall isolate the high pressure manifold and fuel storage system from the rest of the engine fuel system. The valve function and open and closed positions shall be clearly marked. A ¼” turn Whitney HW60 series shut off valve connected to a ¼” Swagelok quick connect stem fitting for unloading high pressure fuel from fuel cylinder(s).

2.3.1.4.7 CNG Fuel Pressure Gauges (Amended) Silicon filled gauges which meets NFPA 52 requirements shall be located in the high and low pressure manifolds which shall indicate fuel system pressure. The high pressure fuel gauge shall have maximum 100 psi increments, 0-5,000 psi, and shall be visible during fueling operations be rated for the maximum system pressure, have welded (not soldered) fittings and have a restrictive orifice. A pressure transducer shall be incorporated into the high pressure fuel manifold which shall provide the operators’ low fuel warning light which shall activate at 500 psi.

2.3.1.4.8 CNG Fuel Filler Assembly A single fuel filler receptacle shall be located on the right side of the Vehicle and at a height from the street surface to preclude damage from a side impact. Final filler location is subject to AUTHORITY approval. The fill receptacle shall accept a Sherex CC-5000 nozzle or approved equal and shall incorporate a dust cap permanently affixed to the receptacle. The fuel fill access door shall incorporate an interlock system that will deactivate the engine starting system if the fuel door is open. 2.3.1.4.9 CNG Fuel Filters Filters, rated for the system working pressure, shall be provided that meet the engine manufacturer’s requirements and are effective for use in AUTHORITY’S CNG compressor environment. Secondary and coalescing (low pressure side) filters shall be equipped with a drain valve to periodically drain coalesced contaminants.


ATTACHMENT NO. 3 PHYSICAL HEIGHT - REQUIRED CLEARANCE

LOGAN AIRPORT UNIFIED BUS SYSTEM ROUTES TERMINAL ROADWAYS VERTICAL CLEARANCES

February 10, 2010 TERMINAL A Lower Level: Bus/Taxi lanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . clearance 13’- 4”

To Term. B lanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . clearance 11’-10” Upper Level: exit/garage lanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . clearance 14’- 1” To Term. B lanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . clearance 13’- 11” TERMINAL B Lower level: from arrivals roadway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . clearance 11’- 5” from Term. A . . . . . . . . . . . . . .left lane - min.clearance 11’-10” Upper level: from departure roadway and Term A Bus Lane clearance 11’- 4”

OLD TOWER Term B exit rd to Term. C for buses/cabs . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . clearance 15’- 1” exit lane to arrivals rd. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .clearance 14’- 7” TERMINAL C Lower level: from arrivals rd and term B for buses/cabs cabs and logan express bus curb . . . clearance 11’- 9” courtesy buses and MPA buses curb clearance 12’- 1” Upper level: for lanes under canopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .clearance 12’- 10” TERMINAL E Lower level: all lanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . clearance 17’- 4”’ Upper level: no restrictions.


ATTACHMENT NO. 4 Maintenance Personnel Skill Levels.

Defined below are maintenance personnel skill levels used in Part 2: Technical Specifications.

a. 4M: Journeyman or Class A Mechanic Major Functions: This is advanced skilled mechanical work at the journeyman level in the maintenance, repair, and overhaul of transit equipment. Employee performs advanced skilled mechanical work in all phases of maintenance, repair, and overhaul of diesel and gasoline engines and auxiliary equipment. Work involves a variety of advanced tasks in the analysis, diagnoses, testing, adjustment, repair, and maintenance of component parts of transit equipment, as well as the analysis, diagnosis and repair of more difficult mechanical, electrical, and auxiliary equipment. Employee uses a variety of shop equipment, precision testing and measuring instruments, and specialized tools required for transit equipment repair. Employee may provide technical training and direction in the performance of duties to entry and mid-level mechanics and support personnel. Required Knowledge and Abilities:

Knowledge of the operating characteristics of diesel engines, transmissions and auxiliary equipment.

Knowledge of the repair and maintenance requirements of transit vehicles, assemblies, and component parts.

Knowledge of shop equipment, precision testing and diagnostic instruments, and specialized tools required for the repair and maintenance of transit equipment.

Knowledge of record keeping requirements pertaining to the repair and maintenance of transit equipment.

Knowledge of the occupational hazards and safety precautions required in mechanical repair work.

Ability to analyze, diagnoses, repair, maintain, and overhaul a variety of heavy-duty engines, transmissions and auxiliary equipment.

Ability to make field repairs on transit equipment using portable repair tools. Ability to prepare and maintain records of mechanical repair and maintenance

work. Ability to follow verbal and written instructions. Ability to train entry and mid-level mechanics in mechanical repair work. Ability to make decisions and work with minimum supervision.

Physical strength and agility sufficient to perform assigned duties.


b. 3M: Service Mechanic or Class B Servicer Major Functions: This is skilled mechanical work in the maintenance, repair and overhaul of transit equipment. Employee performs skilled mechanical work in all phases of maintenance, repair of diesel engines and auxiliary equipment. Work involves the diagnosis, testing, adjustment, repair and maintenance of component parts of transit equipment including engines, transmissions, brakes, fuel pumps, air-conditioning, and electrical systems. Employee uses shop equipment, precision instruments and specialized tools in the performance of assigned duties. Required Knowledge and Abilities:

Knowledge of record keeping requirements pertaining to the repair and maintenance of transit equipment.

Knowledge of the operating characteristics of heavy-duty engines and auxiliary equipment.

Knowledge of the repair and maintenance requirements of transit vehicles, assemblies and component parts.

Knowledge of shop equipment, precision testing and diagnostic instruments, and specialized tools required for the repair and maintenance of transit equipment.

Knowledge of the operating principles of diesel and gasoline engines. Knowledge of the occupational hazards and safety precautions required in mechanical

repair works.

Ability to diagnose, repair and maintain a variety of heavy-duty engines and auxiliary equipment.

Ability to make field repairs on transit equipment using portable repair tools. Ability to prepare and maintain records of mechanical repair and maintenance work. Ability to follow verbal and written instructions. Skill in the diagnosis, repair, and maintenance of mechanical equipment.

Physical strength and agility sufficient to perform assigned duties.

c. 2M: Mechanic Helper or Bus Servicer

Major Functions: Mechanic is considered an entry-level training/learning position, and the employee must be under the direct supervision of a senior mechanic or maintenance supervisor at all times. This is semi-skilled mechanical work at the sub-journeyman level in varied maintenance, repair and overhaul of transit equipment. Employee performs semi-skilled mechanical work in all phases of maintenance, repair and replacement of diesel engines and auxiliary equipment. Work involves assisting the senior mechanics in a variety of tasks in repairing and overhauling component parts of transit equipment such as engines, transmissions, brakes, fuel pumps, air conditioning and electrical systems. Employee uses


basic hand tools and power tools suited to mechanical, electrical and hydraulic systems repair work. Required Knowledge and Abilities:

Some knowledge of the construction, design, repair and adjustment of a wide variety of heavy-duty engines and components of auxiliary systems.

Some knowledge of the tools and equipment needed for major and minor repairs of diesel and gasoline powered equipment.

Some knowledge of the principles of operation of heavy-duty engines. Some knowledge of the occupational hazards and safety precautions of mechanical

repair work. Ability to make field repairs on equipment utilizing portable repair tools. Ability to follow oral and written instructions. Ability to develop skill in the care and use of tools, equipment and materials of the

mechanical trade. Sufficient physical strength and agility to perform automotive and motor coach

servicing and general maintenance work. Must successfully pass all reviews and interviews while in a training/learning

capacity.


ATTACHMENT NO. 5 NABI Drawing of Camera Cable End Locations


ATTACHMENT NO. 6

WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST

ITEM YEAR MILEAGE

Air Compressor (Wabco 30.4) 2 Unlimited

Air Dryer (SKF Dual Turbo 2000) 1 Unlimited

Alternator (Niehoff C703 ‐ 42') 2 Unlimited

APC System (UTA) 2 Unlimited

Axles, Drive and Non‐Drive (Meritor) 2 100,000

Body Panels (any panel that is added

to the skeletal structure, including

access doors) 3 150,000

Brake System ‐ Mounted on the axles

(excluding wear surfaces) 1 50,000

Destination Sign (Twin Vision) 3 Unlimited

Door System (Vapor) 2 Unlimited

Engine (Limitations and Exclusions

listed in accompanying Cummins

parchment). (Cummins) 2 Unlimited

Exterior LED Lighting (Dialight) 2 Unlimited

HVAC, including compressor (Thermo

King) 2 Unlimited

Hybrid System (Allison) 2 Unlimited

Flooring (Greenwood Forest Products

XL Bus Panels) 12 Unlimited

Power Steering System 1 Unlimited

Radiator / CAC (Young Touchstone) 1 Unlimited

Skeletal Structural Integrity and

Corrosion including structural

elements only ‐ does not include

body panels. (Skeletal Structure is all

of the welded components of the

structure). 12 600,000

Starter w/OCP (Delco) 2 Unlimited

Transmission (Allison) 2 Unlimited

W/C Ramp (T & T) 1 Unlimited

(INCLUDING EXTENDED WARRANTIES WHERE APPLICABLE)

NABI‐WARRANTY OFFERING

VehicleTechnicalWorksheet

MASSACHUSETTS PORT AUTHORITY 42’ BRT CNG

Vehicle Technical Information

Airport Shuttle Bus RFP Page 1 of 8 April 2010

1. BUS MANUFACTURER North American Bus Industries, Inc. (NABI) Bus Model 42-BRT CNG

2. BASIC BODY CONSTRUCTION

Type Monocoque

3. DIMENSIONS Overall Length

o Over Bumpers 43 Ft. 3 In. o Over Body 42 Ft. 5 In.

Overall Width

o Over Body excluding Mirrors 102 In. o Over Body including Mirrors - driving position 126.92 In. o Over Tires Front Axles 101 In. o Over Tires Rear Axles 102 In.

Overall Height

o Over all Height (maximum) 133.0 In. o Overall Height (main roof line) 133.0 In.

Angle of Approach (8 Deg. w/ skid plates) 9.0 Deg. Breakover Angle 8.0 Deg. Angle of Departure 9.0 Deg. Doorway Dimensions Front Rear

o Width Between Door Posts 40.5 in 52.5 in o Door Width Between Panels N/A in 46.0 in o C. Clear Door Width 36 in 44.0 in o Doorway Height 78 in 78.0 in o Knuckle Clearance 1.5 in 1.5 in

Step Height from Ground (measured at center of doorway)

Front Doorway, Empty Rear Doorway, Empty o (Kneeled) a. 12.5 inches a. 15.5 inches

R1 R2

a

b




o (Unkneeled) b. 15.5 inches b. 15.5 inches

Interior Head Room (center of aisle) o Front Axle Location 95.0 In. o Drive Axle Location 77.0 In.

Floor Height Above Ground

o at Front door 16.63 In. o at Front Axle 17.2 In. o at Drive Axle 35.1 In. o at Rear door 16.7 In.

Minimum Ground Clearance (between bus and ground, with bus unkneeled)

o Excluding Axles 10.14 In. o Including Axles 6.6 In.

Horizontal Turning Envelope (see diagram below)

o Outside Body Turning Radius, TR0 (including bumper) 45 Ft. 5 In.

o Front Inner Corner Radius, TR1 40 Ft. 0.55 In. o Front Wheel Inner Turning Radius, TR2 33 Ft. 10.4 In. o Front Wheel Outer Turning Radius, TR3 40 Ft. 0.55 In. o Inside Body Turning Radius, TR4

(including bumper) 22 Ft. 5.96 In

TR0

TR2 TR3

TR1

TR4







Wheelbase 307.83 In.

Overhang, Centerline of Axle Over Bumper o Front 7 Ft. 3.3 In. o Rear 10 Ft. 3 In.

Floor Interior Length 35 Ft. 6 In. Interior Width (excluding coving) 8 Ft. 1 In. Minimum distance between Wheelhouses:

o Front: 36.2 In. o Rear: 39.5 In. o Maximum interior floor slope (from horizontal) 3.1 Deg.

Passenger Capacity Provided

o Total Maximum Seating (All perimeter seating) 32

4. ENGINE, MAIN Manufacturer Cummins Type CNG Model Number ISL G+ 280 HP (2010) Net S.A.E. Horsepower 280_HP at _2000_RPM Net S.A.E. Torque 900_lb. ft. at _1300_RPM Crankcase Oil Capacity

o New Engine, wet 7.3__gals. Turbocharger, Make & Model Holset H40W Maximum Speed, no load 2400__RPM Maximum Speed, full load 2200____RPM Speed at Idle 600-800__RPM Speed at Fast Idle _ Adjustable_RPM

5. TRANSMISSION

Manufacturer Allison Transmission Type Automatic with Retarder Model Number B400R Speeds 5 Fluid Capacity [Including heat exchanger and filter(s)] 32 Qts.

6. VOLTAGE REGULATOR Manufacturer C.E. Niehoff Model Integral

7. VOLTAGE EQUALIZER

Manufacturer Vanner Model 70-100




8. ALTERNATOR Manufacturer C.E. Niehoff Type Air Cooled Model C706__/ 24V Output at Idle 200_Amps Output at Maximum Speed 300_Amps Drive Type Belt

9. STARTER MOTOR

Manufacturer Delco Type Electric Model 42 MT

10. AIR COMPRESSOR

Manufacturer WABCO Type Twin Reciprocating Rated Capacity 30.4 cfm Drive Type Gear rpm Governor Bendix D-2

o ) Cut-in Pressure 110 psi o ) Cut-Out Pressure 175 psi

11. AXLE, FRONT

Manufacturer Arvin Meritor Type Front Steer, Solid Beam Model Number FH946

12. AXLE, REAR

Manufacturer Arvin Meritor Type Single Reduction Drive Model Number 71163

13. SUSPENSION SYSTEM

Manufacturer NABI Type: Hydraulic Damped Springs: Goodyear - Air

14. WHEELS AND TIRES

Wheels Make Alcoa Dura-Bright Size 8.25 x 22.5 Material Aluminum

Tires Manufacturer Firestone CTR az Type Low Profile Size 305/70R22.5




Load Range/Air Press. H/125 lbs/p.s.i.

15. STEERING, POWER Pump

Manufacturer & Model No. Eaton 26513 RAS Type Gear

Booster/Gear Box Manufacturer & Model No. ZF Type Pump Driven, Power Assist Power Steering Fluid Capacity 11.25 gals

16. BRAKES

Make of Fundamental Brake System Arvin-Meritor Brake Chambers Vendor's Size

o Front MGM 24” o Rear MGM 24/30

Brake Discs Front & Rear o Manufacturer Arvin Meritor o Diameter 16.5_In.

Brake Lining Manufacturer Arvin Meritor o Type EX225 o Identification MA720

17. COOLING SYSTEM Radiator/Charge Air Cooler

Manufacturer Young Touchstone/API Type Bar & Plate Model Number 5029887

Total Cooling and Heating System Capacity 33_Gals. Radiator Fan Speed Control Engine ECM__Type Surge Tank, Capacity 20_Qts. Overheat Alarm Temperature Sending Unit Setting 220_ F Shutdown Temperature Setting 230_ F

18. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT

Manufacturer Thermo King Model Athenia S960 (roof mount) Heating System Capacity 120,000 B.T.U. Air Conditioning Capacity 160,000 B.T.U. Ventilating Capacity 2,400 cfm Compressor

o Manufacturer & Model Thermo King – X430 o No. of Cylinders 4 o Refrigerant R407c Type 17 Lbs.




Under Seat Heaters o Manufacturer A.R. Lintern o Quantity 2

Controls o Manufacturer & Model T K (Athenia) Intelligaire III o Type Electronic

Driver's Heater o Manufacturer A.R. Lintern o Model No. 6675-4 o Capacity 70,000 B.T.U.

Ventilation System o Type Filtered Air

Coolant Heater o Make & Model Webasto NGW 300 o Capacity (KW) 30.0

19. INTERIOR LIGHTING

Manufacturer Pretoria Type LED

20. DOORS

Front & Rear o Manufacturer of Operating Equipment Vapor o Type of Door Plug Type o Type of Operating Equipment Electric over Air

21. PASSENGER WINDOWS

Manufacturer Dura Model Dura Type Lower Fixed, Upper Transom

22. MIRRORS

Manufacturer & Model No. Right Side Exterior B&R CS-22 Left Side Exterior B&R RS-16

23. SEATS (All Perimeter Seating)

Manufacturer AmSeCo Model � Metropolitan Type Transit

24. PAINT

Manufacturer Dupont Type Low VOC




25. WHEELCHAIR RAMP EQUIPMENT Manufacturer & Model No. T&T Type Self-Contained Hydraulic Capacity 600 Lbs. Width of Platform 30 In. Length of Platform 48 In. System Fluid Capacity 1 Qts.

26. WHEELCHAIR SECUREMENT EQUIPMENT

Manufacturer AmSeCo Model No. ARS w/Q-Straint Belts

27. DESTINATION SIGNS

Manufacturer Twin Vision Type Smart Series All LED

o Front Sign 16X160-13mm o Side Sign 14X108-8mm o Rear Sign 16X48-10mm

28. ELECTRICAL

Multiplex System o Manufacturer I/O Controls o Model No. Dinex G3 w/ RF

Batteries o Manufacturer TBD o Type/Group 31 o CCA 1150

29. COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

GPS o Manufacturer N/A o Model No. N/A

P.A. System Manufacturer &Model No.

o Amplifier REI 700962 o Microphone REI 48011BK o Int. Speakers Mito (number 8 ) o Ext. Speaker GFI (number 1 )

Camera System o (The Authority will Purchase system and Install at a later date) o 8 prewired locations for future Camera installations.

Radio System o Motorola, XTL2500 Installed by the Authority

NABIWarranty